Application Server Enterprise Web Interface

Administration Guide

Release 21.0
Document Version 3

9737 Washingtonian Boulevard, Suite 350

Gaithersburg, MD 20878
Tel +1 301.977.9440
[Link]
 BroadWorks® Guide

Copyright Notice
Copyright© 2015 BroadSoft, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Any technical documentation that is made available by BroadSoft, Inc. is proprietary and
confidential and is considered the copyrighted work of BroadSoft, Inc.
This publication is for distribution under BroadSoft non-disclosure agreement only. No
part of this publication may be duplicated without the express written permission of
BroadSoft, Inc., 9737 Washingtonian Boulevard, Suite 350, Gaithersburg, MD 20878.
BroadSoft reserves the right to make changes without prior notice.
Trademarks
Any product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered
trademarks of BroadSoft or their respective companies and are hereby acknowledged.
This document is printed in the United States of America.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 2 OF 350
 Document Revision History

Release Version Reason for Change Date Author

14.0 1 Updated for re-branding. January 9, 2006 Roberta Boyle

14.0 1 Updated for EVs 21704, 30015, and March 13, 2006 Robb Surridge
30084: Administrator ID and browser
requirements.

14.0 1 Updated for Release 14. July 25, 2006 Roberta Boyle

14.0 1 Edited document. September 1, 2006 Patricia Renaud

14.0 2 Edited changes that were made. October 17, 2006 Patricia Renaud

14.0 3 Updated document for Client Management February 23, 2007 Leif R. Montin
Services (CMS).

14.0 3 Edited changes. February 28, 2007 Patricia Renaud

14.0 4 Updated document for Releases 14.sp1 June 19, 2008 Patricia Renaud
through 14.sp6. Also removed information
related to the Client Management System
(CMS).

14.0 4 Edited changes and published document. June 19, 2008 Patricia Renaud

15.0 1 Updated document for Release 15.0. June 19, 2008 Patricia Renaud

15.0 1 Reviewed document. July 1, 2008 Patricia Renaud

15.0 1 Updated section 10.8 Passcode Rules for September 23, Roberta Boyle
EV 67907. 2008

15.0 1 Updated section 10.6.1 Configure Feature September 24, Roberta Boyle
Access Codes for EV 67093. 2008

15.0 1 Updated the following sections for September 26, Roberta Boyle
EV 67117: 2008
 5.5.2 Add Identity/Device Profile
 5.5.3 Modify Identity/Device Profile
15.0 1 Edited changes and published document. September 29, Andrea Fitzwilliam
2008

15.0 2 Added section 12.3 Configure External October 1, 2008 Roberta Boyle
Custom Ringback for EV 66663.
Updated section 11.2.4 Configure Call
Processing Policies for EV 66663.
Updated section 12.9 Configure Call
Processing Policies for EV 66663.

15.0 2 Added section 12.2 Assign Home Zone for October 29, 2008 Goska Auerbach
EV 69597.

15.0 2 Edited changes and published document. December 23, 2008 Andrea Fitzwilliam

16.0 1 Updated document for Release 16.0. December 24, 2008 Goska Auerbach

16.0 1 Updated the following sections for April 2, 2009 Roberta Boyle
EV 91292:
4.2.3 Add Group with Wizard
11.3.7 Authorize Services and Service
Packs
13.2.3 Add Group with Wizard
Deleted a note for each section.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 3 OF 350
 Release Version Reason for Change Date Author

16.0 1 Made additional changes for Release 16.0 June 9, 2009 Goska Auerbach

16.0 1 Edited and published document. August 27, 2009 Patricia Renaud

17.0 1 Updated document for Release 17.0. September 14, Goska Auerbach
2009

17.0 1 Updated section 4.12 Virtual On-Net April 26, 2010 Goska Auerbach
Enterprise Extensions for EV 110252 and
sections 5 Resources Menu, 11.2.3 Modify
Group Web Policies, and 11.3.10 Assign
Office Zones for EV 110465.

17.0 1 Edited changes and published document. April 27, 2010 Andrea Fitzwilliam

17.0 2 Updated section 6.5 In-Call Service May 6, 2010 Goska Auerbach
Activation for EV 111567.

17.0 2 Edited changes and published document. June 2, 2010 Andrea Fitzwilliam

18.0 1 Updated document for Release 18.0. June 3, 2010 Goska Auerbach

18.0 1 Updated section 8.2.3 Add Digit Pattern December 7, 2011 Goska Auerbach
Criteria Entry for EV 155609.

18.0 1 Updated section 8.3 Profiles for December 14, 2011 Goska Auerbach
EV 155929.

18.0 1 Updated section 4.9.3 Add Event for December 20, 2011 Goska Auerbach
EV 156507 and section 10.6.1 Configure
Feature Access Codes for EV 156538.

18.0 1 Edited changes and published document. December 21, 2011 Jessica Boyle

19.0 1 Updated document for Release 19.0. January 18, 2011 Goska Auerbach

19.0 1 Updated section [Link] Users Tab (All January 18, 2012 Goska Auerbach
Devices).

19.0 1 Updated section [Link] Users Tab (All November 28, 2012 Goska Auerbach
Devices) for EV 179998.

19.0 1 Edited changes and published document. December 12, 2012 Patricia Renaud

19.0 2 Corrected section numbering. December 20, 2012 Goska Auerbach

19.0 2 Edited changes and published document. December 21, 2012 Patricia Renaud

20.0 1 Updated document for Release 20.0. January 3, 2013 Goska Auerbach

20.0 1 Edited changes and published document. December 5, 2013 Jessica Boyle

21.0 1 Updated document for Release 21.0. January 3, 2014 Goska Auerbach

21.0 1 Updated the BroadSoft legal notice. October 15, 2014 Goska Auerbach

21.0 1 Edited changes. December 10, 2014 Joan Renaud

21.0 1 Rebranded and published document. December 22, 2014 Joan Renaud

21.0 2 Made editorial changes. January 15, 2015 Goska Auerbach

21.0 2 Edited changes and published document. February 17, 2015 Andrea Fitzwilliam

21.0 3 Updated section [Link] Configure May 13, 2015 Goska Auerbach
Capacity Management and Assign Trunk
Groups for PR-47443.

21.0 2 Edited changes and published document. July 6, 2015 Jessica Boyle

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 4 OF 350
 Table of Contents

INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................... 19
1 Summary of Changes .................................................................................................................... 20
1.1 Changes for Release 21.0, Document Version 3 .................................................................... 20
1.2 Changes for Release 21.0, Document Version 2 .................................................................... 20
1.3 Changes for Release 21.0, Document Version 1 .................................................................... 20
1.4 Changes for Release 20.0, Document Version 1 .................................................................... 21
1.5 Changes for Release 19.0, Document Version 2 .................................................................... 21
1.6 Changes for Release 19.0, Document Version 1 .................................................................... 21
1.7 Changes for Release 18.0, Document Version 1 .................................................................... 22
1.8 Changes for Release 17.0, Document Version 2 .................................................................... 23
1.9 Changes for Release 17.0, Document Version 1 .................................................................... 23
1.10 Changes for Release 16.0, Document Version 1 .................................................................... 25
1.11 Changes for Release 15.0, Document Version 2 .................................................................... 25
1.12 Changes for Release 15.0, Document Version 1 .................................................................... 25
1.13 Changes for Releases 14.sp1 through 14.sp6, Document Version 4 .................................... 26
2 About This Guide ........................................................................................................................... 28
ENTERPRISE ADMINISTRATION ......................................................................................................... 29
3 Enterprise Roles and Responsibilities ....................................................................................... 30
3.1 Task Distribution in BroadWorks .............................................................................................. 30
3.2 Types of Tasks .......................................................................................................................... 31
3.2.1 Manage All Groups ........................................................................................................... 31
3.2.2 Manage Selected Groups ................................................................................................ 32
3.2.3 User-related Tasks ........................................................................................................... 32
3.3 Group Administrator .................................................................................................................. 32
3.4 Department Administrator ......................................................................................................... 32
3.5 Users .......................................................................................................................................... 32
3.6 Enterprise Home Page .............................................................................................................. 33
4 Profile Menu .................................................................................................................................... 34
4.1 Access Profile Menu.................................................................................................................. 35
4.2 Groups........................................................................................................................................ 35
4.2.1 List Groups ........................................................................................................................ 35
4.2.2 Add Group ......................................................................................................................... 36
4.2.3 Add Group with Wizard .................................................................................................... 38
4.3 Users .......................................................................................................................................... 46
4.3.1 List Users .......................................................................................................................... 46
4.4 Service Instances ...................................................................................................................... 47
4.4.1 List Service Instances....................................................................................................... 47
4.5 Profile ......................................................................................................................................... 48
4.5.1 Display or Modify Your Enterprise Profile........................................................................ 48

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 5 OF 350
 4.6 Change Password ..................................................................................................................... 49
4.7 Administrators ............................................................................................................................ 50
4.7.1 List Enterprise Administrators .......................................................................................... 50
4.7.2 Add Enterprise Administrator ........................................................................................... 51
4.7.3 Modify Enterprise Administrator ....................................................................................... 52
4.7.4 Delete Enterprise Administrator ....................................................................................... 58
4.8 Departments .............................................................................................................................. 59
4.8.1 List Departments............................................................................................................... 59
4.8.2 Add Department ............................................................................................................... 60
4.8.3 Modify Department ........................................................................................................... 61
4.8.4 Delete Department ........................................................................................................... 61
4.9 Schedules .................................................................................................................................. 62
4.9.1 List and Delete Schedules ............................................................................................... 62
4.9.2 Add Schedule ................................................................................................................... 63
4.9.3 Add Event.......................................................................................................................... 63
4.9.4 Modify Schedule ............................................................................................................... 66
4.10 Call Processing Policies ............................................................................................................ 67
4.11 Dial Plan Policy .......................................................................................................................... 73
4.11.1 Add Access Code ............................................................................................................. 75
4.11.2 Modify or Delete Access Code ........................................................................................ 76
4.12 Virtual On-Net Enterprise Extensions ....................................................................................... 77
4.13 Voice VPN.................................................................................................................................. 78
4.13.1 Configure Voice VPN Rules ............................................................................................. 78
4.13.2 Add Voice VPN Policy ...................................................................................................... 79
4.13.3 Modify or Delete Voice VPN Policy ................................................................................. 80
4.14 Dialable Caller ID ....................................................................................................................... 81
4.14.1 View Dialable Caller ID Settings ...................................................................................... 82
4.14.2 Configure Dialable Caller ID Settings and Prioritize Entries........................................... 83
4.14.3 Add Dialable Caller ID Criteria Entry ............................................................................... 84
4.14.4 Modify or Delete Dialable Caller ID Entry ........................................................................ 86
5 Resources Menu ............................................................................................................................ 88
5.1 Access Resources Menu .......................................................................................................... 89
5.2 Carriers....................................................................................................................................... 89
5.2.1 List Carriers ....................................................................................................................... 90
5.2.2 Add Carriers ...................................................................................................................... 90
5.2.3 Modify Carriers.................................................................................................................. 91
5.2.4 Delete Carriers .................................................................................................................. 92
5.3 Group Paging Targets Capacity ............................................................................................... 92
5.3.1 View Group Paging Targets Capacity ............................................................................. 93
5.4 Identity/Device Endpoints.......................................................................................................... 93
5.5 Identity/Device Profiles .............................................................................................................. 94
5.5.1 List Identity/Device Profiles .............................................................................................. 94
5.5.2 Add Identity/Device Profile ............................................................................................... 95

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 6 OF 350
 5.5.3 Modify Identity/Device Profile ........................................................................................... 97
5.5.4 Delete Identity/Device Profile ......................................................................................... 107
5.6 Domains ................................................................................................................................... 109
5.6.1 List Domains ................................................................................................................... 109
5.6.2 View Groups Assigned to Domain................................................................................. 109
5.7 Route Point External Systems ................................................................................................ 110
5.7.1 View Route Point External Systems .............................................................................. 110
5.7.2 View Route Point External System Usage.................................................................... 111
5.8 Network Classes of Service .................................................................................................... 111
5.8.1 List Network Classes of Service .................................................................................... 111
5.8.2 View Groups Assigned to Network Class of Service .................................................... 112
5.9 Numbers................................................................................................................................... 113
5.9.1 Display Numbers ............................................................................................................ 113
5.10 Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges.......................................................................................... 113
5.10.1 Display Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges ................................................................... 113
5.11 Office Zones............................................................................................................................. 114
5.11.1 List Office Zones ............................................................................................................. 114
5.11.2 View Office Zone Usage ................................................................................................ 115
5.12 Services.................................................................................................................................... 115
5.12.1 Display Services ............................................................................................................. 115
5.13 Service Packs .......................................................................................................................... 116
5.13.1 Display Service Packs .................................................................................................... 116
5.13.2 Add Service Packs ......................................................................................................... 117
5.13.3 Modify Service Packs ..................................................................................................... 119
5.13.4 Delete Service Packs ..................................................................................................... 119
5.14 Service Pack Usage ................................................................................................................ 120
5.14.1 Display Service Pack Usage.......................................................................................... 120
5.15 Session Admission Control Capacity ..................................................................................... 120
5.16 System Defined Communication Barring Criteria .................................................................. 122
5.16.1 View System Defined Communication Barring Criteria Usage .................................... 122
5.17 System Defined Communication Barring Incoming Criteria.................................................. 123
5.17.1 View System-Defined Communication Barring Incoming Criteria ............................... 123
5.17.2 View System-Defined Communication Barring Incoming Criteria Usage ................... 124
5.18 Trunking Call Capacity ............................................................................................................ 124
5.19 Activate Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges ........................................................................... 125
5.20 IMRNs ...................................................................................................................................... 126
5.20.1 View IMRNs .................................................................................................................... 126
5.20.2 Assign IMRNs ................................................................................................................. 127
5.20.3 Unassign IMRNs............................................................................................................. 128
5.21 Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers.................................................................................... 129
6 Services Menu .............................................................................................................................. 130
6.1 Access Services Menu ............................................................................................................ 131
6.2 BroadWorks Communicator ................................................................................................... 131

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 7 OF 350
 6.2.1 Configure BroadWorks Communicator ......................................................................... 131
6.3 External Custom Ringback ..................................................................................................... 132
6.3.1 Configure External Custom Ringback Settings............................................................. 132
6.4 Enhanced Call Logs ................................................................................................................ 132
6.4.1 View Enhanced Call Logs Settings ............................................................................... 133
6.5 In-Call Service Activation ........................................................................................................ 133
6.5.1 Configure In-Call Service Activation Settings................................................................ 133
6.6 Pre-alerting Announcement .................................................................................................... 134
6.6.1 Configure Pre-alerting Announcement Settings ........................................................... 134
6.7 Voice Portal .............................................................................................................................. 135
6.7.1 View and Configure Voice Portal Scope ....................................................................... 135
6.8 Voice Messaging ..................................................................................................................... 136
6.8.1 Configure Voice Messaging Settings ............................................................................ 136
6.9 Advice Of Charge .................................................................................................................... 137
6.10 Enterprise Trunk ...................................................................................................................... 137
6.10.1 View Enterprise Trunks .................................................................................................. 138
6.10.2 Add Enterprise Trunk ..................................................................................................... 138
6.10.3 View, Modify, or Delete Users........................................................................................ 145
6.10.4 Modify Enterprise Trunk ................................................................................................. 147
6.10.5 Delete Enterprise Trunk ................................................................................................. 148
6.11 MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint ........................................................................................... 149
6.11.1 View and Enable SMS Templates ................................................................................. 149
6.11.2 Add MWI Delivery Custom Template ............................................................................ 150
6.11.3 Modify MWI Delivery Custom Template........................................................................ 152
6.12 Number Portability Query ........................................................................................................ 153
6.12.1 Configure Number Portability Query ............................................................................. 155
6.13 Session Admission Control Group ......................................................................................... 156
6.13.1 View Session Admission Control Groups ..................................................................... 157
6.13.2 Add Session Admission Control Group ......................................................................... 157
6.13.3 Modify Session Admission Control Group .................................................................... 159
6.13.4 Delete Session Admission Control Group..................................................................... 160
6.14 Session Admission Control White List.................................................................................... 161
6.14.1 View and Configure Session Admission Control White List ......................................... 163
6.15 BroadWorks Mobility ............................................................................................................... 164
6.16 Zone Calling Restrictions ........................................................................................................ 165
6.16.1 View and Configure Zone Calling Restrictions.............................................................. 165
7 Call Center Menu .......................................................................................................................... 167
7.1 Access Call Center Menu ....................................................................................................... 168
7.2 Agent Default Settings (All Services)...................................................................................... 168
7.3 Agent Threshold Profiles (Call Center – Premium)................................................................ 169
7.3.1 View Agent Threshold Profiles ....................................................................................... 170
7.3.2 Add Agent Threshold Profile .......................................................................................... 171
7.3.3 Modify or Delete Agent Threshold Profile ..................................................................... 173

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 8 OF 350
 7.4 Agent Unavailable Codes (Call Center – Standard, Call Center – Premium, and Route Point)174
7.4.1 Configure Agent Unavailable Codes Settings............................................................... 174
7.4.2 View, Activate, or Deactivate Agent Unavailable Codes .............................................. 175
7.4.3 Add Agent Unavailable Code......................................................................................... 176
7.4.4 Modify or Delete Agent Unavailable Code .................................................................... 176
7.5 Call Disposition Codes (Call Center – Premium and Route Point) ....................................... 177
7.5.1 View, Activate, or Deactivate Enterprise-level Disposition Codes ............................... 177
7.5.2 Add Disposition Code ..................................................................................................... 178
7.5.3 Modify or Delete Disposition Code ................................................................................ 178
7.5.4 View Disposition Code Usage ....................................................................................... 179
7.6 Routing Priority Settings (All Call Center Services) ............................................................... 180
7.7 External Reporting Settings (Call Center – Standard and Call Center – Premium) ............ 181
7.8 Report Branding (Call Center – Standard and Call Center – Premium)............................... 181
7.9 Report Templates (Call Center – Standard and Call Center – Premium) ............................ 182
7.9.1 List Report Templates .................................................................................................... 183
7.9.2 Add Report Template ..................................................................................................... 183
7.9.3 Modify, Delete, Enable, or Disable Report Template ................................................... 185
7.9.4 View Report Template Usage ........................................................................................ 186
7.10 Scheduled Reports (Call Center – Standard and Call Center – Premium) .......................... 187
7.10.1 View Scheduled Reports ................................................................................................ 187
7.10.2 Schedule Report ............................................................................................................. 187
7.10.3 Modify or Delete Scheduled Report .............................................................................. 192
8 Communication Barring Menu................................................................................................... 194
8.1 Access Communication Barring Menu ................................................................................... 195
8.2 Digit Pattern Criteria ................................................................................................................ 195
8.2.1 View Digit Pattern Criteria Entries.................................................................................. 195
8.2.2 View Digit Pattern Criteria Entry Details and Usage ..................................................... 196
8.2.3 Add Digit Pattern Criteria Entry ...................................................................................... 199
8.2.4 Modify or Delete Digit Pattern Criteria Entry ................................................................. 200
8.3 Profiles...................................................................................................................................... 201
8.3.1 View Profiles ................................................................................................................... 201
8.3.2 View Profile Details and Usage ..................................................................................... 202
8.3.3 Add Profile....................................................................................................................... 205
8.3.4 Modify or Delete Profile .................................................................................................. 209
8.3.5 Select Default Profile ...................................................................................................... 210
9 Meet-Me Conferencing Menu ..................................................................................................... 211
9.1 Access Meet-Me Conferencing Menu .................................................................................... 211
9.2 Meet-Me Conference Ports ..................................................................................................... 211
9.2.1 View Meet-Me Conference Ports................................................................................... 211
10 Utilities Menu ................................................................................................................................ 212
10.1 Access Utilities Menu .............................................................................................................. 213
10.2 BroadWorks Anywhere Number Lookup ............................................................................... 213

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 9 OF 350
 10.3 Common Phone List................................................................................................................ 214
10.3.1 Add Common Phone Number ....................................................................................... 214
10.3.2 Modify Common Phone Number ................................................................................... 215
10.3.3 Import Phone List............................................................................................................ 216
10.3.4 Delete Phone Number from Common Phone List ........................................................ 216
10.4 Device Profile Authentication Password Rules ...................................................................... 217
10.4.1 Set Device Profile Authentication Password Rules ...................................................... 217
10.5 Enterprise Directory ................................................................................................................. 219
10.5.1 Display Enterprise Directory........................................................................................... 219
10.5.2 Display Enterprise Directory Summary ......................................................................... 220
10.5.3 Display Enterprise Directory Detail ................................................................................ 221
10.6 Feature Access Codes ............................................................................................................ 222
10.6.1 Configure Feature Access Codes.................................................................................. 222
10.7 Password Rules ....................................................................................................................... 230
10.7.1 Set Password Rules ....................................................................................................... 230
10.8 Passcode Rules ....................................................................................................................... 233
10.8.1 Set Passcode Rules ....................................................................................................... 233
10.9 SIP Authentication Password Rules (AS Mode) .................................................................... 234
10.9.1 Set SIP Authentication Password Rules ....................................................................... 234
10.10 Answer Confirmation ............................................................................................................... 237
10.10.1 Configure Answer Confirmation ................................................................................... 237
10.11 Device Management Event Queues ...................................................................................... 238
10.11.1 View or Cancel In Progress and Pending Events ....................................................... 238
10.11.2 View Completed Events ............................................................................................... 239
10.12 LDAP Directory ........................................................................................................................ 240
10.12.1 Configure LDAP Directory ............................................................................................ 240
10.13 Service Pack Migration............................................................................................................ 241
10.13.1 Display Service Pack Migration Tasks ........................................................................ 242
10.13.2 Add Service Pack Migration Task ................................................................................ 243
10.13.3 Modify Service Pack Migration Task............................................................................ 248
10.13.4 Copy Service Pack Migration Task .............................................................................. 253
10.13.5 Delete Service Pack Migration Task ............................................................................ 254
10.13.6 Report on Service Pack Migration Task ...................................................................... 256
10.13.7 Terminate Service Pack Migration Task...................................................................... 259
10.14 Verify Translation and Routing................................................................................................ 260
10.15 Voice Portal Branding.............................................................................................................. 262
10.15.1 Select Messages for Voice Portal Branding ................................................................ 262
10.16 Web Portal Branding ............................................................................................................... 263
10.16.1 Configure Web Portal Branding ................................................................................... 263
10.16.2 Create Custom Settings ............................................................................................... 266
10.16.3 Create Custom Web Branding ..................................................................................... 266
10.16.4 Create Custom Web Content ....................................................................................... 266
11 Configure Group Administration, Services, and Resources ............................................... 267

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 10 OF 350
 11.1 Select Group ............................................................................................................................ 267
11.2 Profile Menu ............................................................................................................................. 268
11.2.1 Access Group Profile Menu ........................................................................................... 268
11.2.2 Modify Group Profile ....................................................................................................... 269
11.2.3 Modify Group Web Policies............................................................................................ 271
11.2.4 Configure Call Processing Policies ................................................................................ 275
11.3 Resources Menu ..................................................................................................................... 282
11.3.1 Access Group Resources Menu.................................................................................... 282
11.3.2 Assign Domains .............................................................................................................. 283
11.3.3 Assign Group Paging Targets Capacity ........................................................................ 283
11.3.4 Allocate Meet-Me Conference Ports ............................................................................. 284
11.3.5 Assign Network Classes of Service ............................................................................... 285
11.3.6 Assign Numbers ............................................................................................................. 286
11.3.7 Authorize Services and Service Packs.......................................................................... 289
11.3.8 Configure Trunking Call Capacity .................................................................................. 290
11.3.9 Configure Session Admission Control Capacity ........................................................... 291
11.3.10 Assign Office Zones...................................................................................................... 293
11.3.11 Assign Route Point External Systems ......................................................................... 294
11.4 Services Menu ......................................................................................................................... 295
11.4.1 Access Group Services Menu ....................................................................................... 295
11.4.2 Configure Warning Tone for Group Voice Messaging ................................................. 297
11.4.3 Configure Home Zone for Group Voice Portal .............................................................. 298
11.4.4 Configure Call Capacity Groups .................................................................................... 299
11.4.5 Configure Route Point Settings ..................................................................................... 302
11.4.6 Configure Emergency Zones ......................................................................................... 303
11.4.7 Configure MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint ................................................................. 306
11.4.8 Configure Preferred Carrier Group ................................................................................ 307
11.4.9 Identify Third-Party Voice Mail Support Server ............................................................. 308
11.5 Communication Barring Menu ................................................................................................ 308
11.5.1 Access Communication Barring Menu .......................................................................... 309
11.5.2 Select or View Group Communication Barring Profile.................................................. 309
11.5.3 Select Communication Barring Profile Assignable to Users ........................................ 310
11.6 Call Center Menu..................................................................................................................... 311
11.7 Utilities Menu............................................................................................................................ 312
11.7.1 Access Utilities Menu ..................................................................................................... 312
11.7.2 Intercept Group ............................................................................................................... 312
12 Configure User Services and Settings ..................................................................................... 315
12.1 Select User............................................................................................................................... 315
12.2 Assign Home Zone .................................................................................................................. 316
12.3 Configure External Custom Ringback .................................................................................... 316
12.4 Configure Classmark ............................................................................................................... 317
12.5 Configure Charge Number Service ........................................................................................ 317
12.6 Configure Outgoing Message Waiting Indicator .................................................................... 319

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 11 OF 350
 12.6.1 Add Number.................................................................................................................... 320
12.6.2 Delete Number................................................................................................................ 320
12.7 Configure Third-Party Voice Mail ............................................................................................ 321
12.8 Configure Preferred Carrier User............................................................................................ 322
12.9 Configure Call Processing Policies ......................................................................................... 323
CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATOR........................................................................................................... 327
13 Profile Menu (Customer Administrator) ................................................................................... 328
13.1 Access Profile Menu................................................................................................................ 328
13.2 Groups...................................................................................................................................... 328
13.2.1 List Groups ...................................................................................................................... 328
13.2.2 Add Group ....................................................................................................................... 330
13.2.3 Add Group with Wizard .................................................................................................. 332
13.3 Users ........................................................................................................................................ 340
13.4 Change Password ................................................................................................................... 340
PASSWORD-ONLY ADMINISTRATION ............................................................................................. 341
14 Profile Menu (Password-only Administrator).......................................................................... 342
14.1 Access Profile Menu................................................................................................................ 342
14.2 Change Password ................................................................................................................... 342
14.3 Change User’s Web Password or Voice Portal Passcode ................................................... 343
Index .................................................................................................................................................... 344

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 12 OF 350
 Table of Figures

Figure 1 Enterprise – Profile Menu .......................................................................................................... 33

Figure 2 Enterprise – Profile Menu .......................................................................................................... 35
Figure 3 Enterprise – Groups................................................................................................................... 36
Figure 4 Enterprise – Group Add ............................................................................................................. 36
Figure 5 Group Setup: Step 1 of 6 – Add Group ................................................................................... 38
Figure 6 Group Setup: Step 2 of 6 – Assign Domains .......................................................................... 40
Figure 7 Group Setup: Step 3 of 6 – Add Group Administrator ............................................................ 41
Figure 8 Group Setup: Step 4 of 6 – Authorize Services ...................................................................... 42
Figure 9 Group Setup: Step 5 of 6 – Add Phone Numbers .................................................................. 43
Figure 10 Group Setup: Step 6 of 6 – Add Identity/Device Profiles ...................................................... 44
Figure 11 Group Setup: Step 6 of 6 – Add Identity/Device Profile (IMS Deployments) ...................... 44
Figure 12 Enterprise – Users ................................................................................................................... 46
Figure 13 Enterprise – Service Instances................................................................................................ 47
Figure 14 Enterprise – Profile .................................................................................................................. 48
Figure 15 Enterprise – Change Password .............................................................................................. 49
Figure 16 Enterprise – Administrators ..................................................................................................... 50
Figure 17 Enterprise – Administrator Add ............................................................................................... 51
Figure 18 Enterprise – Administrators Modify ......................................................................................... 53
Figure 19 Enterprise – Enterprise Administrator Policies ....................................................................... 54
Figure 20 Enterprise – Administrators Modify ......................................................................................... 58
Figure 21 Enterprise – Departments ....................................................................................................... 59
Figure 22 Enterprise – Department Add ................................................................................................. 60
Figure 23 Enterprise – Departments Modify ........................................................................................... 61
Figure 24 Enterprise – Departments Modify ........................................................................................... 61
Figure 25 Enterprise – Schedules ........................................................................................................... 62
Figure 26 Enterprise – Schedule Add...................................................................................................... 63
Figure 27 Enterprise – Event Add ............................................................................................................ 63
Figure 28 Event Add – Recurrence Pattern (Daily) ................................................................................ 64
Figure 29 Event Add – Recurrence Pattern (Weekly) ............................................................................ 64
Figure 30 Event Add – Recurrence Pattern (Monthly) ........................................................................... 65
Figure 31 Event Add – Recurrence Pattern (Yearly) .............................................................................. 65
Figure 32 Event Add – Recurrence Range ............................................................................................. 65
Figure 33 Enterprise – Schedule Modify ................................................................................................. 66
Figure 34 Enterprise – Event Modify ....................................................................................................... 66
Figure 35 Enterprise – Call Processing Policies (Top of Page) ............................................................. 68
Figure 36 Enterprise – Call Processing Policies (Bottom of Page)........................................................ 69
Figure 37 Enterprise – Dial Plan Policy ................................................................................................... 74
Figure 38 Enterprise – Dial Plan Policy Add ........................................................................................... 75
Figure 39 Enterprise – Dial Plan Policy Modify ....................................................................................... 76
Figure 40 Enterprise – Virtual On-Net Users........................................................................................... 77
Figure 41 Enterprise – Voice VPN........................................................................................................... 78
Figure 42 Enterprise – Voice VPN Add ................................................................................................... 79
Figure 43 Route – Group ID..................................................................................................................... 80
Figure 44 Treatment – Treatment............................................................................................................ 80
Figure 45 Enterprise – Voice VPN Modify............................................................................................... 81
Figure 46 Enterprise – Dialable Caller ID (Read-only) ........................................................................... 82
Figure 47 Enterprise – Dialable Caller ID ................................................................................................ 83
Figure 48 Enterprise – Dialable Caller ID Criteria Add ........................................................................... 85
Figure 49 Enterprise – Dialable Caller ID Criteria Modify (Top of Page) ............................................... 86
Figure 50 Enterprise – Resources Menu (Top of Page) ........................................................................ 89
Figure 51 Enterprise – Carriers................................................................................................................ 90
Figure 52 Enterprise – Carriers Add ........................................................................................................ 90

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 13 OF 350
 Figure 53 Enterprise – Carriers Modify ................................................................................................... 91
Figure 54 Enterprise – Carriers Modify ................................................................................................... 92
Figure 55 Enterprise – Group Paging Targets Capacity ........................................................................ 93
Figure 56 Enterprise – Identity/Device Endpoints................................................................................... 93
Figure 57 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profiles ....................................................................................... 94
Figure 58 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Add ................................................................................. 95
Figure 59 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Add (IMS Deployments) ................................................ 95
Figure 60 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Profile .............................................................. 98
Figure 61 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Profile (IMS Deployments) ............................. 99
Figure 62 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Configure (same in IMS Deployments) ....... 100
Figure 63 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Users (AS Mode).......................................... 101
Figure 64 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Users (XS Mode).......................................... 102
Figure 65 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Files............................................................... 103
Figure 66 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Files ............................................................... 104
Figure 67 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Custom Tags (same in IMS Deployments). 105
Figure 68 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Custom Tag Add (same in IMS Deployments) .......... 106
Figure 69 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Custom Tag Modify (same in IMS Deployments)...... 106
Figure 70 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify........................................................................... 107
Figure 71 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify (IMS Deployments) ......................................... 108
Figure 72 Enterprise – Domains ............................................................................................................ 109
Figure 73 Enterprise – Domains Modify ................................................................................................ 110
Figure 74 Enterprise – Route Point External Systems ......................................................................... 110
Figure 75 Enterprise – Route Point External System Usage ............................................................... 111
Figure 76 Enterprise – Network Classes of Service ............................................................................. 112
Figure 77 Enterprise – Network Class of Service ................................................................................. 112
Figure 78 Enterprise – Numbers ........................................................................................................... 113
Figure 79 Enterprise – Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges ................................................................... 114
Figure 80 Enterprise – Office Zones ...................................................................................................... 114
Figure 81 Enterprise – Office Zone Usage ............................................................................................ 115
Figure 82 Enterprise – Services (Top of Page)..................................................................................... 116
Figure 83 Enterprise – Service Packs ................................................................................................... 117
Figure 84 Enterprise – Service Packs Add ........................................................................................... 117
Figure 85 Enterprise – Service Packs Modify ....................................................................................... 119
Figure 86 Enterprise – Service Pack Usage ......................................................................................... 120
Figure 87 Enterprise – Session Admission Control Capacity .............................................................. 121
Figure 88 Enterprise – System Defined Communication Barring Criteria ........................................... 122
Figure 89 Enterprise – System Defined Communication Barring Criteria Usage ............................... 122
Figure 90 Enterprise – System Defined Communication Barring Criteria ........................................... 123
Figure 91 Enterprise – System Defined Communication Barring Incoming Criteria Usage ............... 124
Figure 92 Enterprise – Trunking Call Capacity ..................................................................................... 125
Figure 93 Enterprise – Activate Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges .................................................... 125
Figure 94 Enterprise – IMRNs ............................................................................................................... 126
Figure 95 Enterprise – Assign IMRNs ................................................................................................... 127
Figure 96 Enterprise – IMRNs (Unassign IMRN Range) ..................................................................... 128
Figure 97 Enterprise – Unassign IMRNs ............................................................................................... 128
Figure 98 Enterprise – Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers............................................................. 129
Figure 99 Enterprise – Services Menu (Top of Page) .......................................................................... 131
Figure 100 Enterprise – BroadWorks Communicator .......................................................................... 131
Figure 101 Enterprise – External Custom Ringback ............................................................................ 132
Figure 102 Enterprise – Enhanced Call Logs ....................................................................................... 133
Figure 103 Enterprise – In-Call Service Activation ............................................................................... 133
Figure 104 Enterprise – Pre-alerting Announcement ........................................................................... 134
Figure 105 Enterprise – Voice Portal..................................................................................................... 135
Figure 106 Enterprise – Voice Messaging ............................................................................................ 136

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 14 OF 350
 Figure 107 Enterprise – Advice Of Charge ........................................................................................... 137
Figure 108 Enterprise – Enterprise Trunk ............................................................................................. 138
Figure 109 Enterprise – Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing............................................. 139
Figure 110 Enterprise – Add Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing ............................................... 141
Figure 111 Enterprise Trunk – Assign Trunk Group Priorities ............................................................. 143
Figure 112 Enterprise Trunk – Assign Users ........................................................................................ 144
Figure 113 Enterprise Trunk – Assigned Users .................................................................................... 145
Figure 114 Enterprise – Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing ........................................ 147
Figure 115 Enterprise – Modify Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing .......................................... 148
Figure 116 Enterprise – MWI Delivery to Mobile Network.................................................................... 149
Figure 117 Enterprise – MWI Delivery Custom Template – Add ......................................................... 151
Figure 118 Enterprise – MWI Delivery Custom Template – Modify..................................................... 152
Figure 119 Enterprise – Number Portability Query ............................................................................... 155
Figure 120 Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group (Read-only) ............................................ 156
Figure 121 Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group (Read-only) ............................................ 156
Figure 122 Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group Add ......................................................... 157
Figure 123 Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group Modify .................................................... 159
Figure 124 Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group Modify (Read-only) ................................ 160
Figure 125 Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group (Delete) .................................................. 160
Figure 126 Enterprise – Session Admission Control White List........................................................... 163
Figure 127 Enterprise – BroadWorks Mobility....................................................................................... 164
Figure 128 Enterprise – Zone Calling Restrictions ............................................................................... 165
Figure 129 Enterprise – Call Center Menu ............................................................................................ 168
Figure 130 Enterprise – Agent Default Settings (Call Center – Premium) .......................................... 168
Figure 131 Enterprise – Agent Thresholds Profiles .............................................................................. 170
Figure 132 Enterprise – Agent Threshold Profile Add .......................................................................... 171
Figure 133 Enterprise – Agent Threshold Profile Modify (Top of Page) .............................................. 173
Figure 134 Enterprise – Agent Unavailable Codes............................................................................... 174
Figure 135 Enterprise – Agent Unavailable Codes............................................................................... 175
Figure 136 Enterprise – Agent Unavailable Codes Add ....................................................................... 176
Figure 137 Enterprise – Agent Unavailable Codes Modify .................................................................. 176
Figure 138 Enterprise – Call Disposition Codes ................................................................................... 177
Figure 139 Enterprise – Call Disposition Codes Add............................................................................ 178
Figure 140 Enterprise – Call Disposition Codes Modify ....................................................................... 178
Figure 141 Enterprise – Call Disposition Codes Usage ....................................................................... 179
Figure 142 Enterprise – Call Center Routing Policies .......................................................................... 180
Figure 143 Enterprise – Call Center External Reporting Settings........................................................ 181
Figure 144 Enterprise – Report Branding.............................................................................................. 182
Figure 145 Enterprise – Report Templates ........................................................................................... 182
Figure 146 Enterprise – Report Template Add ..................................................................................... 183
Figure 147 Report Template Add – Input Parameters (Agent Interval Statistics Data Template) ..... 184
Figure 148 Report Template Add – Input Parameters (Call Center Call Details Data Template) ..... 185
Figure 149 Enterprise – Report Template Modify ................................................................................. 185
Figure 150 Enterprise – Report Template Modify – Usage .................................................................. 186
Figure 151 Enterprise – Scheduled Reports ......................................................................................... 187
Figure 152 Enterprise – Scheduled Report Add ................................................................................... 188
Figure 153 Scheduled Report Add – Daily Recurrence Pattern .......................................................... 189
Figure 154 Scheduled Report Add – Weekly Recurrence Pattern ...................................................... 189
Figure 155 Scheduled Report Add – Monthly Recurrence Pattern ..................................................... 189
Figure 156 Scheduled Report Add – Yearly Recurrence Pattern........................................................ 190
Figure 157 Scheduled Report Add – Scheduling Details for One-Time Report.................................. 190
Figure 158 Scheduled Report Add – Scheduling Details for Recurring Report .................................. 190
Figure 159 Enterprise – Scheduled Report Modify (Top of Page) ....................................................... 192

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 15 OF 350
 Figure 160 Enterprise – Communication Barring Menu ....................................................................... 195
Figure 161 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria ............................................... 195
Figure 162 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria Modify................................... 196
Figure 163 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria View...................................... 196
Figure 164 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria Modify – Digit Patterns ......... 197
Figure 165 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria View – Digit Patterns............ 197
Figure 166 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria Modify – Usage .................... 198
Figure 167 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria View – Usage ....................... 198
Figure 168 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria Add ....................................... 199
Figure 169 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria Modify – Digit Patterns ......... 199
Figure 170 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria Modify ................................... 200
Figure 171 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profiles .................................................................... 201
Figure 172 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profiles (Read-only)................................................ 201
Figure 173 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify .......................................................... 202
Figure 174 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile View ............................................................. 202
Figure 175 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify – Originating Calls........................... 203
Figure 176 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify – Redirecting Calls .......................... 203
Figure 177 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify – Incoming Calls .............................. 204
Figure 178 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify – Call Me Now Calls ....................... 204
Figure 179 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify – Usage ........................................... 205
Figure 180 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Add .............................................................. 205
Figure 181 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify – Originating Calls ........................... 206
Figure 182 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify – Redirecting Calls .......................... 207
Figure 183 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify – Incoming Calls .............................. 207
Figure 184 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify – Call Me Now Calls........................ 208
Figure 185 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify .......................................................... 209
Figure 186 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profiles .................................................................... 210
Figure 187 Enterprise – Meet-Me Conferencing Menu ........................................................................ 211
Figure 188 Enterprise – Meet-Me Conference Ports ............................................................................ 211
Figure 189 Enterprise – Utilities Menu .................................................................................................. 213
Figure 190 Enterprise – BroadWorks Anywhere Number Lookup ...................................................... 213
Figure 191 Enterprise – Common Phone List....................................................................................... 214
Figure 192 Enterprise – Common Phone List Add ............................................................................... 214
Figure 193 Enterprise – Common Phone List Modify .......................................................................... 215
Figure 194 Enterprise – Common Phone List Import ........................................................................... 216
Figure 195 Enterprise – Common Phone List....................................................................................... 216
Figure 196 Enterprise – Device Profile Authentication Password Rules ............................................. 217
Figure 197 Enterprise – Enterprise Directory........................................................................................ 219
Figure 198 Enterprise – Enterprise Phone List (Summary) ................................................................. 220
Figure 199 Enterprise – Enterprise Phone List (Detail) ........................................................................ 221
Figure 200 Enterprise – Feature Access Codes (Top of Page)........................................................... 222
Figure 201 Enterprise – Password Rules.............................................................................................. 231
Figure 202 Enterprise – Passcode Rules.............................................................................................. 233
Figure 203 Enterprise – SIP Authentication Password Rules .............................................................. 235
Figure 204 Enterprise – Answer Confirmation ...................................................................................... 237
Figure 205 Enterprise – Device Management Event Queues – In Progress/Pending........................ 238
Figure 206 Enterprise – Device Management Event Queues – Completed ....................................... 239
Figure 207 Enterprise – LDAP Directory ............................................................................................... 240
Figure 208 Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks ....................................................................... 242
Figure 209 Service Pack Migration Wizard: Step 1 of 5 – Schedule New Task ................................ 243
Figure 210 Service Pack Migration Wizard: Step 2 of 5 – Select Groups to Migrate ........................ 245
Figure 211 Service Pack Migration Wizard: Step 3 of 5 – User Selection Criteria ............................ 246
Figure 212 Service Pack Migration Wizard: Step 4 of 5 – Services and Packs to Remove ............. 247
Figure 213 Service Pack Migration Wizard: Step 5 of 5 – Services and Packs to Assign ................ 247

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 16 OF 350
 Figure 214 Enterprise – Modify Service Pack Migration Task ............................................................. 248
Figure 215 Enterprise – Modify Service Pack Migration Task – Groups ............................................. 250
Figure 216 Enterprise – Modify Service Pack Migration Task – Select Users .................................... 251
Figure 217 Enterprise – Modify Service Pack Migration Task – Remove ........................................... 252
Figure 218 Enterprise – Modify Service Pack Migration Task – Assign .............................................. 252
Figure 219 Enterprise – Service Packs Migration Tasks ..................................................................... 253
Figure 220 Enterprise – Modify Service Pack Migration Task ............................................................. 254
Figure 221 Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Task Status (Delete Task) ...................................... 255
Figure 222 Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Task Status.............................................................. 256
Figure 223 Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Task Report ............................................................. 258
Figure 224 Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Task Status (Terminate Task) ................................ 259
Figure 225 Enterprise – Verify Translation and Routing (Parameters)................................................ 260
Figure 226 Enterprise – Verify Translation and Routing (SIP Message)............................................. 260
Figure 227 Enterprise – Voice Portal Branding .................................................................................... 262
Figure 228 Enterprise – Web Portal Branding ...................................................................................... 264
Figure 229 Tutorial Page Sample .......................................................................................................... 265
Figure 230 Enterprise – Groups ............................................................................................................ 267
Figure 231 Group – Profile Menu .......................................................................................................... 268
Figure 232 Group – Profile ..................................................................................................................... 269
Figure 233 Group – Group Web Policies .............................................................................................. 271
Figure 234 Group – Call Processing Policies (Top of Page) ............................................................... 275
Figure 235 Group – Call Processing Policies (Bottom of Page) .......................................................... 276
Figure 236 Group – Resources Menu ................................................................................................... 282
Figure 237 Group – Assign Domains .................................................................................................... 283
Figure 238 Group – Group Paging Targets Capacity ........................................................................... 284
Figure 239 Group – Meet-Me Conference Ports .................................................................................. 284
Figure 240 Group – Assign Network Classes of Service ..................................................................... 285
Figure 241 Group – Assign Numbers .................................................................................................... 286
Figure 242 Group – Assign Numbers Add ............................................................................................ 287
Figure 243 Group – Assign Numbers Modify........................................................................................ 288
Figure 244 Group – Assign Numbers (Delete) ..................................................................................... 289
Figure 245 Group – Services ................................................................................................................. 290
Figure 246 Group – Trunking Call Capacity.......................................................................................... 291
Figure 247 Group – Session Admission Control Capacity ................................................................... 292
Figure 248 Group – Assign Office Zones .............................................................................................. 293
Figure 249 Group – Assign Route Point External Systems ................................................................. 294
Figure 250 Group – Services Menu ...................................................................................................... 296
Figure 251 Group – Voice Messaging................................................................................................... 297
Figure 252 Group – Voice Portal ........................................................................................................... 298
Figure 253 Group – Call Capacity ......................................................................................................... 299
Figure 254 Group – Call Capacity Add.................................................................................................. 300
Figure 255 Group – Call Capacity Modify ............................................................................................. 301
Figure 256 Group – Call Capacity ......................................................................................................... 302
Figure 257 Group – Route Point ............................................................................................................ 303
Figure 258 Group – Emergency Zones................................................................................................. 304
Figure 259 Group – Emergency Zones Add ......................................................................................... 305
Figure 260 Group – Emergency Zones Modify..................................................................................... 305
Figure 261 Group – MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint ......................................................................... 306
Figure 262 Group – Preferred Carrier Group ........................................................................................ 307
Figure 263 Group – Third-Party Voice Mail Support ............................................................................ 308
Figure 264 Group – Communication Barring Menu.............................................................................. 309
Figure 265 Group – Communication Barring Profiles ........................................................................... 309
Figure 266 Group – Communication Barring Profiles (Read-only) ...................................................... 309
Figure 267 Group – User Assignable Communication Barring Profiles .............................................. 310
Figure 268 Group – Call Center Menu .................................................................................................. 311

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 17 OF 350
 Figure 269 Group – Call Centers (Call Center – Premium).................................................................. 311
Figure 270 Group – Utilities Menu ......................................................................................................... 312
Figure 271 Group – Intercept Group ..................................................................................................... 313
Figure 272 Group – Users ..................................................................................................................... 315
Figure 273 User – Zone Calling Restrictions ........................................................................................ 316
Figure 274 User – External Custom Ringback ..................................................................................... 316
Figure 275 User – Classmark ................................................................................................................ 317
Figure 276 User – Call Control Menu .................................................................................................... 318
Figure 277 User – Charge Number ....................................................................................................... 318
Figure 278 User – Outgoing Message Waiting Indicator ..................................................................... 319
Figure 279 User – Third-Party Voice Mail Support ............................................................................... 321
Figure 280 User – Preferred Carrier User ............................................................................................. 322
Figure 281 User – Call Processing Policies .......................................................................................... 323
Figure 282 Customer Administrator – Home ........................................................................................ 328
Figure 283 Customer Administrator – Groups ...................................................................................... 329
Figure 284 Customer Administrator – Group Add ................................................................................ 330
Figure 285 Customer Administrator Group Setup: Step 1 of 6 – Add Group..................................... 332
Figure 286 Customer Administrator Group Setup: Step 2 of 6 – Assign Domains............................ 334
Figure 287 Customer Administrator Group Setup: Step 3 of 6 – Add Group Administrator.............. 335
Figure 288 Customer Administrator Group Setup: Step 4 of 6 – Authorize Services........................ 336
Figure 289 Group Setup: Step 5 of 6 – Add Phone Numbers ............................................................ 337
Figure 290 Customer Administrator Group Setup: Step 6 of 6 – Add Identity/Device Profiles ......... 338
Figure 291 Customer Administrator Group Setup: Step 6 of 6 – Add Identity/Device Profiles (IMS
Deployments)..................................................................................................................................... 338
Figure 292 Customer Administrator – Users......................................................................................... 340
Figure 293 Customer Administrator – Change Password ................................................................... 340
Figure 294 Password Administrator – Profile Menu ............................................................................. 342
Figure 295 Passowrd Administrator – Change Password ................................................................... 342
Figure 296 Password Administrator – Modify User Password ............................................................ 343

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 18 OF 350
 INTRODUCTION

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 19 OF 350
 1 Summary of Changes

This section describes the changes to this document for each release and document
version.

1.1 Changes for Release 21.0, Document Version 3

This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Updated section [Link] Configure Capacity Management and Assign Trunk Groups
for PR-47443.

1.2 Changes for Release 21.0, Document Version 2

This version of the document includes editorial changes.

1.3 Changes for Release 21.0, Document Version 1

This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Added sections 5.17 System Defined Communication Barring Incoming Criteria and
6.12 Number Portability Query and updated sections 8.3.3 Add Profile and 10.6
Feature Access Codes for the Support for Number Portability Feature Description
(EV 193116).
 Updated section 10.13 Service Pack Migration for the Service Pack Migration
Enhancements Feature Description (EV 192964).
 Added allowed values for most settings and revised indexing.
 Updated section [Link] Files Tab (Managed Devices) for the DM General Usability
Enhancements Feature Description (EV 210524).
 Added section 6.9 Advice Of Charge for the AoC Tariff Information from OCS Support
(EV 194162).
 Updated section 10.6 Feature Access Codes for the Disabling of Feature Access
Codes Feature Description (EV 173606) and BroadWorks Mobility Persona
Management Feature Description (EVs 203930, 213818, 10450, and 210489).
 Added sections 6.11 MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint and 11.4.7 Configure MWI
Delivery to Mobile Endpoint for the Customized Message Waiting Indication for Mobile
Handset Feature Description (EV 179793).
 Added sections 5.10 Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges and 5.19 Activate Enterprise
Trunk Number Ranges and updated section [Link] View Assigned Users for the
Enterprise Trunk Enhancements Feature Description (EVs 198534, 220706, and
221238).
 Updated section 10 Utilities Menu and added section 10.2 BroadWorks Anywhere
Number Lookup for the Query Find-Me Follow-Me Numbers Feature Description
(EV 194287).
 Updated section [Link] Users Tab (All Devices) for the Support for SIP Instance Tag
to Identify Device Feature Description (EV 227867).
 Changed references to the BroadWorks Application Server User Web Interface
Administration Guide to BroadWorks User Web Interface Administration Guide as the
document has been renamed.
 Updated section 4.4.1 List Service Instances for the Video Collaboration Feature
Description (EV 214095).

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 20 OF 350
  Updated sections [Link] Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing, [Link]
Add Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing, [Link] Configure Capacity
Management and Assign Trunk Groups, and 6.10.4 Modify Enterprise Trunk for the
Enterprise Trunk and Trunk Group Capacity Management Enhancements Feature
Description (EV 231974).

1.4 Changes for Release 20.0, Document Version 1

This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Updated section [Link] Modify Enterprise Administrator Policies and 10 Utilities Menu
for the AS VTR Enhancement for Web Triggers Feature Description (EV 176191).
 Updated sections 8.3.3 Add Profile, 8.3.4 Modify or Delete Profile, 8.2.3 Add Digit
Pattern Criteria Entry, and 11.5 Communication Barring Menu for the Hierarchical
Communication Barring Enhancements Feature Description (EV 156691).
 Updated section 10.6 Feature Access Codes for the Executive and Assistant Services
Feature Description (EV 160554) and Call Recording – Start/Stop/Pause/Resume
User Control Feature Description (EVs 170972).
 Updated section 6.13 Session Admission Control Group for the Access Link Counting
Enhancements Feature Description (EV 166936).
 Updated sections 4.10 Call Processing Policies, 11.2.4 Configure Call Processing
Policies, and 12.9 Configure Call Processing Policies for the Internal Call CLID Policy
Feature Description (EV 178401).
 Updated section 11.2.3 Modify Group Web Policies for the Name Dialing Policy for
Auto Attendant Feature Description (EV 178323).
 Added section 10.11 Device Management Event Queues for the Device Management
Rebuild/Reset Queue Enhancements Feature Description (EV 173602).
 Added sections 5.20 IMRNs, 5.21 Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers, and 6.15
BroadWorks Mobility for the Mobility Service Enhancement Feature Description
(EV 181182).
 Updated section 10.6 Feature Access Codes for the Flexible Seating Feature
Description (EV 114601) and Hunt Group Call Busy Feature Description (EV 173577).
 Updated section 5.5.3 Modify Identity/Device Profile for the Device Management
Extended File Capture Mode Feature Description (178321).

1.5 Changes for Release 19.0, Document Version 2

This version of the document includes the following change:
 Corrected section numbering.

1.6 Changes for Release 19.0, Document Version 1

This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Updated section [Link] Users Tab (All Devices).
 Modified section 10.6 Feature Access Codes for the Find-me/Follow-me Service
Feature Description (EV 125258) and the Hunt Group Call Busy Feature Description
(EV 146324).
 Added section 6.14 Session Admission Control White List for the Session Admission
Control Enhancement for Residential Feature Description (EVs 117817 and 117818).

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 21 OF 350
  Updated sections 7.2 Agent Default Settings (All Services) and 7.4.1 Configure Agent
Unavailable Codes Settings for the Call Center Agent Not Reachable Stranded Policy
Feature Description (EV 149564).
 Updated section 5.5.3 Modify Identity/Device Profile for the Device Management
LinePort Ordering Enhancement Feature Description (EV 152312) and User Agent
Header Enhancements Feature Description (EVs 151841, 149943).
 Updated section 10.8 Passcode Rules for the Voice Portal Passcode Security Rule
Enhancements Feature Description (EV 46840).
 Updated section 7 Call Center Menu for the Call Center Thresholds and Alerts
Feature Description (EVs 150062 and 149950).
 Updated section 10 Utilities Menu for the SIP Authentication and Device Profile
Password Rules Feature Description (EV 155574).
 Updated sections 11.2.4 Configure Call Processing Policies and 12.9 Configure Call
Processing Policies for the Unicode Character Support for Calling Line ID Feature
Description (EV 118760).
 Updated sections 4.9 Schedules and 7.10.2 Schedule Report for the Schedule User
Interface Improvements Feature Description (EV 158330).
 Updated sections 5.18 Trunking Call Capacity and 11.3.8 Configure Trunking Call
Capacity for the Business Trunking License Utilization Reports Feature
Description (EV 160255).
 Updated section 7.7 External Reporting Settings (Call Center – Standard and Call
Center – Premium) for the Remove CCRS Support Feature Description
(EV 154550).
 Corrected the capitalization of “voice portal”.
 Updated section [Link] Users Tab (All Devices) for EV 179998.

1.7 Changes for Release 18.0, Document Version 1

This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Added sections 5.3 Group Paging Targets Capacity and 11.3.3 Assign Group Paging
Targets Capacity for the Group Paging Feature Description (EV 92408).
 Updated section 10.6.1 Configure Feature Access Codes for the Interrogation FACs
for CW/SCR/ACR/CLIR/COLR Feature Description (EV 97685) and the Call
Recording Interface Feature Description (EV 46941).
 Updated section [Link] Modify Enterprise Administrator Policies for the Telephone
Number Activation Feature Description (EV 107932).
 Added sections 7 Call Center Menu and 11.6 Call Center Menu and updated section
11.4.5 Configure Route Point Settings for the Call Center Reporting Feature
Description (EV 98107).
 Added sections 5.16 System Defined Communication Barring Criteria, 8
Communication Barring and 11.5 Communication Barring Menu and updated section
[Link] Modify Enterprise Administrator Policies for the Hierarchical Communication
Barring Feature Description (EV 107136).
 Added section 4.14 Dialable Caller ID and updated sections [Link] Modify Enterprise
Administrator Policies and 4.10 Call Processing Policies for the Dialable Caller ID
Feature Description (EV 100929).

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 22 OF 350
  Added section 4.9 Schedules for the Service Provider Schedules Feature Description
(EV 108949).
 Added sections 9 Meet-Me Conferencing Menu and 11.3.4 Allocate Meet-Me
Conference Ports for the Meet-Me Conferencing Feature Description (EV 110764)
and Meet-Me Conference Delegates (EV 142877).
 Updated section 8 Communication Barring Menu for the Call Me Now Feature
Description (EV 97691).
 Updated section 4 Profile Menu for the Make Service Instances Searchable at Higher
Levels Feature Description (EV 113348).
 Added section 5.4 Identity/Device Endpoints for the Search Endpoints at Higher
Levels Feature Description (EV 113345).
 Updated sections 4.3 Users, [Link] View Assigned Users, and 10.5 Enterprise
Directory for the Search by Extension and User ID Feature Description (57599).
 Updated sections 4.10 Call Processing Policies, 11.2.4 Configure Call Processing
Policies, and 12.9 Configure Call Processing Policies for the Calling Line Identity
Compliance Enhancements Feature Description (EV 116923), Dialable Caller ID
Feature Description (100929) and the Department Calling Line ID Override Feature
Description (EV 126077).
 Updated section 6.4 Enhanced Call Logs for the Enhanced Call Log Server Feature
Description (EV 113689).
 Updated sections 5.9 Numbers and 11.3.6 Assign Numbers for the Number Search
Enhancements Feature Description (EV 98942).
 Updated section 11.2.3 Modify Group Web Policies for the Basic Call Logs in Portal
Feature Description (EV 143532).
 Updated section 11.4.6 Configure Emergency Zones for the IPv6 Support –
Application Server Feature Description (EV 140952).
 Removed references to Instant Conferencing as the service has been replaced by
Meet-Me Conferencing and replaced by Meet-Me Conferencing where applicable.
 Updated section 8.2.3 Add Digit Pattern Criteria Entry for EV 155609.
 Updated section 8.3 Profiles for EV 155929.
 Updated section 4.9.3 Add Event for EV 156507.
 Updated section 10.6.1 Configure Feature Access Codes for EV 156538.

1.8 Changes for Release 17.0, Document Version 2

This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Updated section 6.5 In-Call Service Activation for EV 111567.

1.9 Changes for Release 17.0, Document Version 1

This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Updated section 10.6 Feature Access Codes for the Call Center Enhancements II
(EV 95374), Voice Mail Retrieval FAC (EV 92406), Communication Barring User-
Control (EV 51781), Legacy Automatic Callback Service (EV 98945), Call Center
Barge-in Enhancements (EV 98104), and Directed MSN Support (EV 95007) Feature
Descriptions.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 23 OF 350
  Updated section 11.7.2 Intercept Group for the Intercept Enhancements Feature
Description (EV 91795).
 Added sections 5.15 Session Admission Control Capacity, 6.13 Session Admission
Control Group, and 11.3.9 Configure Session Admission Control Capacity; and
modified section [Link] Modify Enterprise Administrator Policies for the Session
Admission Control Feature Description (EV 91487).
 Added section 12.4 Configure Classmark for the Classmark Information in SIP
Messaging Feature Description (EV 91038).
 Removed the Digit Collection section as the function was removed and replaced by
the Dial Plan policy. (For information, see section 1.12 Changes for Releases 14.sp1
through 14.sp6, Document Version 4.)
 Updated section [Link] Files Tab (Managed Devices) for the Device Management
Usability Enhancements Feature Description (EV 92412).
 Updated sections 4.10 Call Processing Policies, 11.2.4 Configure Call Processing
Policies and 12.9 Configure Call Processing Policies for the Calling Name and
Number Delivery Split Feature Description (EV 95515).
 Updated section [Link] Modify Enterprise Administrator Policies, 11.2.3 Modify
Group Web Policies, and 12.9 Configure Call Processing Policies for the Calling Line
ID Security Feature Description (EV 95368).
 Added section 4.12 Virtual On-Net Enterprise Extensions for the Enterprise Virtual
On-Net Destinations Feature Description (EV 95519) for EV 110252.
 Updated section 6.5 In-Call Service Activation for the In-Call Service Activation
Enhancements for Call Transfer Feature Description (EV 95517).
 Added section 7.4.1 Configure Agent Unavailable Codes Settings for the Call Center
Unavailability Codes Feature Description (EV 98105).
 Updated section [Link] Modify Enterprise Administrator Policies and added sections
5.11 Office Zones, and 11.3.10 Assign Office Zones for the Location-based Calling
Restrictions Feature Description (EV 101360).
 Added section 6.6 Pre-alerting Announcement for the Pre-alerting Announcement
Feature Description (EV 99279).
 Updated sections 4.11 Dial Plan Policy, 5.7 Route Point External Systems, and
11.3.11 Assign Route Point External Systems for the E.164 Number Format Support
for Callback Services Feature Description (EV 96509).
 Added section 7.5 Call Disposition Codes (Call Center – Premium and Route Point)
for the Call Center Disposition Codes Feature Description (EV 98106).
 Added section Configure Rout Points for the Network CTI Integration Feature
Description (EV 87520).
 Updated section 12.7 Configure Third-Party Voice Mail for EV 109249.
 Updated sections 5 Resources Menu, 11.2.3 Modify Group Web Policies, and 11.3.10
Assign Office Zones for EV 110465.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 24 OF 350
 1.10 Changes for Release 16.0, Document Version 1
This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Updated the following sections for EV 91292:
− 4.2.3 Add Group with Wizard
− 11.3.7 Authorize Services and Service Packs
− 13.2.3 Add Group with Wizard
 Added section 6.10 Enterprise Trunk and modified section 11.3.7 Authorize Services
and Service Packs for the Enterprise Trunking Feature Description.
 Modified sections [Link] Files Tab (Managed Devices) and [Link].1 Modify File for
Identity/Device Profile for the Device Management File Type Enhancement Feature
Description.
 Modified sections 4.10 Call Processing Policies, 11.2.4 Configure Call Processing
Policies, and 12.9 Configure Call Processing Policies for the Calling Line Identity
Enhancements Feature Description.
 Added section 11.4.5 Configure Route Point for the Call Center Enhancements
Feature Description.
 Added several feature access codes in section 10.6 Feature Access Codes for the
Advice of Charge, Interrogation FAC, Selective Call Forwarding Enhancements, SIP
Bridged Lines, and Call Return to Playback Number Feature Descriptions.
 Added section 5.8 Network Classes of Service and 11.3.5 Assign Network Classes of
Service for the Communication Barring Fixed Feature Description.
 Updated document for EVs 98585 and 98905.

1.11 Changes for Release 15.0, Document Version 2

This version of the document includes the following changes:
 Added section 12.2 Assign Home Zone for EV 69597.
 Added section 12.3 Configure External Custom Ringback for EV 66663.
 Updated section 11.2.4 Configure Call Processing Policies for EV 66663.
 Updated section 12.9 Configure Call Processing Policies for EV 66663.

1.12 Changes for Release 15.0, Document Version 1

This version of the document includes the following changes:
 For the Device Management System Feature Description, updated the Identity/Device
Profile procedures for EV 67117.
 For the Automatic Callback Menu Access and Automatic Callback Deactivation
feature access codes, updated the definitions.
 For EV 67907, updated section 10.8 Passcode Rules.
 For the Automatic Callback Enhancements Feature Description, added a new feature
access code to section 10.6 Feature Access Codes.
 For the Enterprise Translation Enhancements Feature Description, added new
options to section 4.10 Call Processing Policies.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 25 OF 350
  For the Zone Calling Restrictions Feature Description, added new procedures to
section 6.16 Zone Calling Restrictions and section 11.4.3 Configure Home Zone for
Group Voice Portal.

1.13 Changes for Releases 14.sp1 through 14.sp6, Document Version 4

Release 14.sp6
This version of the document includes the following changes:
 For the Dial Plan Policy Feature Description, the Digit Collection function was
removed and replaced by the Dial Plan Policy in section 4.11 Dial Plan Policy.
 Removed information related to the Client Management System (CMS).
Release 14.sp5
There were no changes to this document for Release 14.sp5.
Release 14.sp4
This version of the document includes the following changes:
 For the Answer Confirmation on Forking Services Enhancements Feature
Description, added new Answer Confirmation feature to section 10.10 Answer
Confirmation.
 For the Delete Call Logs Feature Description, added a new option to the group web
policies to delete user’s call logs to section 11.2.3 Modify Group Web Policies.
 For the Enterprise Translation Enhancements Feature Description, added new call
processing policies to section 4.10 Call Processing Policies.
 For the Group Call Park Feature Description, added new feature access code to
section 10.6 Feature Access Codes.
 For the Group List Filtering Enhancements Feature Description, updated sections
5.6.2 View Groups Assigned to Domain, 10.13.2 Add Service Pack Migration Task,
and 10.13.3 Modify Service Pack Migration Task.
Release 14.sp3
This version of the document includes the following changes:
 For the External Custom Ringback Feature Description, added the External Custom
Ringback service to section 6.3 External Custom Ringback.
 For the In-Call Service Activation for TDM Overlay Feature Description, added new In-
Call Service Activation service to section 6.5 In-Call Service Activation.
 For the Network Server Phone Context Support Enhancements Feature Description,
added a new option (Route using) to section.
 For the Telephone Number Inventory Feature Description, updated section 11.3.6
Assign Numbers.
Release 14.sp2
This version of the document includes the following changes:
 For the Auto SIP Provisioning Feature Description, added the BroadWorks
Communicator service to section 6.2 BroadWorks Communicator.
 For the Shared Call Appearance Enhancement Feature Description, added new
feature access codes to section 10.6 Feature Access Codes.
Release 14.sp1
This version of the document includes the following changes:

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 26 OF 350
  For the Business Trunking Enhancements Feature Description, added a new option to
sections 5.18 Trunking Call Capacity and 11.3.7 Authorize Services and Service
Packs.
 For the Forwarding and Simultaneous Ringing Call Processing Restrictions Feature
Description, added new call processing policies to section 4.10 Call Processing
Policies.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 27 OF 350
 2 About This Guide

The BroadWorks Application Server Enterprise Web Interface Administration Guide is

designed to assist enterprise administrators with the management of all BroadWorks
enterprise administration functions. Detailed instructions for each function and page of the
BroadWorks system can be found both in the guide and in the online help, which is
available using the Help link on each web page.
This guide assumes administrators are familiar with the procedures in the BroadWorks
Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 28 OF 350
 ENTERPRISE ADMINISTRATION

The sections in this chapter provide procedural and reference information related to using
the system as an enterprise administrator. This chapter includes the following sections:
 Enterprise Roles and Responsibilities
 Profile Menu
 Resources Menu
 Services Menu
 Call Center Menu
 Communication Barring Menu
 Meet-Me Conferencing Menu
 Utilities Menu
 Configure Group Administration, Services, and Resources
 Configure User Services and Settings

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 29 OF 350
 3 Enterprise Roles and Responsibilities

This section describes tasks that are the exclusive responsibility of enterprise
administrators and provides some navigational procedures for use on pages that contain
lists or text boxes. This section contains the following sections:
 Task Distribution in BroadWorks
 Types of Tasks
 Group Administrator
 Department Administrator
 Users
 Enterprise Home Page

3.1 Task Distribution in BroadWorks

In BroadWorks, tasks traditionally associated with system providers are now distributed
among system providers, provisioning administrators, enterprises, group administrators,
and users. Distributing the workload allows more control and interaction on the part of the
customer. It also reduces the need for and turnaround time for moves, adds, and changes
for customers, further reducing the need for and work of the service department.
The exclusive responsibilities of an enterprise, which are performed using the web portal,
consist of the following:
 Add and provision groups (and the initial group administrator for the group)
 Add departments
 Configure carriers
 Configure, add, and assign Voice VPN policies for inter-site calls for groups and users
 Add and delete devices, and service packs
 For existing groups, assign and authorize resources for which only an enterprise
administrator has the authority, for example:
− Assign service packs
− Assign Meet-Me conference ports
− Assign phone numbers
− Authorize services
− Assign domains
− Add call capacity groups
− Create emergency zones
− Intercept groups
− Create and run service pack migration tasks
 For existing users with the Zone Calling Restrictions service enabled, configure the
home zone.
 Perform tasks for your enterprise ID account:
− Create enterprise administrators and establish their administration policies

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 30 OF 350
 − Edit some information for the enterprise ID account
− Add devices
− Add service packs
− Display service pack usage
− Set password rules for your group administrators and users
− Add additional enterprise administrators
− Reset the password of an enterprise administrator
− Change the web branding for the web portal interface
− View an audit log
− Assist or train group administrators to perform service configuration

NOTE: After you have created groups and authorized specific resources, a group administrator
can do all other tasks that affect a group, for example, add more group administrators, add
users, and assign services to users.

3.2 Types of Tasks

As an enterprise administrator, you perform these types of tasks:
 Tasks that affect all groups for an Enterprise ID account, for example, adding groups,
and listing group resources authorized to your enterprise ID account by the system
administrator. For more information, see 3.2.1 Manage All Groups.
 Tasks that affect only one group, for example, editing resources for a selected group.
For more information, see 3.2.2 Manage Selected Groups.
 User-related tasks that only enterprise administrators can perform, for example
assigning a home zone to a user. For more information, see 3.2.3 User-related
Tasks.

NOTE: In this document, for clarity, the type of task is always identified. In the following
sections, the tasks you perform for all groups in your Enterprise ID account are provided first,
followed by the tasks you perform for a selected group.

3.2.1 Manage All Groups

Enterprise administrators can perform tasks that affect all groups system-wide. Refer to
the following sections for tasks you perform that affect all the groups (existing and new) for
your Enterprise ID account. The following sections that are listed are organized according
to menus and their menu options, from the top of the list of menus.
 Profile Menu
 Resources Menu
 Services Menu
 Call Center Menu
 Communication Barring Menu
 Meet-Me Conferencing Menu

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 31 OF 350
  Utilities Menu
Access the menus for these tasks from the Options list on your Home page. To display
your Home page, click Home.

3.2.2 Manage Selected Groups

Enterprise administrators can perform tasks on a per group basis (tasks that affect only
the selected group). For procedures related to specific groups, see section 11 Configure
Group Administration, Services, and Resources.

3.2.3 User-related Tasks

Enterprise administrators perform some user configuration tasks (tasks that affect only the
selected user and can only be done by an enterprise administrator). For procedures
related to these tasks, see section 12 Configure User Services and Settings.

3.3 Group Administrator

Recommended responsibilities of a group administrator, which are performed using the
web interface of the Application Server, are the following:
 Add departments and provision with an administrator and phone numbers.
 Add additional administrators for the group.
 Add users and assign phone numbers, resources, and services.
 Configure group services.
 Assist or train end users to configure personal services.
For information and procedures related to the group administrator, see the BroadWorks
Application Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide (Parts 1 and 2).

3.4 Department Administrator

The department administrator has a subset of capabilities of a group administrator.
Specifically, the department administrator has the following responsibilities:
 Add, modify, and delete users in their department.
 Modify Auto Attendants, Call Centers, and Hunt Groups belonging to the department.
 View the group directory and modify the group common phone list.
For information and procedures related to the group administrator, see the BroadWorks
Application Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide (Parts 1 and 2).

3.5 Users
In addition to using CommPilot Call Manager, users can customize and configure their
own services once these services have been assigned to them. For information and
procedures related to end user self-administration, see the BroadWorks User Web
Interface Administration Guide.
This reduces the cost and need for customer service, and self-managed customers also
benefit from reduced lag time for service orders. The design of the system allows for the
possibility of requesting and receiving new services, additional numbers, and expanded
access online.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 32 OF 350
 3.6 Enterprise Home Page
This is the Home page of an enterprise administrator. This page shows the menu items
that are used to create and modify groups, profile information, and administrators for your
enterprise ID. To display this page, click the Home link on the page (top right).

Figure 1 Enterprise – Profile Menu

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 33 OF 350
 4 Profile Menu

The Enterprise – Profile menu page includes menu items that relate to all profiles that the
Enterprise can access. This section includes documentation related to Enterprise – Profile
menu items that can be performed by the enterprise only.
Links to the following menu pages from the Profile menu are included in this section:
 Groups
 Users
 Service Instances
 Profile
 Change Password
 Administrators
 Departments
 Schedules
Links to the following menu pages from the Profile advanced menu are included in this
section:
 Call Processing Policies
 Dial Plan Policy
 Voice VPN
 Virtual On-Net Enterprise Extensions
 Dialable Caller ID

NOTE: The pages under the Profile heading allow you to view information related to enterprise-
wide profiles. To add or modify information for a specific group, see section 11 Configure Group
Administration, Services, and Resources.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 34 OF 350
 4.1 Access Profile Menu
When you log in as an enterprise administrator, the Enterprise – Profile menu page
appears. This is your Home page. To access this page from any other page in
BroadWorks, click Home.

Figure 2 Enterprise – Profile Menu

4.2 Groups
Use the Groups menu item on the Enterprise – Profile menu page to:
 List Groups
 Add Group
 Add Group with Wizard

NOTE: It is the responsibility of the enterprise administrator to add the first group with the Group
Wizard. The group administrator can add additional groups. For reference and procedural
information to add, modify, and delete groups after the first group is created, see the
BroadWorks Application Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide (Parts 1 and 2).

4.2.1 List Groups

You use the Enterprise – Groups page to list the groups on the system as shown in the
following figure. On this page you can search for a particular group. From this page, you
can add a group, add a group with a group wizard, or select a group to be modified or
deleted.
The Enterprise – Groups page is a list page that allows you to search several different
ways. You can click the headings of a column to change the sort order of items in the
column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search criteria, or click the page
links (for example, Next or Previous). For more information on defining search criteria,
see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 35 OF 350
 Figure 3 Enterprise – Groups

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Groups. The Enterprise – Groups page
appears.
2) To display all groups in your enterprise, click Search.
To display specific groups, enter your search criteria and then click Search.
3) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

4.2.2 Add Group

Use the Enterprise – Group Add page to add a group to the enterprise. To add a group,
use the Enterprise – Group Add page as follows.

Figure 4 Enterprise – Group Add

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Groups. The Enterprise – Groups page
appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise – Group Add page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 36 OF 350
 3) Type information specific to the new group. To move between input boxes, use the
TAB key on the keyboard, or click in the next text box.
Following is a table of the input boxes and a description for each. Required input
boxes are indicated with an asterisk (*).
Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Group ID 1 through 30 characters. The unique identification ABCcompany

Must start with an code for this group, to be
underscore, dash, letter, or used when adding group
digit, and cannot contain members, and configuring
any of the following group services. Do not use
characters: %, /, \, +, spaces.
double colon (::),
semicolon, single quotes,
double quotes, or extended
Unicode characters.

Default The drop-down box lists The domain to be used by [Link]

Domain * the available domains. this group. The default
domain is at the beginning of
the list.

Group Name 1 through 80 characters. The true company name. ABC Company, Inc.
Do not use backslashes or
double quotation marks.

Calling Line ID 1 through 80 characters. The name displayed as the ABC Company, Inc.
Group Name Cannot contain %, +, calling line ID.
backslash, double quotes,
or extended ASCII
characters.

Location 1 through 30 characters. The unique location code for 12

Dialing Code the group (used for inter-site
dialing).

Contact Name 1 through 30 characters. The primary contact for the Joe Smith
company, first, and last
name.

Contact 1 through 30 characters. The complete phone number 3015551000

Phone of the above-named contact
for the group including, for
example, a “1” for a long-
distance number. Do not
use spaces or dashes.

Contact E-mail 3 through 80 characters in The e-mail address of the jo@[Link]

user@domain format. contact for the group. m
Can contain only one @
symbol and the following
characters: letters, digits, !,
#, $, %, &, *, +, -, /, =, _, {,
}, |, ~, `, ., ?, ^, or single
quotes.

Time Zone * The drop-down box lists The group’s time zone. (GMT-05:00) (US)
the time zones from which Eastern Standard
to select. Time

User limits

Limited to * 1 through 999999. The limited number of 20

users in this group.

Additional Information

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 37 OF 350
 Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Address 2 lines, maximum 80 The street address of the 123 Main Street
characters each. group or company.

City 1 through 50 characters. The city name of the group Gaithersburg

or company.

State/Province The drop-down box lists The state or province MD

the values from which to selected from the drop-down
select. list.

Zip/Postal 1 through 50 characters. The zip or postal code of the 20877

Code group or company.

Country 1 through 50 characters. The country of the group or United States

company.

4) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK. To exit without
saving, select another page or click Cancel.

4.2.3 Add Group with Wizard

Use the Group Setup: Step 1 of 6 – Add a Group page to add a group to the system.
To add a group, display the Group Setup: Step 1 of 6 – Add a Group page. The Group
Setup Wizard includes six pages to fully configure a group, a group administrator, and
group resources.

Figure 5 Group Setup: Step 1 of 6 – Add Group

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Groups. The Enterprises – Groups
page appears.
2) Click Add Group Wizard. The Group Setup: Step 1 of 6 – Add a Group page
appears. This is the first page of the Group Setup Wizard.
3) Type information specific to the new group. To move between input boxes, use the
TAB key on the keyboard, or click in the next text box.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 38 OF 350
 Following is a table of the input boxes and a description for each. Required input
boxes are indicated with an asterisk (*).
Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Group ID * 1 through 30 characters. The unique identification ABCcompany

Must start with an code for this group, to be
underscore, dash, letter, used when adding group
or digit, and cannot members, and configuring
contain any of the group services. Do not
following characters: %, /, use spaces.
\, +, double colon (::)
semicolon, single quotes,
double quotes, or
extended Unicode
characters.

Default The drop-down box lists The domain to be used by [Link]

Domain * the available domains. this group. The default
domain is at the beginning
of the list.

Group Name 1 through 80 characters. The true company name. ABC Company,
Do not use backslashes Inc.
or double quotation
marks.

Calling Line ID 1 through 80 characters. The name displayed as ABC Company,

Group Name Cannot contain %, +, the group calling line ID. Inc.
backslash, double quotes,
or extended ASCII
characters.

Location 1 through 30 characters. The unique location code 12

Dialing Code for the group (used for
inter-site dialing).

Contact Name 1 through 30 characters. The primary contact for Joe Smith
the company, first and last
name.

Contact Phone 1 through 30 characters. The complete phone 3015551000

number of the contact for
the group including, for
example, a “1” for a long-
distance number. Do not
use spaces or dashes.

Contact E-mail 3 through 80 characters in The e-mail address of the joes@abcompany.

user@domain format. contact for the group. com
Can contain only one @
symbol and the following
characters: letters, digits,
!, #, $, %, &, *, +, -, /, =, _,
{, }, |, ~, `, ., ?, ^, or single
quotes.

Time Zone * The drop-down box lists The group’s time zone. (GMT-05:00) (US)
the time zones from which Eastern Standard
to select. Time

User Limits

Limited to 1 through 999999. The limited number of 20

users in this group.

Additional Information

Address 2 lines, maximum 80 The street address of the 123 Main Street
characters each. group or company.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 39 OF 350
 Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

City 1 through 50 characters. The city name of the Gaithersburg

group or company.

State/Province The drop-down box lists The state or province MD

the values from which to selected from the drop-
select. down list.

Zip/Postal 1 through 50 characters. The zip or postal code of 20877

Code the group or company.

Country 1 through 50 characters. The country of the group United States

or company.

4) To save this information and display the next setup page, click Next. The Group
Setup: Step 2 of 6 – Assign Domains page appears. To save the information and
return to the Enterprise – Group page, click Finish. To cancel the Group Setup
Wizard and return to the Enterprise – Group page, click Cancel.

Figure 6 Group Setup: Step 2 of 6 – Assign Domains

5) In the Group Available Domains column, select the domains to be assigned to the
group. You can select some or all of the items from a column. Item names are listed
in numerical order. To select several items in sequential order, click the first number,
hold down the SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last number. To select
several items, but not in a particular order, click the items while holding down the
CTRL key on your keyboard.
To move only selected domains from one box to the other, click Add.
To move all the domains from one box to the other, click Add All.
Assigned domains appear in the Group Assigned Domains box.
6) To save this information and display the next setup page, click Next. The Group
Setup: Step 3 of 6 – Add a Group Administrator page appears. To save the
information and return to the Enterprise – Group page, click Finish. To cancel the
Group Setup Wizard and return to the Enterprise – Group page, click Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 40 OF 350
 Figure 7 Group Setup: Step 3 of 6 – Add Group Administrator

7) Type information specific to the new group. To move between text boxes, use the
TAB key on the keyboard, or click in the next text box.
Following is a table that describes the text boxes. Required information for text boxes
are indicated with an asterisk (*).
Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Administrator 6 through 80 characters. The unique login ID for the grpadmin1

ID * Can contain letters, digits, group administrator. Type this
and the following ID without using spaces.
characters: !, #, $, %, &, +,
-, /, =, ?, ^, _, `, {, |, },
periods (.), ~, and single
quotes (').

Domain The drop-down box lists The name of the domain. abcdistributing.
the available domains. com

First Name 1 through 30 characters. The first name of the group Joe
administrator.

Last Name 1 through 30 characters. The last name of the group Smith
administrator.

Initial Must follow the password The initial password for the *******
Password * rules for the group. group administrator. Asterisks
appear on the page instead of
the characters typed.

Re-type Initial Same as for Initial The password for the group *******
Password * Password. administrator is typed a second
time for confirmation. Asterisks
appear on the page instead of
the characters typed.

Language * The drop-down box lists all The language the web interface English
languages configured for displays for this administrator
your system. and the language in which the
system plays announcements
and treatments for calls for this
administrator.

8) Click Add. The new administrator appears in the list at the bottom of the Group
Setup: Step 3 of 6 – Add a Group Administrator page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 41 OF 350
 9) To save this information and display the next setup page, click Next. The Group
Setup: Step 4 of 6 – Authorize Services page appears. To save the information and
return to the Enterprise – Group page, click Finish. To cancel the Group Setup
Wizard and return to the Enterprise – Group page, click Cancel.

Figure 8 Group Setup: Step 4 of 6 – Authorize Services

Use this page to authorize the use of the service packs and services.
10) Click Select All or check individual services to permit the use of services by the
group. Clicking Select All selects all service packs and services.
Checked services are available for authorization to the group.
11) Check the Limited To: box to the right of the service name (where available), and type
a number of services available for assignment for this group. You can enter a number
from 1 through 999999.
Based on the number of licenses purchased, this field can be used to track and limit
the number of services assigned.
12) To save this information and display the next setup page, click Next >. The Group
Setup: Step 5 of 6 – Add Phone Numbers page appears. To save the information and
return to the Enterprise – Group page, click Finish. To cancel the Group Setup
Wizard and return to the Enterprise – Group page, click Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 42 OF 350
 Figure 9 Group Setup: Step 5 of 6 – Add Phone Numbers

13) Click the range to add in the Available Range(s) box and then click Add >. You can
select some or all of the items in a column. Items are listed in numerical order. To
select several items in sequential order, click the first number, hold down the
SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last number. To select several items,
but not in a particular order, click the items while holding down the CTRL key on
the keyboard. The number or range appears in the Available Phone Number(s) box.
14) Click the phone number or several numbers to assign in the Available Phone
Number(s) box and click Add >. You can select some or all of the items in a column.
Items are listed in numerical order. To select several items in sequential order, click
the first number, hold down the SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last number.
To select several items, but not in a particular order, click the items while holding
down the CTRL key on the keyboard.
To move all the phone numbers from one box to the other, click Add All.
Assigned phone numbers appear in the Assigned box.
15) To save this information and display the next setup page, click Next. The Group
Setup: Step 6 of 6 – Add Identity/Device Profiles page appears. To save the
information and return to the Enterprise – Group page, click Finish. To cancel the
Group Setup Wizard and return to the Enterprise – Group page, click Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 43 OF 350
 Figure 10 Group Setup: Step 6 of 6 – Add Identity/Device Profiles

Figure 11 Group Setup: Step 6 of 6 – Add Identity/Device Profile (IMS Deployments)

16) Type information specific to the new group. To move between input boxes, use the
TAB key on the keyboard, or click in the next text box.
Following is a table that describes the input boxes. Required input boxes are
indicated with an asterisk (*).
Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Identity/Device 1 through 80 The identity/device profile name. CyberGroupIAD1

Profile Name * characters.

Identity/Device The drop-down box The device type. Cisco 2421-16

Profile Type lists available Device types in the list with the same Cisco 2421-24
identity/device profile name but different capabilities are
types. differentiated by following the name
with the number of available ports.

Protocol The drop-down box The communication protocol used by MGCPIETF 1.0
lists available values. the device.
Not available in IMS deployments.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 44 OF 350
 Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Host Name/ 1 through 80 The host name or IP address of the [Link].

IP Address characters. Cannot device. Optional for some devices, com
contain spaces or @ such as IP phones. [Link]
symbols. Not available in IMS deployments.

Transport The drop-down box Allows the acceptable transports to UDP, TCP,
lists the available be indicated: UDP, TCP, and all. All Unspecified
values. indicates that all transports are
acceptable; this currently indicates
both UDP and TCP The transport will
not appear for MGCP devices.
Not available in IMS deployments.

MAC Address 12 characters. Can The unique Media Access Control 21A1423f23d2
only contain letters and (MAC) address of your device's
digits. network hardware.
Not available in IMS deployments.

Serial Number 1 through 80 The serial number of the device. 123AB-C-456

characters. Not available in IMS deployments.

Description 1 through 80 A brief text description of the device, Bldg. 3 Device

characters. such as an internal reference,
manufacturer name, or other internal
feature.

Outbound 1 through 80 The host name or IP address of the [Link]

Proxy Server characters. Cannot proxy server to be used by this [Link]
contain spaces or @ device.
symbols. Not available in IMS deployments.

STUN Server 1 through 80 The host name or IP address of the [Link].c

characters. Cannot Simple Traversal of UDP through om
contain spaces or @ NAT (STUN) server to be used by [Link]
symbols. this device.
Not available in IMS deployments.

Physical 1 through 1024 The physical location is a text value 202 Main Street
Location characters. representing the physical location of Nowhere, FR
the user. Should contain the exact
information that needs to go into the
P-Access-Network-Info header of the
SIP message. The attribute can
have extra or less white space and it
is not case sensitive.

17) Click Add. The new device appears in the list at the bottom of the Group Setup: Step
6 of 6 – Add Devices page. Add all of the devices this group requires.
18) To save the information and return to the Enterprise – Group page, click Finish.
To cancel the Group Setup Wizard and return to the Enterprise – Group page, click
Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 45 OF 350
 4.3 Users
Use the Users menu item on the Enterprise-Profile menu page to display all users in the
groups and departments of your enterprise.
The Enterprise – Users page is a list page that contains an advanced search. The User
ID, Last Name, First Name, Phone Number, Extension, Department, and whether the user
is In Trunk Group appear for each user. Depending on the number of pages of data in a
list, list pages allow you to present the data several different ways. You can click the
headings of a column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes
below the data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or
Previous. The advance search lets you define specific search criteria to narrow your
search and display a manageable list. For more information on defining search criteria,
see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.
You can open the profile for any user listed on the Enterprise – Users page by clicking the
name of the user or the Edit link. For procedures related to user configuration and for
enabling user services, see the document BroadWorks Application Server Group Web
Interface Administration Guide (Parts 1 and 2).

4.3.1 List Users

Use the Users menu item on the Enterprise-Profile menu page to display all users in your
enterprise.

Figure 12 Enterprise – Users

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Users. The Enterprise – Users page
appears.
2) Use Search to find and display the users.

NOTE: If the list of users contains more than 1,000 entries, you need to narrow the search
criteria to produce fewer entries. For more information on defining search criteria, see the
BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

3) Click OK to display the previous page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 46 OF 350
 4.4 Service Instances
Use the Service Instances menu item on the Enterprise – Profile menu page to display
service instances in the groups and departments of your enterprise.
The Enterprise – Service Instances page is a list page that contains an advanced search.
Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list pages allow you to present the
data several different ways. You can click the headings of a column to change the sort
order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search criteria,
or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.

NOTE: If the list contains more than 1,000 entries, you need to narrow the search criteria to
produce fewer entries.

The advanced search lets you define specific search criteria to narrow your search and
display a manageable list. You can search by Service Type, Group ID, User ID, Name,
Phone Number, Extension, and Department. For more information on defining search
criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

4.4.1 List Service Instances

You use the Enterprise – Service Instances page to display service instances in your
enterprise. You can open the profile of any service instance listed on the Enterprise –
Service Instances page by clicking the name of the instance or the Edit link. For
procedures related to service instance configuration, see the BroadWorks Application
Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide Part 2.

Figure 13 Enterprise – Service Instances

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Service Instances. The Enterprise –
Service Instances page appears.
2) To display all service instances in your enterprise, click Search.
To display specific service instances, enter your search criteria and then click Search.
3) Click OK to display the previous page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 47 OF 350
 4.5 Profile
Use the Profile menu item on the Enterprise – Profile menu page to display and modify
your Enterprise profile.

4.5.1 Display or Modify Your Enterprise Profile

Use the Enterprise – Profile page to display and modify your enterprise profile.
The Enterprise – Profile page allows you to edit some of this information (in white text
boxes). Only the system provider administrator can edit information in the Additional
Information section.

Figure 14 Enterprise – Profile

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Profile. The Enterprise – Profile page
appears.
2) Modify information as required. Select or type in any of the input boxes.
The following table shows the settings that can be modified. Required information is
indicated with an asterisk (*).

Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Default Domain * The drop-down box lists all The default domain for your [Link]
domains configured for enterprise.
your enterprise.

Name 1 through 80 characters. The name of your enterprise. Net Go

Services, Inc.

Contact Name 1 through 30 characters. The name of the primary Jane Smith
contact person at your
enterprise.

Contact Phone 1 through 30 characters. The contact person’s phone 3105552323

number.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 48 OF 350
 Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Contact E-mail 3 through 80 characters in The e-mail address of the jsmith@netgo.

user@domain format. contact person. com
Can contain only one @
symbol and the following
characters: letters, digits, !,
#, $, %, &, *, +, -, /, =, _, {,
}, |, ~, `, ., ?, ^, or single
quotes.

Support E-mail 3 through 80 characters in The e-mail address used to supprt@netgo.

user@domain format. send support requests to the com
Can contain only one @ enterprise.
symbol and the following
characters: letters, digits, !,
#, $, %, &, *, +, -, /, =, _, {,
}, |, ~, `, ., ?, ^, or single
quotes.

3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

4.6 Change Password

Use the Change Password page to change your password. All the fields are required.

Figure 15 Enterprise – Change Password

1) On the Enterprise – Profile page, select Change Password.

2) In the *Current Password text box, enter the password you use now.
3) In the *Reset Password text box, enter the new password. Follow the password rules
for your enterprise. You can view the password rules for your enterprise on the
Utilities – Password Rules page.
4) In the *Re-type new password text box, confirm your new password by tying it again.
5) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 49 OF 350
 4.7 Administrators
Use the Administrators menu item on the Enterprise – Profile menu page to:
 List Enterprise Administrators
 Add Enterprise Administrator
 Modify Enterprise Administrator
 Delete Enterprise Administrator

4.7.1 List Enterprise Administrators

Use the Enterprise – Administrators page to list the enterprise administrators on the
system. On this page you can search for a particular enterprise administrator. From this
page, you can add an enterprise administrator or select an administrator to be modified or
deleted.
The Enterprise – Administrators page is a list page that allows you to search several
different ways. You can click the headings of a column to change the sort order of items in
the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search criteria, or click the page
links (for example, Next or Previous). For more information on defining search criteria,
see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

Figure 16 Enterprise – Administrators

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Administrators. The Enterprise –

Administrators page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 50 OF 350
 4.7.2 Add Enterprise Administrator
Use the Enterprise – Administrators Add page to add an enterprise administrator to the
system.
To add an enterprise administrator, display the Enterprise – Administrator Add page.

Figure 17 Enterprise – Administrator Add

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Administrators. The Enterprise –

Administrators page appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise – Administrator Add page appears.
Following is a table of the text boxes and the input necessary for each. To move
between text boxes, use the TAB key on the keyboard, or click in the next text box.
Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Administrator ID * 6 through 80 characters. The unique login ID for the servpadmin1

Can contain letters, digits, enterprise administrator, without
and the following using spaces. An e-mail
characters: !, #, $, %, &, address is a valid user ID.
+, -, /, =, ?, ^, _, `, {, |, },
periods (.), ~, and single
quotes (').

First Name 1 through 30 characters. The first name for the enterprise Joe
administrator.

Last Name 1 through 30 characters. The last name for the enterprise Smith
administrator.

Initial Password * Must follow the password The initial password for the *******
rules for the group. enterprise administrator. For
security, asterisks appear on the
page instead of the characters
typed.

Re-type Initial Same as for Initial The password for the enterprise *******
Password * Password. administrator to verify
authenticity. For security,
asterisks appear on the page
instead of the characters typed.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 51 OF 350
 Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Language * The drop-down box lists Displays all languages English

all languages configured configured for your system.
for your system. English is the default. Once you
change your language setting,
you must log out and log in for
the settings to take effect.

Administrator Service Provider, "Service Provider" creates a

Type Customer, Password normal enterprise-level
Reset Only. administrator, with access to the
web interface determined by the
policies you set on the
Administrator Policies page
(accessible from the
administrator's Profile page).
“Customer” creates a Customer
administrator. The customer
administrator only has access to
the Groups, Users, and Change
Password pages. The customer
administrator does not have
access to Call Capacity and has
read-only access to Intercept
Group.
"Password Reset Only" restricts
the administrator to modifying
user passwords. The
administrator will have no
access to any other pages, data,
or commands within the web
interface.

3) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK. To exit without
saving, select another page or click Cancel.

4.7.3 Modify Enterprise Administrator

Use the Enterprise – Administrators Modify page to modify profile information for an
enterprise administrator.

NOTE: Password-only limitations cannot be applied to or removed from existing administrator

accounts. If you need to restrict an administrator account to modifying user passwords, or to
allow a password-only administrator access to other system commands, you must delete the
administrator account and create a new account with the correct configuration.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 52 OF 350
 Figure 18 Enterprise – Administrators Modify

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Administrators. The Enterprise –

Administrators page appears.
2) Click Edit in the row for the administrator to edit or click the Administrator ID. The
Enterprise – Administrators Modify page appears.
3) Edit the profile information. If you want to modify the password, type the password in
both the * Reset Password and * Re-type new password boxes.
4) To change the language, select the language from the drop-down list.

NOTE: You need to log out and log back in to the system for the new language interface to
appear.

5) Click Set Administrator Policies (Also save current screen data.) Clicking this link
opens the Enterprise Administrator Policies page and saves your information.
6) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK. To exit without
saving, select another page or click Cancel.

[Link] Modify Enterprise Administrator Policies

Use the Enterprise – Enterprise Administrator Policies page to modify policy information
for an enterprise administrator. Policies include various access permissions to default
enterprise functionality.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 53 OF 350
 Figure 19 Enterprise – Enterprise Administrator Policies

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 54 OF 350
 1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Administrators. The Enterprise –
Administrator page appears.
2) Click Edit in the row for the administrator to edit or click the Administrator ID. The
Enterprise – Administrator Modify page appears.
3) Click Set Administrator Policies (Also save current data). The Enterprise –
Enterprise Administrator Policies page appears.
The following table lists the policies and provides a description of each. To move
between input boxes, use the TAB key on the keyboard, or click in the next input box.
Policy Description

Enterprise Profile Access

Full access to enterprise’s profile The Enterprise – Profile page appears. This is the default.

Read-only access to enterprise’s The Enterprise – Profile page is read-only.

profile

No access to enterprise’s profile The Enterprise Profile menu item does not appear on the
Enterprise – Profile menu page.

Enterprise Group Access

Full access to groups The Groups menu item on the Enterprise – Profile menu page
appears. This is the default.

Restricted from adding or The Add and Add Group Wizard buttons on the Enterprise –
removing groups Groups page do not appear. Additionally, the Delete button on
the Group – Profile page does not appear.

No access to groups The Groups menu option does not appear on the Enterprise –
Profile menu page.

Enterprise User Access

Full Access to users Provides the administrator with full rights to create, modify, and
delete users. This is the default.

Restricted from adding or Hides the Add buttons and restricts the administrator from
removing users; full access to adding or deleted users. The administrator may view the user
user profile profile but cannot modify it.

Restricted from adding or Hides the Add buttons and restricts the administrator from
removing users; read-only access adding or deleting users. The administrator may view the user
to user profile profile but cannot modify it.

Restricted from adding or Hides the Add buttons and restricts the administrator from
removing users; no Access to user adding or deleting users. The administrator has no access to
profile the user profile.

No Access to Users Hides the Users menu option on the administrator’s home
page, preventing the administrator from creating, modifying, or
deleting users.

Enterprise Administrator Access

Full access to enterprise The Enterprise menu item on the Enterprise – Profile menu
administrators page appears. This is the default.

Read-only access to enterprise The Enterprise – Administrator page is read-only.

administrators

No access to enterprise The Administrators menu item does not appear on the
administrators Enterprise – Profile menu page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 55 OF 350
 Policy Description

Department Access

Full access to departments list The Departments menu item on the Group – Profile menu
page appears. This is the default.

Read-only access to departments The Group – Departments page is a read-only list.

list

No access to departments list The Departments menu item does not appear on the Group –
Profile menu page.

Enterprise Network Policy Access

Full access to network policies Provides the administrator with full control over the Voice VPN
configuration for the enterprise.

No access to network policies Hides the Voice VPN menu item on the administrator's home
page.

Device Access

Full access to devices The Identity/Device Profiles menu item on the Group -
Resources menu page displays an editable list. The
administrator may create, modify, and delete devices, and may
create, modify, and delete associations between devices and
users. This is the default.

Read-only access to devices; The Group – Identity/Device Profiles page is a read-only list.
may associate users to existing The administrator may not create, modify, or delete devices, but
devices may create, modify, and delete associations between devices
and users.

Read-only access to devices and The Group – Identity/Device Profiles page is a read-only list.
user associations The administrator may not create, modify, or delete devices,
and may not create, modify, or delete any associations between
devices and users.

Phone Number/Extension Access

Full access to phone The Assign Numbers menu item on the Group – Resources
numbers/extensions menu page appears. This is the default.

Access to assign phone  The Assign Numbers menu item on the Group – Resources
numbers/extensions to services menu page does not appear.
and users only  The extension in each of the group services is modifiable. The
administrator is able to configure an extension for group
services.

Read-only access to phone  The Assign Numbers menu item on the Group – Resources
numbers/extensions menu page does not appear.
 The extension in each of the group services is read-only. The
administrator can add these services, but is not able to
configure an extension.
 The extension on the Group – Add User and User – Profile
page are read-only.
 The extension in the Group – Alternate Numbers page is read-
only.
 The Charge Number page is read-only.

Calling Line ID Number Access

Full access to calling line ID The administrator can view and modify calling line ID phone
number numbers for the enterprise groups and users.

Read-only access to calling line The administrator can view but not modify calling line ID phone
ID number numbers for the enterprise groups and users.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 56 OF 350
 Policy Description

Service Access

Full access to service assignment The Services, Assign Group Services, New User Services,
to the group or users and Existing User Services menu items appear from the
Group – Resources menu page. This is the default.

Restricted from authorizing Prevents the administrator from authorizing services to a group
services to a group and will have read-only version of the Group Services page.
May assign services to the group or user.

Read-only access to service  The Group – Services page is read-only.

assignments  The Group assignment pages do not appear (Group – Assign
Group Services, Group – New User Services Template, and
Group – Existing User services).
 The Group – Assign User Services page does not appear.

Session Admission Control Access

Full access to service provider The administrator can add, modify, and delete group-level
session admission control session admission control (SAC) groups and manage group-
level session admission control capacity settings.

Read-only access to service The administrator can view group-level SAC groups and group-
provider session admission level SAC capacity settings. This is the default setting.
control

No access to service provider  The Session Admission Control Group item on the Group –
session admission control Services page does not appear.
 The Session Admission Control Capacity item on the Group –
Resources page does not appear.
Service Pack Definition Access

Full access to service packs The Service Packs menu item on the Enterprise – Resources
menu page appears. This is the default.

No access to service packs  The Enterprise – Service Packs page does not appear.
 The Enterprise – Service Pack Migration page does not
appear.

Web Branding Access

Full access to web branding The Web Portal Branding menu item on the Enterprise –
Utilities menu page appears. This is the default.

No access to web branding The Enterprise – Web Portal Branding page does not appear.

Office Zone Access

Full access to service provider, The administrator can view their service provider office zone
group, and user office zone settings and configure groups’ and users’ office zone settings.
control

Read-only access to service The administrator can see but not configure office zone
provider, group, and user office settings.
zone control

Communication Barring Access

Full access to enterprise and Provides the administrator with full rights to create, modify, and
group communication barring delete communication barring criteria and profiles for the
control enterprise and to assign profiles to groups.

Read-only access to enterprise Allows the administrator to view but not modify communication
and group communication barring barring information for the enterprise and groups.
control

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 57 OF 350
 Policy Description

Number Activation Access

Full Access to number activation Provides the administrator with full control over activating
phone numbers.

Read-only access to number Allows the administrator to view but not modify phone number
activation activation information.

No access to number activation Prevents the administrator from modifying or viewing phone
number activation information.

Dialable Caller ID Access

(This policy is only visible if the Dialable Caller ID feature is enabled on your system.)

Full Access to Dialable Caller ID Provides the administrator with full control over creating,
criteria modifying, and deleting dialable caller ID criteria and settings at
the enterprise and group levels.

Read-only access to Dialable Allows the administrator to view but not modify dialable caller ID
Caller ID criteria settings for the enterprise and groups.

No access to Dialable Caller ID Prevents the administrator from modifying or viewing dialable
criteria caller ID settings for the enterprise and groups.

Verify Translation and Routing Access

Full access to Verify Translation Provides the administrator with full control over creating Verify
and Routing Translation and Routing (VTR) requests and running test calls
to gather information about translation, routing, and services for
the calls.

No access to Verify Translation Hides the Verify Translation and Routing menu item on the
and Routing administrator’s Utilities page, preventing the administrator from
creating VTR requests and running test calls.

4) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel.

4.7.4 Delete Enterprise Administrator

Use the Enterprise – Administrators Modify page to delete an enterprise administrator
from the system.

Figure 20 Enterprise – Administrators Modify

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 58 OF 350
 1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Administrators. The Enterprise –
Administrators page appears.
2) Click Edit in the row for the administrator to delete or click the Administrator ID. The
Enterprise – Administrators Modify page appears.
3) Click Delete. The Enterprise – Administrators page appears.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

NOTE: The Delete function cannot be undone. Once you click Delete, your deletion is final.
You can press Cancel before you click Delete to avoid a deletion.

4.8 Departments
Use the Departments menu item on the Enterprise – Profile menu page to:
 List Departments
 Add Department
 Modify Department
 Delete Department

4.8.1 List Departments

Use the Enterprise – Departments page to list the departments in the enterprise. The full
path name of each department is shown in the list. Each sub-department is separated
from its parent by a backslash (\). On this page, you can search for a particular
department. From this page, you can add a department or select a department to be
modified or deleted.
The Enterprise – Departments page is a list page that allows you to search several
different ways. You can click the headings of a column to change the sort order of items in
the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search criteria, or click the page
links (for example, Next or Previous). For more information on defining search criteria,
see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

Figure 21 Enterprise – Departments

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Departments. The Enterprise –

Departments page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 59 OF 350
 4.8.2 Add Department
Use the Enterprise – Departments Add page to add a department to the enterprise.
To add a department, display the Enterprise – Department Add page.

NOTE: Departments within a group do not appear on this list. Select a group before you add a
department to it.

Figure 22 Enterprise – Department Add

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Departments. The Enterprise –

Departments page appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise – Department Add page appears.
3) Type the name of the department. This name may not exceed 50 characters, and
must be unique at the enterprise level. It cannot contain % or + symbols,
backslashes, parenthesis, or double quotes.
4) Select the parent department from the drop-down list. If this department is a parent,
select the default value “None”.

NOTE: If you have not yet added the appropriate parent directory, you can modify the Parent
Directory value from the Enterprise – Department Modify page.

5) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK. To exit without
saving, select another page or click Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 60 OF 350
 4.8.3 Modify Department
Use the Enterprise – Department Modify page to modify a department in the enterprise.
Changes to the parent department affect all sub-departments.

Figure 23 Enterprise – Departments Modify

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Departments. The Enterprise –

Departments page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the department to edit. The Enterprise –
Departments Modify page appears.
3) Edit the department information by typing over the existing text or selecting from the
drop-down list.

NOTE: Change the name of the Parent Department to change the structure of all sub-
departments (or dependents) of the current department.

4) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK. To exit without
saving, select another page or click Cancel.

4.8.4 Delete Department

Use the Enterprise – Departments Modify page to delete a department from the
enterprise. You may not remove a department with users assigned to it or with
departments connected to it.

Figure 24 Enterprise – Departments Modify

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Departments. The Enterprise –

Departments page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 61 OF 350
 2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the department to edit. The Enterprise –
Departments Modify page appears.
3) Click Delete. The Enterprise – Departments page appears.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

NOTE: The Delete function cannot be undone. Once you click Delete, your deletion is final.
You can press Cancel before you click Delete to avoid a deletion.

4.9 Schedules
Use the Enterprise – Schedules page to configure time and holiday schedules for your
enterprise. Schedules are used in services such as BroadWorks Anywhere, Call
Forwarding Selective, and Priority Alert.
All enterprise groups and users can use the schedules defined at the enterprise level in
their services.
You create a schedule by first creating an empty schedule and then adding events to it to
specify when the schedule applies.

NOTE: An empty schedule, that is a schedule with no events, is considered by the system as
always applying.

4.9.1 List and Delete Schedules

Use the Enterprise – Schedules page to list and delete enterprise schedules.

Figure 25 Enterprise – Schedules

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Schedules. The Enterprise – Schedules
page appears.
2) To delete a schedule, check the Delete box in the row of the schedule to delete.
3) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 62 OF 350
 4.9.2 Add Schedule
Use the Enterprise – Schedule Add page to add a schedule for your enterprise.

Figure 26 Enterprise – Schedule Add

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Schedules. The Enterprise – Schedules
page appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise – Schedule Add page appears.
3) In the Schedule Name text box, enter the name for the schedule. The name can be
from 1 through 40 characters.
4) Specify the type of schedule you want to create: check Holiday or Time.
5) Click OK. This creates a schedule with no events. To complete the definition, follow
the procedure in section 4.9.3 Add Event to add one or more events to the schedule.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

4.9.3 Add Event

Use the Enterprise – Event Add page to add an event to a schedule.

Figure 27 Enterprise – Event Add

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 63 OF 350
 1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Schedules. The Enterprise – Schedules
page appears.
2) Click Edit in the row of the schedule to which you want to add an event. The
Enterprise – Schedule Modify page appears.
3) Click Add. The Enterprise – Event Add page appears.
4) In the Event Name text box, enter a name for the event.
5) In the Start Date box, select a day from the calendar.
6) To make it an all day event, check the All Day Event box.

NOTE: When you check All Day Event, the Start Time and End Time options are disabled.

7) If applicable, in the Start Time box, type a time (HH:MM, 1 <= HH <= 12, 00 <= MM
<= 59) and select AM or PM from the drop-down list.
8) In the End Date box, select a day from the calendar.
9) If applicable, in the End Time box, type a time (HH:MM, 1 <= HH <= 12, 00 <= MM <=
59) and select AM or PM from the drop-down list.
10) Configure the recurrence pattern for the event. From the Recurs drop-down list,
select the type of recurrence from the following options:
− Never to make it a one-time event.
− Daily and enter the frequency of occurrence in days from 1 through 999.

Figure 28 Event Add – Recurrence Pattern (Daily)

− Weekly, enter the frequency of occurrence in weeks (from 1 through 999) and
select the day or days of the week on which the event should occur.

Figure 29 Event Add – Recurrence Pattern (Weekly)

− Monthly, enter the frequency of occurrence in months (from 1 through 999) and
specify the day for the recurrence of the event. Select one of the following
options:
− To schedule the event on a specific day of the month, for example the 27th,
check Day <X> of the month and enter the day from 1 through 31. If you
select 29, 30, or 31, the occurrence will fall on the last day of the month for
months that are shorter than 29, 30, or 31 days respectively.
− To schedule the event on a specific day of the week within the month, for
example the second Monday of the month, check The <Xth> <Day-of-Week>
of the month, and select Xth and Day-of-Week from the drop-down lists.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 64 OF 350
 Figure 30 Event Add – Recurrence Pattern (Monthly)

− Yearly, specify the frequency of occurrence in years (from 1 through 99), for
example, every two years; and specify the day for the recurrence of the event.
Select one of the following options:
− To schedule the event on a specific day of the year, check Day <X> of
<Month>, enter the day and select the month from the drop down list. For
example, if you select April, you can enter a day from 1 through 30, and if you
select February, you can enter a day from 1 through 29.
− To schedule the event on a specific day of the week and month, for example
the first Sunday of February, check The <Xth> <Day-of-Week> of <Month>
and select Xth, Day-of-Week, and Month from the drop-down lists.

Figure 31 Event Add – Recurrence Pattern (Yearly)

11) For a recurrent event, specify when the event should end. In the Recurrence Range
section, select one of the following options for End:
− Never
− After <X> occurrences, and enter the number of occurrences from 1 through 999
− Date, and select the date from the calendar or enter a date in the MM/DD/YYYY
format

Figure 32 Event Add – Recurrence Range

12) Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 65 OF 350
 4.9.4 Modify Schedule
Use the Enterprise – Schedule Modify page to modify a schedule.

Figure 33 Enterprise – Schedule Modify

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Schedules. The Enterprise – Schedules
page appears.
2) Click Edit in the row of the schedule to modify. The Enterprise – Schedule Modify
page appears.
3) If needed, modify the schedule name.
4) To delete an event, check the Delete box on the row for the event.
5) Click Apply.
6) To modify an event, click Edit in the row of the event. The Enterprise – Event Modify
page appears.

Figure 34 Enterprise – Event Modify

7) Modify information as required. For information about the options available on this
page, see section 4.9.3 Add Event.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 66 OF 350
 8) To add an event, follow the procedure in section 4.9.3 Add Event.
9) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and
displays the previous page.
To exit without saving click Cancel or select another page.

4.10 Call Processing Policies

Use the Call Processing Policies page to configure BroadWorks call processing behavior
at the enterprise level.
On a per-call basis, the system selects the policy to use based on the level at which the
policies are configured, with the user level policies having the highest priority and the
system level policies the lowest.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 67 OF 350
 Figure 35 Enterprise – Call Processing Policies (Top of Page)

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 68 OF 350
 Figure 36 Enterprise – Call Processing Policies (Bottom of Page)

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Call Processing Policies under the
Advanced menu. The Enterprise – Call Processing Policies page appears.
2) Select or enter information as described in the following table.
Field Description

Calling Line ID

External Calls: This option allows you to override the system Calling Line ID
 Use user phone number for policy settings for external calls at the enterprise level.
Calling Line Identity  Select Use user phone number for Calling Line Identity to
 Use configurable CLID for Calling send the user’s phone number as calling line identity.
Line Identity  Select Use configurable CLID for Calling Line Identity to
send the user’s custom calling line ID as calling line identity.
Enterprise Calls This option allows you to override the system Calling Line ID
 Use extension policy settings for enterprise calls at the enterprise level.
 Use location code plus extension  Select Use extension to send the user’s extension as
 Use External Calls Policy calling line identity.
 Select Use location code plus extension to send the group’s
location code followed by the user’s extension as calling
line identity.
 Select Use External Calls Policy to use the setting
configured on this page for external calls.
Group Calls This option allows you to override the system Calling Line ID
 Use extension policy settings for group calls at the enterprise level.
 Use location code plus extension  Select Use extension to send the user’s extension as
 Use External Calls Policy calling line identity.
 Select Use location code plus extension to send the group’s
location code followed by the user’s extension as calling
line identity.
 Select Use External Calls Policy to use the setting
configured on this page for external calls.
Emergency Calls: This option allows you to override the system Calling Line ID
 Use user phone number for policy settings for emergency calls at the enterprise level.
Calling Line Identity  Select Use user phone number for Calling Line Identity to
 Use configurable CLID for send the user’s phone number as calling line identity.
Calling Line Identity  Select Use configurable CLID for Calling Line Identity to
send the user’s custom calling line ID as calling line identity.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 69 OF 350
 Field Description

Allow Alternate Numbers for Select this option to allow an alternate number to be used as
Redirecting Identity a redirecting identity in the redirection header.

Allow Configurable CLID for Select this option to allow a configurable CLID to be used as
Redirecting Identity a redirecting identity in the redirection header.

Block Calling Name for External Select this option to block the user’s calling name when the
Calls user makes a call to an external destination.

Media

Media Policy: Configure the Media policy as follows:

 Force Use of Uncompressed  Select Force Use of Uncompressed Codec to force a user’s
Codec device to use an uncompressed codec. For example, fax
 Supported Media machines and modems require the use of a clear channel
 None and an uncompressed codec. This setting does not apply
to virtual users.
 Select Use Supported Media to provision what media
(codec) subscribers are permitted to use. This is done by
building media sets that are applied to subscribers. The
policy does not apply to virtual subscriber services such as
Auto Attendant, voice portal, hunt group, trunk group, call
center, and so on.
 Select None to specify that no Media Policy is enforced at
the enterprise level.
Call Limits

Enable Maximum Number of Select this option and enter the number from 1 through
Concurrent Calls 999999 in the text box to specify the maximum allowed
number of concurrent calls. If a caller exceeds the
maximum number of simultaneous calls allowed on
terminations, they are given busy treatment. Busy treatment
may include Voice Messaging, Call Forwarding Busy, and
any other active service assigned to the subscriber that is
invoked on Busy. Note that this feature only counts
originating and terminating calls for a subscriber. Redirected
calls are not counted as part of this policy.
NOTE: This setting does not apply to virtual users.

Enable Maximum Number of Select this option and enter the number from 1 through
Concurrent Video Calls 999999 in the text box to restrict the number of concurrent
video calls a user can make. If a caller exceeds the
maximum number of simultaneous video calls allowed on
terminations, they are given busy treatment. Busy treatment
can include Voice Messaging, Call Forwarding Busy, and
any other active service assigned to the subscriber that is
invoked on Busy. Note that this feature only counts
originating and terminating calls for a subscriber. Redirected
calls are not counted as part of this policy.
NOTE: This setting does not apply to virtual users.

Enable Maximum Duration for Select this option and enter the number from 1 through 2880
Answered Calls in the text box to restrict the duration of answered calls. If a
user exceeds the maximum time on a given call, the call is
taken down and an abnormal call release is indicated in the
call detail record.
NOTE: This setting does not apply to virtual users.

Enable Maximum Duration for Select this option and enter the number from 1 through 2880
Unanswered Calls in the text box to restrict the duration of answered calls.
When a call exceeds the maximum time, it is taken down
and the calling party receives reorder tone.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 70 OF 350
 Field Description

Enable Maximum Number of Select this option and enter the number from 1 through
Concurrent Redirected Calls 999999 in the text box to place a limit on the number of
simultaneous redirections for a subscriber. The Enable
Maximum Number of Concurrent Redirected Calls policy is
similar to the policy that limits the number of simultaneous
calls, the difference being that this policy counts only calls
that are redirected.
When the allowed maximum number of concurrent
redirected calls is exceeded, the call is short-circuited in a
similar way to the Maximum Redirection Depth policy.
The Maximum Number of Concurrent Redirected Calls
policy applies to the same redirecting services as the
Maximum Redirection Depth policy. However, the Maximum
Number of Concurrent Redirected Calls policy does not
apply to redirecting services assigned to virtual subscribers.

Enable Maximum Number of Select this option and enter the number from 1 through
Concurrent Find Me/Follow Me 999999 in the text box to limit the number of simultaneous
Invocations invocations of Find Me/Follow Me services. These services
include Simultaneous Ringing, Sequential Ringing, and
Remote Office.

Enable Maximum Find Me/Follow Select this option and enter the number from 1 through 100
Me Depth in the text box to limit the cascading of forking services, that
is, Simultaneous Ringing and Sequential Ringing. It is
similar to the Maximum Redirection Depth policy, but
different in that it counts only the diversion entries where the
reason is “follow-me”.
Simultaneous Ringing and Sequential Ringing both cause
redirections that add a “follow-me” diversion entry, which
means that the policy restricts the cascading of these forking
services. Although it is not a forking service, Remote Office
also causes a redirection with a “follow-me” diversion entry.
Therefore, the policy also applies to the Remote Office
service.

Maximum Redirection Depth Select this option and enter the number from 1 through 100
in the text box to specify the maximum allowed number of
cascaded redirections or “hops”.
The Maximum Redirection Depth policy applies to the
following redirecting services:
 Call Forwarding Always
 Call Forwarding Busy
 Call Forwarding No Answer
 Selective Call Forwarding
 Voice Mail Deposit
 Direct Voice Mail Transfer
 SIP Phone Forwarding (302 from SIP phone)
 Call Processing Language
 Client-initiated Blind Transfer (for example, from the
CommPilot Call Manager or BroadWorks Assistant–
Enterprise)
 Phone-initiated Blind Transfer
 Series Completion
 PBX Deflection Before Answer
 Trunk Group Forward on Unreachable or Capacity
Exceeded Condition
The Maximum Redirection Depth policy applies to
redirecting services assigned to virtual subscribers, such as
Auto Attendant. Since these virtual subscribers do not have
per-user call processing policies that regular subscribers
have, the Application Server applies the policies of the
virtual subscriber’s enterprise.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 71 OF 350
 Field Description

Conferencing

Use Conference URI Setting: This setting allows you to specify the conference URI to use.
 System  Select System to use the setting defined at the system
 Service Provider level.
 Select Service Provider to use a custom setting and enter
the conference URI to use.
The conference URI is used by devices to refer the
conference parties and is shared with the Three-Way Calling
and N-Way Calling services.
The user part of the conference URI can be from 1 through
80 characters and cannot contain the @ symbol.

Translation and Routing

Network Usage: Specify whether calls should be routed via the network
 Force All Calls to use the interface as follows:
Network  Select Force All Calls to use the Network to force all calls
 Force All Calls to the Network from the enterprise, including extensions dialed and location
except extension/location code/extensions dialed, to route via the network interface.
 Do not Force Enterprise/Group Note that a Network Server with Private Dial Plan is
Calls to the Network required for extension dialed and location code/extension
dialed calls to work properly when forced to the network.
 Select Force All Calls to the Network except
extension/location to force all calls from the enterprise
excluding extensions dialed and location code/ extensions
dialed to route via the network interface.
 Select Do not Force Enterprise/Group Calls to the Network
to not enforce call routing via the network interface.
Enable Enterprise Extension Dialing Select this option to allow extension dialing for the
enterprise. When the policy is disabled, the calls route to
the Network Server. When the policy is enabled, the calls
route to the enterprise destination, internally (within the
same Application Server cluster).

Enforce Group Calling Line Identity Select this option to enforce group calling line identity
Restriction restrictions for incoming calls.

Enforce Enterprise Calling Line Select this option to enforce enterprise calling line identity
Identity Restriction restrictions for incoming calls.

Allow Enterprise/Group Call Typing When this option is selected, 302 responses from the
for Private Dialing Plan Network Server that result in a group or enterprise call are
routed internally within the Application Server, if the
destination is hosted on the same Application Server, and if
the Network Server used a Private Dialing Plan Routing
policy.
NOTE: The Allow Group Call Typing for Private Dialing Plan
policy, as well as the Override CLID Restriction For Private
Call Category policy, only applies in an IP Multimedia
Subsystem (IMS) deployment if the use of enhanced
network translations is enabled by the system administrator
(so that queries to the Network Server can be made).

Allow Enterprise/Group Call Typing The Allow Enterprise/Group Call Typing for Public Dialing
for Public Dialing Plan Plan call processing policy is very similar to the one above,
with the exception that the type of network from the Network
Server contact must be set to “PUBLIC”.
The category must still be “PRIVATE” to indicate that an
Enterprise Routing policy was used. Note that if the
category is not set to “PRIVATE”, the call is routed
externally.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 72 OF 350
 Field Description

Override CLID Restriction For When the Network Server returns a contact via its private
Private Call Category dial plan (the cat and ton parameters in the returned contact
are both set to “PRIVATE”), whether or not the destination is
part of the same enterprise as the caller. The CLID
restrictions can be overridden (the caller’s privacy made
public) if the Override Calling Line Identity Restriction for
External Calls via Private Dialing Plan call processing policy
is enabled, for calls going to the network.

Use Enterprise CLID For Private This policy uses the enterprise CLID to identify the caller for
Call Category inter-Application Server calls via a private dialing plan.
Previously the caller’s directory number (DN) was used to
identify the caller. The enterprise CLID is:
 The user’s extension for intra-group calls.
 The user’s location code followed by the user’s extension for
intra-enterprise calls.

Incoming Caller ID

Use Service Provider/Enterprise This option allows you to specify the Dialable Caller ID policy
Dialable Caller ID Policy to use.
Use System Dialable Caller ID  Select Use Service Provider/Enterprise Dialable Caller ID
Policy Policy to use the policy defined on this page.
 Select Use System Caller ID Policy to use the policy
defined at the system level.
Dialable Caller ID: On/Off Check On to enable or check Off to disable the use of the
dialable caller ID.

3) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

4.11 Dial Plan Policy

Use the Dial Plan Policy page to configure the enterprise Dial Plan policy for digit
collection and outside access codes policies.
You can configure a customizable digit map including public and private dial plans
simultaneously on a per-group basis. This allows integrated and consistent control of digit
collection and external digit processing policies for Media Gateway Control Protocol
(MGCP) devices and BroadWorks Media Servers, which minimizes a long inter-digit
timeout and/or the requirement for a terminator key (that is, #) to be dialed by the user.
This also allows the “dial 9 to access an outside line” feature, which is commonly used in
many private branch exchange (PBX) systems.
Note that the Dial Plan policy replaces the Digit Collection policy, which has been
removed.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 73 OF 350
 Figure 37 Enterprise – Dial Plan Policy

Use the following procedure to configure the Dial Plan policy:

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Dial Plan Policy under the Advanced
menu. The Enterprise – Dial Plan Policy page appears.
2) Check the Requires Access Code for Public Calls box to require dialing, as well as an
access code to access the public dialing plan. Uncheck to ignore this requirement.
3) Check the Allow E.164 Public Calls box to allow E.164 addresses as public calls
(regardless of the non-permissive option setting). Note that this option is only relevant
when the Requires Access Code for Public Calls option is checked. Uncheck to
ignore this requirement.
4) Check the Prefer E.164 Number Format for Callback Services box to indicate that
E.164 number format is the preferred format for Callback services.
5) In the Public Digit Map text box, enter the digit map using the following syntax. The
format is:
DigitString | "(" DigitString 0*( "|" DigitString ) ")"

… where:
DigitString 1*((DTMFToken | "x" | DTMFRange) ["."])

DTMFRange "[" 1*((DIGIT "-" DIGIT ) | DTMFToken ) "]"

DTMFToken DIGIT | "#" | "*" | "T"

DIGIT "0" | "1" | "2" | "3" | "4" | "5" | "6" | "7" | "8" | "9"

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 74 OF 350
 Example
Following is an example of a valid digit map valid:
(1xxx| 2.[#T])

In this digit map, collection of digit strings starting with “1” stops after four digits (total)
are collected. Collection of digit strings starting with “2” continues until a timeout (“T”)
is reached or until the “#” character is collected. Digits collected are then reported to
the Application Server.
6) In the Private Digit Map text box, enter the private digit map. The private digit map is
optional. If it is not entered, the public digit map is used. For information about the
digit map syntax, see the previous step.
7) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

4.11.1 Add Access Code

You use this page to add a new access code to a Dial Plan policy.

Figure 38 Enterprise – Dial Plan Policy Add

Use the following procedure to add a new access code for the Dial Plan policy:
1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Dial Plan Policy under the Advanced
menu. The Enterprise – Dial Plan Policy page appears.
2) Click Add. The Dial Plan Policy Add page appears.
3) In the *Access Code text box, enter the access code number. An access code
consists of one through five digits (0 through 9, *, #) and does not contain wildcard
characters.
4) In the Description text box, enter the description, which is a meaningful description of
the access code.
5) Check or uncheck Include Code for Translations and Routing. This determines
whether the access code should be included as part of the dialed digits for network
translations and routing.
6) Check or uncheck Include Code for Screening Services. This determines whether the
access code should be included as part of the dialed digits for call screening (for
example, for the Outgoing Dialing Plan and Outgoing Calling Plan).

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 75 OF 350
 7) Check or uncheck Enable Secondary Dial Tone. This attribute determines whether a
secondary dial tone is applicable for calls initiated from an MGCP device or for call
originations that involve the Media Server for digit collection. If this attribute is
enabled, then the private digit map is initially used for digit collection. This attribute
cannot be enabled unless a private digit map is configured.

NOTE: The Enable Secondary Dial Tone check box is available only when a private digit map
has been configured.

8) To save your changes, click OK. The Enterprise – Dial Plan Policy page appears.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

4.11.2 Modify or Delete Access Code

You use this page to modify an access code for the Dial Plan policy.

Figure 39 Enterprise – Dial Plan Policy Modify

Use the following procedure to modify or delete an access code for the Dial Plan policy:
1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Dial Plan Policy under the Advanced
menu. The Enterprise – Dial Plan Policy page appears.
2) Click Edit on the row for the access code to edit or click on the Access Code. The
Enterprise – Dial Plan Policy Modify page appears.
3) To delete the access code, click Delete. The Enterprise – Dial Plan Policy page
appears.

NOTE: The Delete function cannot be undone. Once you click Delete, your deletion is final.
You can press Cancel before you click Delete to avoid a deletion.

4) To modify the access code, edit the access code information.

5) To save your changes, click OK. The Enterprise – Dial Plan Policy page appears.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 76 OF 350
 4.12 Virtual On-Net Enterprise Extensions
The Virtual On-Net Enterprise Extensions service allows BroadWorks users to reach
destinations that are not part of their enterprise, using extensions. The service integrates
the virtual private network (VPN) destinations with the BroadWorks enterprise framework
by explicitly defining in the enterprise directory destinations that are not part of the
enterprise and associating extensions with them. Enterprise users with the Virtual On-Net
Enterprise Extensions service enabled can place calls to these destinations using their
extensions, as they would to users in their enterprise.
Destinations configured using the Virtual On-Net Enterprise Extensions service are called
Virtual On-Net users. They are configured by group administrators. For more information,
see the BroadWorks Application Server Group Web Interface Administrator Guide – Part
1.
Use the Enterprise – Virtual On-Net Users page to view Virtual On-Net users in your
enterprise. Virtual On-Net users are also listed in your enterprise directory.
From this page, you can also access the pages to modify Virtual On-Net users.

Figure 40 Enterprise – Virtual On-Net Users

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu, click Virtual On-Net Enterprise Extensions. The
Enterprise – Virtual On-Net Users page appears.
This page is a list page that allows you to search several different ways. You can click
the headings of a column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the
input boxes below the data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for
example, Next or Previous. For more information on defining search criteria, see the
BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.
2) To edit a Virtual On-Net user entry, click Edit in the row for the entry. For information
on modifying Virtual On-Net users see BroadWorks Application Server Group Web
Interface Administration Guide Part 1.
3) Click OK to return to the previous menu.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 77 OF 350
 4.13 Voice VPN
You use the Enterprise – Voice VPN page to configure Voice Virtual Private Network
(VPN) rules and add Voice VPN entries. You can also edit or delete exiting entries.
You must set Voice VPN rules and add Voice VPN entries to your enterprise to allow
groups to make and receive inter-site calls from any other group within your enterprise.
Voice VPN rules are assigned automatically to any group you add. You must create a
location code (via the Voice VPN entry) for each group in your enterprise and assign that
location code when you create the group.

Figure 41 Enterprise – Voice VPN

4.13.1 Configure Voice VPN Rules

Voice VPN rules apply to all groups you add to your enterprise.
1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Voice VPN. The Enterprise – Voice
VPN page appears.
2) To enable or disable routing, select On or Off.
When routing is enabled, this instance is active and you can use your own facilities to
terminate public calls at specified NEs.
3) For Default selector, select Public or Private to select the default behavior of routing if
no Voice VPN entry matches the digits dialed.
4) For Selector for non-matching E164 numbers, select Public or Default selector to
select the default behavior of routing if no Voice VPN entry matches the digits dialed.
5) For Route using, select Called number only or Called number and phone-context.
If required by the Voice VPN policy, select the Called number and phone-context
option when the phone-context parameter must be returned (which has the proper
service name and group name).
6) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 78 OF 350
 4.13.2 Add Voice VPN Policy
Use the Enterprise – Voice VPN Add page to add a new Voice VPN policy. Policies are
used to create location codes and dialing patterns. You require a unique location code for
each group in your enterprise to allow inter-site calls. Required fields are indicated with an
asterisk (*).
1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Voice VPN. The Enterprise – Voice
VPN page appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise – Voice VPN Add page appears.

Figure 42 Enterprise – Voice VPN Add

NOTE: The contents of the page change depending on the Selector you choose.

3) Specify the Location Code (from 1 through 22 digits).

4) Select the Minimum and Maximum Extension Length from the drop-down lists.
5) Enter a description for the entry (optional).
6) Specify the Selector as follows:
Private – Use only private policies to process calls.
Public – Continue through all available policies starting with private policies first, and
then public ones.
Route – Route calls with redirect.
Treatment – Treat calls using the corresponding treatment.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 79 OF 350
 7) If you select Private or Public, the page appears as shown above.
If you select Route, the following drop-down menu appears before the Digit
Manipulations section. Select the Group ID to whom you want to assign the Voice
VPN entry.

Figure 43 Route – Group ID

If you select Treatment, the following drop-down menu appears. Select one of the
following treatments: No forwarding address, SIP formatting error, or NS to refuse to
process request. Go to step 9.

Figure 44 Treatment – Treatment

8) Specify the Digit Manipulation Operations (for Private, Public, and Route Selectors).
You can select up to eight digit manipulation operations from the drop-down lists.
9) Click OK to add the entry. Click Cancel to return to the Enterprise – Voice VPN page
without applying your changes.

4.13.3 Modify or Delete Voice VPN Policy

Use the Enterprise – Voice VPN Modify page to edit or delete an existing Voice VPN
policy.
To modify a policy:
1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Voice VPN. The Enterprise – Voice
VPN page appears.
2) Click the desired Voice VPN policy, or click Edit (located to the right of the policy).
The Enterprise – Voice VPN Modify page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 80 OF 350
 Figure 45 Enterprise – Voice VPN Modify

3) Modify the fields as needed. You cannot edit the Location Code. For more
information about the fields on this page, se section 4.13.2 Add Voice VPN Policy.
4) Click OK to modify the policy or click Cancel to return to the Voice VPN page without
applying your changes.
To delete a policy:
Click Delete. The Enterprise – Voice VPN page appears.

WARNING: This action cannot be undone. Once you click Delete, the policy is permanently
deleted.

4.14 Dialable Caller ID

You use the Dialable Caller ID menu item on the Enterprise – Profile menu page to
manage dialable caller ID settings and criteria for your enterprise.
Dialable caller ID criteria, organized in criteria entries, are used to screen incoming calls
and transform the caller's phone number into a dialable format. Dialable caller ID criteria
can be defined at the system, enterprise, and group levels. The level to apply to a call is
determined by the Call Processing Policies settings and the settings defined on this page.
At each level, the criteria entries are prioritized and applied to calls in the order of priority.
1 denotes the highest priority, 2 is the second highest priority, and so on. When you
create a new criteria entry, it is automatically assigned the next available priority, which
you can subsequently modify.
Within a criteria entry, the criteria are grouped. When no criteria are selected within a
group of criteria, it means that the group does not matter. If any criteria are selected within
a group, the call must match at least one of the selected criteria.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 81 OF 350
 If a call matches all the groups of criteria in a criteria entry, the corresponding prefix digits
are added at the beginning of the remote party's number received from the Network
Server. Note that the prefix digits can be empty.
This section includes the following procedures for configuring the Dialable Caller ID
feature for your enterprise:
 View Dialable Caller ID Settings
 Configure Dialable Caller ID Settings and Prioritize Entries
 Add Dialable Caller ID Criteria Entry
 Modify or Delete Dialable Caller ID Entry

4.14.1 View Dialable Caller ID Settings

You use the Enterprise – Dialable Caller ID page to view the dialable caller ID settings for
your enterprise.
Depending on your access permissions you can have full or read-only access to this page.

Figure 46 Enterprise – Dialable Caller ID (Read-only)

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Dialable Caller ID. The Enterprise –
Dialable Caller ID page appears.
2) To view the details of a particular entry, click View/Edit on the row for the entry.
3) To return to the previous page, click OK.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 82 OF 350
 4.14.2 Configure Dialable Caller ID Settings and Prioritize Entries
You use the Enterprise – Dialable Caller ID page to configure dialable caller ID settings for
your enterprise and to prioritize dialable caller ID criteria entries.

Figure 47 Enterprise – Dialable Caller ID

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Dialable Caller ID. The Enterprise –
Dialable Caller ID page appears.
2) Select the Dialable Caller ID configuration to use for your enterprise. For Dialable
Caller ID Configuration, check one of the following options:
− Check Use Service Provider/Enterprise Criteria to use the dialable caller ID
criteria defined for your enterprise.
− Check Use System Criteria to use the dialable caller ID criteria defined at the
system level.
3) Select the action to take in case the screening of the caller's phone number fails:
− Check Display the received caller ID to display the caller's ID received from the
network.
− Check Do not display the caller's number to display only the caller's name.
− Check Do not display the caller's name or number to not display the caller's
identity.
4) Prioritize criteria entries. To change the priority of a criteria entry, type the new priority
in the Priority column of the row for the entry.
You can enter any whole or decimal number. When you apply the changes, the
criteria entries are re-numbered from 1 to n, in the relative order assigned by you and
reordered accordingly. For example, if there are two criteria entries: A and B, and you
assign priority 7 to entry A and priority 3.5 to entry B, entry B will be listed first with
priority 1, and entry A will be listed second with priority 2.
5) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 83 OF 350
 4.14.3 Add Dialable Caller ID Criteria Entry
You use the Enterprise – Dialable Caller ID Criteria Add page to add a dialable caller ID
criteria entry for your enterprise.
A criteria entry is a collection of criteria to be applied to incoming calls and optionally a
prefix to add at the beginning of the caller’s phone number for calls that match the criteria
in the entry. The criteria are grouped. When no criteria are selected within a group of
criteria, it means that the group does not matter. If any criteria are selected within a group,
the call must match at least one of the selected criteria.
The criteria are grouped in three groups:
 Call category – The call category is determined by the cat contact parameter
obtained from the Network Server query response. The system-defined cat values
are shown in the following table:
System-defined Cat Values Description

NATIONAL National

INTERLAT InterLATA

INTRALAT IntraLATA Toll

INTERNAT International

LOCAL Local

PRIVATE Private

EMERG Emergency

OTHER Other

NOTE: The table enumerates all the possible values of call category. Some values may not
apply to terminating calls.

 Network call type – The network call type is determined by the ct contact parameter
obtained from the Network Server query response. The network call types supported
by the Application Server are provisioned via the CLI interface at the following level:
AS_CLI/System/CallP/CommunicationBarring/CallTypes

 Alternate call indicator – The alternate call indicator is determined by the aci contact
parameter obtained from the Network Server query response. The alternate call
indicators supported by the Application Server are provisioned via the CLI interface at
the following level:
AS_CLI/System/CallP/CommunicationBarring/AltCallIndicators

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 84 OF 350
 Figure 48 Enterprise – Dialable Caller ID Criteria Add

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Dialable Caller ID. The Enterprise –
Dialable Caller ID page appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise – Dialable Caller ID Add page appears.
3) Enter a name and a description for the entry. The name is mandatory and can be
from 1 through 40 characters.
4) In the Prefix Digits text box, enter the digits to add at the beginning of the caller's
phone number if the call satisfies the conditions specified in this entry. The prefix
consists of 1 through 10 digits (0 through 9, *, #) and does not contain wildcard
characters.
5) In the Match Categories section, select one or more call categories to match.
6) Select configurable call types to match. In the Available Configurable Call Types
column, select the call types and click Add >. Or to select all configurable call types,
click Add All>>.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 85 OF 350
 7) Select alternate call indicators to match. In the Available Alternate Call Indicators
column, select the indicators and click Add. Or to select all alternate call indicators,
click Add All>>.
8) Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

4.14.4 Modify or Delete Dialable Caller ID Entry

You use Enterprise – Dialable Caller ID Modify page to edit or delete a selected dialable
caller ID criteria entry.

Figure 49 Enterprise – Dialable Caller ID Criteria Modify (Top of Page)

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Dialable Caller ID. The Enterprise –
Dialable Caller ID page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 86 OF 350
 2) Click Edit in the row of the entry to edit. The Enterprise – Dialable Caller ID Modify
page appears.
3) To delete the entry, click Delete. The Enterprise – Profile page appears.

WARNING: This operation is final and cannot be undone.

4) Modify the entry as required. For information about the options available on this page,
see section 4.14.3 Add Dialable Caller ID Criteria Entry.
5) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 87 OF 350
 5 Resources Menu

The Enterprise – Resources menu page includes menu items that relate to all resources
within your enterprise ID. This section includes procedures for Resources menu items
that can be performed only by the enterprise.

NOTE: The pages under the Resources heading allow you to display and modify information
related to the resources for your enterprise ID account. To add or modify information for a
specific group, see section 11 Configure Group Administration, Services, and Resources.

Links to the following menu pages from the Resources menu are included in this section:
 Carriers
 Group Paging Targets Capacity
 Identity/Device Endpoints
 Identity/Device Profiles
 Domains
 Network Classes of Service
 Numbers
 Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges
 Office Zones
 Route Point External Systems
 Services
 Service Packs
 Service Pack Usage
 Session Admission Control Capacity
 System Defined Communication Barring Criteria
 System Defined Communication Barring Incoming Criteria
 Trunking Call Capacity
 Activate Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges
 IMRNs
 Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 88 OF 350
 5.1 Access Resources Menu
On your Home page, in the Options list, click Resources to access the Enterprise –
Resources menu page.

Figure 50 Enterprise – Resources Menu (Top of Page)

5.2 Carriers
Use the Carriers menu item on the Enterprise – Resources menu page to:
 List Carriers
 Add Carriers
 Modify Carriers
 Delete Carriers

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 89 OF 350
 5.2.1 List Carriers
Use the Enterprise – Carriers page to display carriers for the enterprise by country code.
On this page, you can search for a particular carrier, or you can add a carrier, or select a
carrier to be modified or deleted. Intra-LATA, Inter-LATA, and International appear next to
the country code in the list.
The Enterprise – Carriers page is a list page that allows you to search several different
ways. You can click the headings of a column to change the sort order of items in the
column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search criteria, or click the page
links, for example, Next or Previous. For more information on defining search criteria,
see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

Figure 51 Enterprise – Carriers

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Carriers. The Enterprise – Carriers
page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

5.2.2 Add Carriers

Use the Enterprise – Carriers Add page to associate up to three carriers with a country
code. These provisioned carriers are available to groups and users who do not specify
their provisioned carriers.

Figure 52 Enterprise – Carriers Add

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Carriers. The Enterprise – Carriers
page appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise – Carriers Add page appears.
3) Select the country code from the drop-down list.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 90 OF 350
 4) From the drop-down list, select the Intra-LATA carrier for the country code.
5) From the drop-down list, select the Inter-LATA carrier for the country code.
6) From the drop-down list, select the International carrier for the country code.
7) Save your changes. Click OK. The previous page appears.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

5.2.3 Modify Carriers

Use the Enterprise – Carriers Modify page to modify carriers associated with a country
code.
The Enterprise – Carriers Modify page allows you to view or modify the association of
preferred carriers to a country code. Associate individual carriers to Intra-LATA, Inter-
LATA, and International calls.

Figure 53 Enterprise – Carriers Modify

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Carriers. The Enterprise – Carriers
page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row of the country code to edit. The Enterprise – Carriers
Modify page appears.
3) Edit the carrier information.
4) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 91 OF 350
 5.2.4 Delete Carriers
Use the Enterprise – Carriers Modify page to delete carriers associated with a country
code.
The Enterprise – Carriers Modify page allows you to remove the association of preferred
carriers to a country code.

Figure 54 Enterprise – Carriers Modify

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Carriers. The Enterprise – Carriers
page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row of the country code to edit. The Enterprise – Carriers
Modify page appears.
3) Click Delete.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

5.3 Group Paging Targets Capacity

Use the Group Paging Targets Capacity menu item on the Enterprise – Resources menu
page to view the group paging targets capacity assigned to your enterprise. This setting
applies to the Group Paging service and determines the maximum number of target users
a paging group can have. Target users are members of a paging group that are paged
simultaneously when a call is made to the paging group.
This setting determines the maximum group paging targets capacity you can assign to a
group in your enterprise.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 92 OF 350
 5.3.1 View Group Paging Targets Capacity
Use the Enterprise – Group Paging Targets Capacity page to view the maximum targets
capacity that can be assigned to a paging group in your enterprise.

Figure 55 Enterprise – Group Paging Targets Capacity

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Group Paging Targets Capacity.
The Enterprise – Group Paging Targets Capacity page appears.
2) To return to the previous page, click OK.

5.4 Identity/Device Endpoints

Use the Identity/Device Endpoints menu item on the Enterprise – Resources menu page
to display identity/device endpoints defined for your enterprise.

Figure 56 Enterprise – Identity/Device Endpoints

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Identity/Device Endpoints. The

Enterprise – Identity/Device Endpoints page appears.
2) To display all the endpoints in your enterprise, click Search.
To display specific endpoints, enter your search criteria and click Search. You can
search by Line/Port User Part, Line/Port Domain, Organization ID, Organization Type,
Group ID, User ID, Last Name, First Name, Phone Number, and Extension. For more
information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web
Interface Administration Guide.
3) To exit the page, click OK.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 93 OF 350
 5.5 Identity/Device Profiles
Use the Identity/Device Profiles menu item on the Enterprise – Resources menu page to:
 List Identity/Device Profiles
 Add Identity/Device Profile
 Modify Identity/Device Profile
 Delete Identity/Device Profile

5.5.1 List Identity/Device Profiles

Use the Enterprise – Identity/Device Profiles page to display identity/device profiles
available to assign to users in all groups. On this page, you can add a new identity/device
profile or manage existing identity/device profiles.
Identity/Device Profile Type, Available Ports, and Host Name IP Address, MAC Address,
Status and Edit appear next to the device name on the list. For information and
procedures related to group assignments, see the BroadWorks Application Server Group
Web Interface Administration Guide (Parts 1 and 2). The list also displays users who are
currently assigned a shared device. Click Edit or any item on the row to display the user’s
profile information.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data on a list, list pages
allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a column to
change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify
search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous. For more
information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface
Administration Guide.

Figure 57 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profiles

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Identity/Device Profiles. The

Enterprise – Identity/Device Profiles page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 94 OF 350
 5.5.2 Add Identity/Device Profile
Use the Resources – Identity/Device Profile Add page to add a new shared access
identity/device profile.

Figure 58 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Add

Figure 59 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Add (IMS Deployments)

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Identity/Device Profiles. The

Enterprise – Identity/Device Profiles page appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Add page appears.
3) Enter information specific to the access identity/device profile. Required input boxes
are indicated with an asterisk (*).
Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Identity/Device 1 through 40 The identity/device profile name. CyberGroupIAD1

Profile Name characters.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 95 OF 350
 Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Identity/Device The drop-down box The device type. Cisco 2421-16

Profile Type lists the available Device types on the list with the same Cisco 2421-24
device types. name but different capabilities are
differentiated by following the name
with the number of available ports.

Protocol The drop-down box The communication protocol used by MGCPIETF 1.0
lists the available the device.
protocols. Not available in IMS deployments.

Host Name/ 1 through 80 The host name or IP address of the [Link].

IP Address characters with no device. Optional for some devices, com
spaces or @ such as IP phones. [Link]
characters. Not available in IMS deployments.

Port 1025 through The port number of the device. 5050

65535. Not available in IMS deployments.

Transport The drop-down box The transport protocol used. TCP

lists the available
protocols.

MAC Address 12-characters string The unique Media Access Control 21A1423f23d2
composed of letters (MAC) address of your device's
and digits. network hardware.
Not available in IMS mode.

Serial Number 1 through 80 The serial number of the device. 123AB-C-456

characters. Not available in IMS deployments.

Description 1 through 80 A brief text description of the device, Bldg. 3 Device

characters. such as an internal reference,
manufacturer name, or other internal
feature.

Outbound 1 through 80 The host name or IP address of the [Link].

Proxy Server characters with no proxy server to be used by this device. com
spaces or @ Not available in IMS deployments. [Link]
characters.

STUN Server 1 through 80 The host name or IP address of the [Link]

characters with no Simple Traversal of UDP through NAT [Link]
spaces or @ (STUN) server to be used by this [Link]
characters. device.
Not available in IMS deployments.

Physical 1 through 1024 The physical location is a text value 202 Main Street
Location characters. representing the physical location of Nowhere, FR
the user. Should contain the exact
information that must go into the P-
Access-Network-Info header of the SIP
message. The attribute can have extra
or less white space and is not case
sensitive.

4) For the Authentication information, select from the following:

− Use Identity/Device Profile Types Credentials
− Use Custom Credentials
5) If you have selected Use Custom Credentials, in the Device Access User Name text
box enter the user name for authentication, from 1 through 161 characters.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 96 OF 350
 6) In the Device Access Password text box, enter and confirm a password for
authentication, from 3 through 60 characters.
7) Save your changes. Click OK. The previous page appears.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

5.5.3 Modify Identity/Device Profile

Use the Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify page to modify a shared access
identity/device profile.
The Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify page allows you to modify a shared
identity/device profile. For information and procedures related to user profiles containing
shared devices, see the BroadWorks Application Server Group Web Interface
Administration Guide – Part 2.
The Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify page contains several tabs. The tabs
available for a selected identity/device profile depend on the type of management
supported by the device.
 Profile Tab (All Devices)
 Configure Tab (Legacy Devices)
 Users Tab (All Devices)
 Files Tab (Managed Devices)
 Custom Tags Tab (Managed Devices)
Clicking a tab different than the current tab also saves your changes.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 97 OF 350
 [Link] Profile Tab (All Devices)
Use the Profile tab on the Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify page to view and
modify profile information for an identity/device profile. This tab is available for all devices.

Figure 60 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Profile

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 98 OF 350
 Figure 61 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Profile (IMS Deployments)

The following read-only information is displayed on this page.

Text Box Name Description Example

Identity/Device The identity/device profile name. CyberGroupIAD1

Profile Name

Identity/Device The device type. ADTRAN TA604

Profile Type Device types on the list with the same name but BroadWorks
different capabilities are differentiated by following the Communicator
name with the number of available ports.

Device Type URL The URL of the device type. http:/dms/Polycom_

Soundpoint_IP_500

Lines/Ports The number of lines/ports on the device. Unlimited

Assigned Lines The number of assigned lines/ports. 2

Ports

Unassigned The number of ports still available to assign. Unlimited

Lines/Ports

Version The software version of the device. It is only displayed Grandstream

for SIP devices. BT100 [Link]

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Identity/Device Profiles. The

Enterprise – Identity/Device Profiles page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item on the row of the identity/device profile to edit. The Enterprise –
Identity/Device Profile Modify page appears showing the Profile tab by default.
3) Edit the identity/device profile information. Required information is indicated with an
asterisk. For more information about the identity/device profile information settings,
see section 5.5.2 Add Identity/Device Profile.
4) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 99 OF 350
 [Link] Configure Tab (Legacy Devices)
Use the Configure tab on the Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify page to view and
modify external configuration information for an identity/device profile. This tab is only
available for legacy devices.
From this page, you can also delete an identity/device profile.

Figure 62 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Configure (same in IMS Deployments)

1) On the Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify page, click the Configure tab.
2) To modify the external configuration, click Click To Configure.

NOTE: You can only configure the identity/device profile types that are configured for
monitoring.

3) To delete an identity/device profile, click Delete. The previous page appears.

WARNING: This action cannot be undone. Once the Delete button has been clicked, the device
is permanently deleted.

4) Save your changes. Click OK. The previous page appears.

To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 100 OF 350
 [Link] Users Tab (All Devices)
You use the Users tab on the Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify page to view and
modify the user information for an identity/device profile. This tab is available for all
devices.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data on a list, list pages
allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a column to
change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify
search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous. For more
information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface
Administration Guide.
You can search for users by Line/Port User Part (must be an exact type), Line Port
Domain (in IMS deployments, Public Identity User Part and Public Identity Domain),
Endpoint Type, User ID, Last Name, First Name, Phone Number, Extension, Department,
or Port. In XS mode, you can also search by Private Identity. The Edit link takes you to
the user/virtual subscriber profile menu.

NOTE: The Primary Line/Port and the Port columns are empty for trunk users. The Port search
criterion does not apply to trunk users.

Figure 63 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Users (AS Mode)

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 101 OF 350
 Figure 64 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Users (XS Mode)

1) On the Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify page, click the Users tab.
2) To modify the user information for an identity/device profile, click Edit or an item in the
row for the user. The Profile page appears for the user or the virtual subscriber. For
information and procedures related to user profiles containing shared devices, see the
BroadWorks Application Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide – Part 2.
3) To reorder the lines/ports, click Reorder Line/Ports on this Identity/Device Profile.
For information and procedures related to reordering lines/ports for a device, see the
BroadWorks Application Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide – Part 1.

NOTE: The Reorder Line/Ports on this Identity/Device Profile link appears only when more than
one line/port has been assigned to users and when the static line ordering option is disabled for
the device/profile type.

4) To make a user’s identity/device line/port the primary line/port, check the Primary
Line/Port box in the row for the target user.
5) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 102 OF 350
 [Link] Files Tab (Managed Devices)
Use the Files tab on the Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify page to manage
configuration files for the identity/device profile. This tab is only available for managed
devices.

Figure 65 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Files

1) On the Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify page, click the Files tab.
2) To regenerate IP phones and transmit the configuration files to the file server, click
Rebuild the files. Or click Rebuild the files (force) to regenerate IP phones and
transmit the configuration files to the file server even if the files have not changed
since the last rebuild.
3) To instruct IP phones that support a remote reset display to reload their configuration
files, click Reset the phones.
4) To test file access, click the link in the Access File column and the row for the file you
want to test. The browser imitates the operation of accessing the device file. If the
operation is successful, a new browser window opens displaying the file. Otherwise,
an error message appears.
5) To download a repository file, click the link in the Repository File column and the row
for the file you want to download, and then follow the instructions of your browser.
6) To download a template file, click the link in the Template File column and the row for
the template file you want to download, and then follow the instructions of your
browser.
7) To download an extended file capture, click the link in the Extended Capture column
and the row for the file whose extended file capture you want to download, and then
follow the instructions of your browser.
8) Click OK. OK displays the previous page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 103 OF 350
 [Link].1 Modify File for Identity/Device Profile

Use the Identity/Device Profile File Modify page to modify an existing identity/device profile
file. You can also load a new identity/device profile file.

Figure 66 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Files

1) On the Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify page, select the Files tab.
2) Click Edit on the row containing the file you would like to modify.
The Identity/Device Profile File Modify page appears.
3) To test file access, click the Access File link. The browser imitates a device access
for the file. If the operation is successful a new browser window is open displaying the
file. Otherwise, you are shown an error message.
4) To download the repository file, click the Repository File Download link, and then
follow your browser’s instructions.
5) To download the template file, click the Template File Download link, and then follow
your browser’s instructions.
6) To enable extended file capture, check the Enable Extended File Capture box.
7) To download the extended file capture, click the Extended File Capture Download
link, and then follow your browser’s instructions. This link only appears when the
Enable Extended File Capture option is enabled.
8) To assign the type of file, select from the following:
− Manual means that the Provisioning Server does not generate the file for this
device profile. It is manually generated and saved onto the file repository.
− Default specifies that the device profile does not use a custom template. Instead,
the Provisioning Server uses the corresponding file/template defined at the
device-type level to build the resulting file for the device profile.
− Custom means that the device profile has its own file/template for this file.
9) If you have assigned a custom file, click Browse to add the file to Upload
Configuration File text box. The uploaded file remains on your local computer.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 104 OF 350
 10) For IP phones, click Rebuild the files to regenerate and transmit the configuration file
to the file server.
11) For IP phones, click Rebuild the files (force) to regenerate and transmit the
configuration file to the file server even if the file has not changed since the last
rebuild.
12) For IP phones that support a remote reset display, to instruct the phone to reload its
configuration file, click Reset the phones.
13) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

[Link] Custom Tags Tab (Managed Devices)

Use the Custom Tags tab on the Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify page to
modify, add, or delete custom tags for the identity/device profile. This tab is only available
for managed devices with the use of custom tags enabled.
The Identity/Device Profile Modify Custom Tags page is a list page that allows you to
search several different ways. You can click the headings of a column to change the sort
order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search criteria,
or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous. For more information on defining
search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

Figure 67 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify – Custom Tags (same in IMS Deployments)

1) On the Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify page, click the Custom Tags tab.
2) To delete a tag, select the check box in the row of the tag and then click Apply. The
custom tag is removed from the identity/device profile.
3) To add a custom tag, click Add. The Identity/Device Profile Custom Tag Add page
appears. For information on adding a custom tag, see section [Link].1 Add Custom
Tag.
4) To modify a custom tag, click Edit in the row for the desired tag. The Identity/Device
Profile Custom Tag Modify page appears. For more information on modifying custom
tags, see section [Link].2 Modify Custom Tag.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 105 OF 350
 [Link].1 Add Custom Tag

Figure 68 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Custom Tag Add (same in IMS Deployments)

1) On the Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify page, click the Custom Tags tab.
2) Click Add. The Identity/Device Profile Custom Tag Add page appears.
3) In the Tag Name: % text box, enter the name for the tag. A tag name can be from 3
through 64 characters and cannot contain the % character (except for the beginning
and end % already provided on the web page) and cannot start with %BW (reserved
for BroadWorks tabs).
4) In the Tag Value: % text box, enter the value for the tag, (from 1 through 256
characters).
5) Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

[Link].2 Modify Custom Tag

Figure 69 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Custom Tag Modify (same in IMS Deployments)

1) On the Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify page, click the Custom Tags tab.
2) Click Edit on the row of the tag you would like to modify. The Identity/Device Profile
Custom Tag Modify page appears. The Tag Name cannot be edited.
3) Click Delete to delete this tag from the identity/device profile.
4) In the Tag Value: % text box, enter the new value for the tag (from 1 through 256
characters).

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 106 OF 350
 5) To save your changes, click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous
page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

5.5.4 Delete Identity/Device Profile

Use the Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify page to delete an identity/device profile
from the system.
To delete an identity/device profile, display the Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify
page. For information and procedures related to user profiles containing shared devices,
see the BroadWorks Application Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide – Part
2.

Figure 70 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 107 OF 350
 Figure 71 Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify (IMS Deployments)

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Identity/Device Profiles. The

Enterprise – Identity/Device Profiles page appears.
2) Click Edit on the row for the device to edit or click on any item in the row. The
Enterprise – Identity/Device Profile Modify page appears.
3) Click Delete. The Enterprise – Identity/Device Profiles page appears.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

NOTE 1: The Delete function cannot be undone. Once you click Delete, your deletion is final.
You can press Cancel before you click Delete to avoid a deletion.

NOTE 2: Devices assigned to users cannot be deleted.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 108 OF 350
 5.6 Domains
Use the Domains menu item on the Enterprise – Resources menu page to:
 List Domains
 View Groups Assigned to Domain

5.6.1 List Domains

Use the Enterprise – Domains page to display the virtual domains that are available for the
group administrators and users in your enterprise ID account. Domains are listed in
alphabetical order. A default domain is assigned automatically when a system provider
adds an enterprise ID account. The default domain is represented with a check mark on
this page. Enterprise administrators assign domains to groups. For information and
procedures related to group assignments, see section 11 Configure Group Administration,
Services, and Resources.
The Enterprise – Domains page is a list page that allows you to search several different
ways. You can click the headings of a column to change the sort order of items in the
column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search criteria, or click the page
links, for example, Next or Previous. For more information on defining search criteria,
see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

Figure 72 Enterprise – Domains

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Domains. The Enterprise –

Domains page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

5.6.2 View Groups Assigned to Domain

Use the Enterprise – Domains Modify page to list the groups assigned to a domain. The
Group Name is listed beside the Group ID.
The Enterprise – Domains Modify page allows you view the groups assigned to a domain.
From this page, you can also access the profile page for an assigned group. For
information and procedures related to group assignments, see section
11 Configure Group Administration, Services, and Resources.
1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Domains. The Enterprise –
Domains page appears.
2) Click Edit on the row for the domain to edit or click on any item in the row. The
Enterprise – Domains Modify page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 109 OF 350
 Figure 73 Enterprise – Domains Modify

3) Click Search to find all groups or use the search criteria to find a particular group.
4) To access a listed group’s profile page, click Edit in the row for the group to edit or
click on any item in the row. The Group – Profile page appears.
5) To display the previous page, select another page or click Cancel to display the
previous page.

5.7 Route Point External Systems

Use the Route Point External Systems menu item on the Enterprise – Resources menu
page to view the route point external systems assigned to your enterprise and their usage.

5.7.1 View Route Point External Systems

Use the Enterprise – Route Point External Systems page to view the route point external
systems assigned to your enterprise by your system provider administrator.
The Enterprise – Route Point External Systems page is a list page that allows you to
search several different ways. You can click the heading of a column to change the sort
order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search criteria,
and click Find or Find All to display the route point external systems that match your
criteria or all the route point external systems assigned to your enterprise. For more
information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface
Administration Guide.

Figure 74 Enterprise – Route Point External Systems

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Route Point External Systems.
The Enterprise – Route Point External Systems page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 110 OF 350
 2) To display the previous page, click OK.

5.7.2 View Route Point External System Usage

Use the Enterprise – Route Point External System Usage page to view the groups that
have been assigned the selected route point external system. From this page, you can
also access the Profile page of a listed group.

Figure 75 Enterprise – Route Point External System Usage

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Route Point External Systems.
The Enterprise – Route Point External Systems page appears displaying the route
point external systems assigned to you by your system provider administrator.
2) To view the groups assigned a route point external system, click Edit, or any other
item in the row for the target route point external system. The Enterprise – Route
Point External System Usage page for the selected route point external system
appears.
3) To display the previous page, click OK.

5.8 Network Classes of Service

Use the Network Classes of Service menu item on the Enterprise – Resources menu
page to display the network classes of service assigned to your enterprise.

5.8.1 List Network Classes of Service

Use the Enterprise – Network Classes of Service page to display the network classes of
service assigned to your enterprise by your system provider administrator.
The Enterprise – Network Classes of Service page is a list page that allows you to search
several different ways. You can click the headings of a column to change the sort order of
items in the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search criteria, or click
the page links, for example, Next or Previous. For more information on defining search
criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 111 OF 350
 Figure 76 Enterprise – Network Classes of Service

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Network Classes of Service. The
Enterprise – Network Classes of Service page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK.

5.8.2 View Groups Assigned to Network Class of Service

Use the Enterprise – Network Class of Service page to view the groups assigned to a
network class of service. From this page, you can also access the profile page of an
assigned group.
For information and procedures related to group assignments, see section 11 Configure
Group Administration, Services, and Resources.

Figure 77 Enterprise – Network Class of Service

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Network Classes of Service. The
Enterprise – Network Classes of Service page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the Network Class of Service you want to view.
The Network Class of Service page appears.
3) To access a group’s profile, click Edit or any item in the row for the group. The Group
– Profile page appears.
4) To display the previous page, click OK.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 112 OF 350
 5.9 Numbers
Use the Numbers menu item on the Enterprise – Resources menu page to display phone
numbers.

5.9.1 Display Numbers

Use the Enterprise – Numbers page to display the phone numbers and number ranges
assigned to your enterprise ID account by your system provider administrator.
The Enterprise – Numbers page displays the Group IDs next to the phone number in the
list. The Enterprise – Numbers page is a list page that allows you to search several
different ways. You can click the headings of a column to change the sort order of items in
the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search criteria, or click the page
links, for example, Next or Previous. For more information on defining search criteria,
see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

Figure 78 Enterprise – Numbers

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Numbers. The Enterprise –

Numbers page appears.
2) To search for specific phone numbers, enter your search criteria and click Find. If a
number that satisfies the search criteria is part of a range of numbers, the range is
returned.
3) To display the previous page, click OK.

5.10 Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges

Use the Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges menu item on the Enterprise – Resources
menu page to view enterprise trunk number ranges assigned to your enterprise.
Depending on the system configuration, number ranges can be automatically activated
when they are assigned to your enterprise and always stay activated, or they can be
initially deactivated and need to be activated before they are used. You activate
enterprise trunk number ranges on the Enterprise – Activate Enterprise Trunk Number
Ranges web page. For instructions on activating enterprise trunk number ranges, see
section 5.19 Activate Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges.

5.10.1 Display Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges

Use the Enterprise – Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges page to display the enterprise
trunk number ranges assigned to your enterprise by your system provider administrator.
If a number range is assigned, the page displays the assignment details next to the
number range on the list. A check in the Activated column means that the range is
activated.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 113 OF 350
 The Enterprise – Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges page is a list page that allows you to
search several different ways. You can click the headings of a column to change the sort
order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search criteria,
or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous. For more information on defining
search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

Figure 79 Enterprise – Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Enterprise Trunk Number

Ranges. The Enterprise – Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges page appears.
2) To search for specific number ranges, enter your search criteria and then click Find.
3) To display the previous page, click OK.

5.11 Office Zones

Use the Enterprise – Office Zones page to view the office zones assigned to your
enterprise and their usage.

5.11.1 List Office Zones

Use the Enterprise – Office Zones page to view the office zones assigned to your
enterprise by your system provider administrator.
The page displays the name and description of each office zone and shows which zone is
the default zone for your enterprise.
The Enterprise – Office Zones page is a list page that allows you to search several
different ways. You can click the headings of a column to change the sort order of items in
the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search criteria, or click the page
links, for example, Next or Previous. For more information on defining search criteria,
see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

Figure 80 Enterprise – Office Zones

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 114 OF 350
 1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Office Zones. The Enterprise –
Office Zones page appears.
2) To return to the previous page, click OK again or click Cancel.

5.11.2 View Office Zone Usage

Use the Enterprise – Office Zone page to view the groups assigned an office zone.

Figure 81 Enterprise – Office Zone Usage

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Office Zones. The Enterprise –
Office Zones page appears.
2) To view the groups that have been assigned the office zone, click Edit in the row for
the office zone whose assignment you want to view. The Enterprise – Office Zone
page appears displaying the groups assigned the office zone.
3) To display the previous page, click OK.

5.12 Services
Use the Services menu item on the Enterprise – Resources menu page to display
services.

5.12.1 Display Services

Use the Enterprise – Services page to display the services authorized to your enterprise
ID by your system provider administrator.
The Enterprise – Services page displays a description of the service, user limits, and the
number of users that have been allocated the service. As an enterprise administrator, you
can assign these services to your groups.
Note that the following figure shows only the top part of the page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 115 OF 350
 Figure 82 Enterprise – Services (Top of Page)

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Services. The Enterprise –

Services page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK.

5.13 Service Packs

Use the Service Packs menu item on the Enterprise – Resources menu page to:
 Display Service Packs
 Add Service Packs
 Modify Service Packs
 Delete Service Packs

5.13.1 Display Service Packs

Use the Enterprise – Service Packs page to display the service packs that are available to
authorize and assign to groups. From this page, you can add a service pack or select a
service packs to be modified or deleted.
The Enterprise – Service Packs page is a list page that allows you to search several
different ways. You can click the headings of a column to change the sort order of items in
the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search criteria, or click the page
links (for example, Next or Previous). For more information on defining search criteria,
see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 116 OF 350
 Figure 83 Enterprise – Service Packs

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Service Packs. The Enterprise –
Service Packs page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

5.13.2 Add Service Packs

Use the Enterprise – Service Packs Add page to add a new service pack to authorize to
groups.

Figure 84 Enterprise – Service Packs Add

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Service Packs. The Enterprise –
Service Packs page appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise – Service Packs Add page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 117 OF 350
 3) Type a name for the new service pack (from 1 through 80 characters). This
information is mandatory.
4) Type a description for the service pack.
5) Check the Available For Use box to make the service pack available for authorization
for all groups. Leave the check box empty to limit authorization to groups that already
have this service pack.
6) Click Unlimited quantity to assign an unlimited number of users to this service pack.
Click Limited To and type the number of users to provision to this service pack if you
want to control their use. The number can be from 1 through 999999.
7) Assign Services:
− To assign all services, click Add All >>.
− To assign selected services, in the Available Services column, select the services
to add to the service pack and click Add >.
To select several services listed in consecutive order, click the first service name
you want and, while holding down the SHIFT key on the keyboard, click the last
service name you want to select. To select more than one service, but not in a
particular order, use your mouse to click the service names while holding down
the CTRL key on the keyboard.
− As you add services to the service pack, you see the authorization statistics
appear at the bottom of the page. Authorized indicates the service that is
authorized from your system provider. Allocated indicates the number of
instances of the service that have already been provisioned. Available indicates
the number of instances of that service that are still available.
8) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 118 OF 350
 5.13.3 Modify Service Packs
Use the Enterprise – Service Packs Modify page to modify a service pack.
The Enterprise – Service Packs Modify page allows you to modify a service pack. Note
you cannot add or remove services from an existing service pack. Instead, delete the
service pack and add a new service pack.

Figure 85 Enterprise – Service Packs Modify

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Service Packs. The Enterprise –
Service Packs Modify page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the service pack to edit. The Enterprise – Service
Packs Modify page appears.
3) Edit the service pack information. Highlight and then type over the text that you want
to edit in the Name or Description boxes. You can also modify the Available For Use
and Quantity values.
4) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel.

5.13.4 Delete Service Packs

Use the Enterprise – Service Packs Modify page to delete a service pack.
1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Service Packs. The Enterprise –
Service Packs Modify page appears (see section 5.13.3 Modify Service Packs for an
example of this page).
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the service pack to edit. The Enterprise – Service
Packs Modify page appears.
3) Click Delete. The Enterprise – Service Packs page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 119 OF 350
 To exit the page without deleting the service pack, click Cancel.

WARNING: The Delete function cannot be undone. Once you click Delete, your deletion is
final. Press Cancel before you click Delete to avoid a deletion.

5.14 Service Pack Usage

Use the Service Pack Usage menu item on the Enterprise – Resources menu page to
display information on your service pack usage.

5.14.1 Display Service Pack Usage

Use the Enterprise – Service Pack Usage page to display how groups use service packs.
The Enterprise – Service Pack Usage page allows you to see how groups use the service
packs. For each group in your enterprise, the Total Packs and Assigned statistics appear.

Figure 86 Enterprise – Service Pack Usage

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Service Pack Usage. The
Enterprise – Service Pack Usage page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK.

5.15 Session Admission Control Capacity

The Session Admission Control feature provides a mechanism to control the number of
simultaneous sessions at the subscriber and logical link level for a group. The logical link
capacity is controlled by creating sets of access devices logically grouped together, called
session admission control (SAC) groups, and imposing restrictions on the number of
concurrent sessions for a given set of devices (SAC group).
Use the Enterprise – Session Admission Control Capacity page to view the session
capacity settings assigned to your enterprise by the system administrator.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 120 OF 350
 Figure 87 Enterprise – Session Admission Control Capacity

1) On the Enterprise - Resources menu page, select Session Admission Control

Capacity. The Enterprise - Session Admission Control Capacity page appears.
2) To return to the previous page, click OK.
The following table lists the parameters displayed on this page and provides a description
for each.
Name Description

Session Admission This parameter specifies the level or control for the maximum number of
Control concurrent sessions. When Control by SAC group only is selected, no limits
are imposed on the number of concurrent subscriber sessions. When
Control aggregate sessions as well as SAC groups is selected, the maximum
allowed number of concurrent subscriber sessions for the enterprise is as
defined by the Maximum number of concurrent sessions parameter.

Maximum number of This number represents the maximum number of simultaneous subscriber
concurrent sessions sessions allowed for the enterprise. When the maximum number is reached,
creating new sessions is denied.
This parameter takes effect only if the Session Admission Control parameter
is set to Control aggregate sessions as well as SAC groups. It then has two
meanings. First, it is the upper limit for the maximum number of sessions
that can be assigned at the SAC group level; second, it also controls the total
number of sessions throughout the enterprise.

Maximum number of This number represents the maximum number of simultaneous originating
concurrent user sessions allowed for the enterprise. When the maximum number is reached,
originating sessions creating new originating sessions is denied.

Maximum number of This number represents the maximum number of simultaneous terminating
concurrent user sessions allowed for the enterprise. When the maximum number is reached,
terminating sessions creating new terminating sessions is denied.

Count intra This parameter determines whether calls within the enterprise count toward
Enterprise sessions the total number of sessions.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 121 OF 350
 5.16 System Defined Communication Barring Criteria
The Enterprise – System Defined Communication Barring Criteria page displays the list of
system-defined communication barring criteria entries assigned to your enterprise. You
can use these criteria entries, in addition to the criteria entries defined at the enterprise
level, in communication barring profiles.

Figure 88 Enterprise – System Defined Communication Barring Criteria

1) On the Enterprise - Resources menu page, click System Defined Communication

Barring Criteria. The Enterprise – System Defined Communication Barring Criteria
page appears.
2) To return to the previous page, click OK.

5.16.1 View System Defined Communication Barring Criteria Usage

Use the Enterprise – System Defined Communication Barring Incoming Criteria Usage
page to view the communication barring profiles using a selected system-defined
communication barring criteria entry assigned to your enterprise.

Figure 89 Enterprise – System Defined Communication Barring Criteria Usage

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click System Defined Communication

Barring Criteria. The Enterprise – System Defined Communication Barring Criteria
page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 122 OF 350
 2) To view a criteria entry usage, click the Edit link in the row of the criteria entry. The
Enterprise – System Defined Communication Barring Criteria Usage page for the
selected criteria entry appears listing communication barring profiles using the entry.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
3) To return to the previous page, click OK.

5.17 System Defined Communication Barring Incoming Criteria

Use this item on the Enterprise – Resources menu page to view the system-defined
communication barring incoming criteria entries assigned to your enterprise and how they
are used.
You can use these incoming criteria entries, in addition to the digit pattern criteria entries
defined for your enterprise, in communication barring profiles to define barring rules for
incoming calls.

5.17.1 View System-Defined Communication Barring Incoming Criteria

The Enterprise – System Defined Communication Barring Incoming Criteria page displays
the list of system-defined communication barring incoming criteria entries assigned to your
enterprise.

Figure 90 Enterprise – System Defined Communication Barring Criteria

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click System Defined Communication

Barring Incoming Criteria. The Enterprise – System Defined Communication
Barring Incoming Criteria page appears.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
2) To return to the previous page, click OK.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 123 OF 350
 5.17.2 View System-Defined Communication Barring Incoming Criteria Usage
Use the Enterprise – System Defined Communication Barring Incoming Criteria Usage
page to view the communication barring profiles using a selected system-defined
communication barring criteria entry assigned to your enterprise.

Figure 91 Enterprise – System Defined Communication Barring Incoming Criteria Usage

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click System Defined Communication

Barring Incoming Criteria. The Enterprise – System Defined Communication
Barring Incoming Criteria page appears.
2) Click the Edit link in the row of the criteria entry to view. The Enterprise – System
Defined Communication Barring Incoming Criteria Usage page for the selected criteria
entry appears listing communication barring profiles using the entry.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
3) To return to the previous page, click OK.

5.18 Trunking Call Capacity

The Enterprise – Trunking Call Capacity page displays the number of business trunking
license units and the bursting maximum number of trunking simultaneous calls allocated to
your enterprise.
The number of business trunking license units allocated to your enterprise determines the
maximum number of simultaneous trunking calls your enterprise can have over all its trunk
groups. One trunk call uses one license unit. When a call is released, the license unit is
freed and becomes available for another call.
The number of allocated license units also limits the call capacity of any trunk group in
your enterprise.

NOTE: The total capacity of trunk groups in your enterprise can exceed the number of business
trunking license units allocated to your enterprise, but the number of simultaneous active calls
over all trunk groups cannot exceed this limit.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 124 OF 350
 Figure 92 Enterprise – Trunking Call Capacity

1) On the Enterprise - Resources menu page, select Trunking Call Capacity. The
Enterprise – Trunking Call Capacity page appears.
2) To return to the previous page, click OK.

5.19 Activate Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges

Use the Enterprise – Activate Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges page to activate
enterprise trunk number ranges.
This page and the Activate Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges link on the Enterprise –
Resources menu page only appear when the Route List service is authorized to the
enterprise and enterprise trunk number ranges activation is enabled by the system
administrator. Otherwise, enterprise trunk number ranges are always activated.

Figure 93 Enterprise – Activate Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Activate Enterprise Trunk

Number Ranges. The Enterprise – Activate Enterprise Trunk Number Ranges page
appears.
2) Select the number ranges to activate in the Deactivated Number Range column and
then click Add >. Or, to activate all ranges, click Activate All >>. The ranges appear
in the Activated Number Range column.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 125 OF 350
 You can select some or all of the items in a column. Items are listed in numerical
order. To select several items in sequential order, click the first item, hold down the
SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last item. To select several items, but not in
a particular order, click the items while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard.
3) To remove some number ranges from the Activated Number Range column, select
the ranges and click Remove <.
To remove all ranges, click Remove All <<.
4) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

5.20 IMRNs
You use the IMRNs item on the Enterprise – Resources menu page to manage the IP
Multimedia Routing Number (IMRN) pool for your enterprise. You assign numbers to the
IMRN pool from the unassigned numbers in your enterprise’s phone numbers. Once a
number is assigned to the IMRN pool it is removed from your enterprise’s pool of numbers
and cannot be assigned to a group.

5.20.1 View IMRNs

You use the Enterprise – IMRNs page to view the numbers in tour enterprise’s IMRN pool.

Figure 94 Enterprise – IMRNs

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click IMRNs. The Enterprise – IMRNs
page appears.
2) To display specific numbers, enter your search criteria and click Find.
3) Click OK to return to the previous page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 126 OF 350
 5.20.2 Assign IMRNs
You use the Enterprise – Assign IMRNs page to assign phone numbers to your
enterprise's IMRN pool. The available numbers are the unassigned numbers in your
enterprise’s pool of phone numbers.

Figure 95 Enterprise – Assign IMRNs

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click IMRNs. The Enterprise – IMRNs
page appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise – Assign IMRNs page appears.
3) Select the ranges that you want to assign numbers in the Available Range(s) column
and then click Add. The numbers appear in the Available IMRNs column.
You can select some or all of the items in a column. Items are listed in numerical
order. To select several items in sequential order, click the first item, hold down the
SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last item. To select several items, but not in
a particular order, click the items while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard.
4) Select the number or numbers to assign in the Available IMRNs column and click
Add.
Or to assign all the available numbers, click Add All.
Assigned phone numbers appear in the Assign column.
5) To remove some numbers from the Assign column, select the numbers and click
Remove.
Or to remove all numbers, click Remove All.
6) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 127 OF 350
 5.20.3 Unassign IMRNs
You use the Enterprise – IMRNs page to unassign a range of numbers from your
enterprise’s IMRN pool.
You use the Enterprise – Unassign IMRNs page to unassign some numbers from a range
of numbers in your enterprise’s IMRN pool.

Figure 96 Enterprise – IMRNs (Unassign IMRN Range)

Figure 97 Enterprise – Unassign IMRNs

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click IMRNs. The Enterprise – IMRNs
page appears.
To unassign a range of numbers:
2) Check the Delete box in the rows for the numbers or number ranges to unassign and
click Apply.
To unassign some numbers in a range:
3) Click Edit in the row for the range. The Enterprise – Unassign IMRNs page appears.
4) In the Assigned IMRNs column, select to numbers to unassign and click Remove.
The numbers are moved to the Unassigned IMRNs column.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 128 OF 350
 Or to move all numbers to the Unassigned IMRNs column, click Remove All.
5) Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

5.21 Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers

Use the Enterprise – Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers page to view the Mobile
Subscriber Directory Numbers assigned to your enterprise and how they are assigned to
users.

Figure 98 Enterprise – Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers

1) On the Enterprise – Resources menu page, click Mobile Subscriber Directory

Numbers. The Enterprise – Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers page appears.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search in several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
2) Click OK to return to the previous page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 129 OF 350
 6 Services Menu

The Enterprise – Services menu page includes menu items that relate to all services
within your enterprise ID. This section includes procedures for Services menu items that
can be performed only by the enterprise.

NOTE: The pages under the Services heading allow you to display and modify information
related to the services for your enterprise ID account. To add or modify information for a specific
group, see section 11 Configure Group Administration, Services, and Resources.

Links to the following menu pages from the Services menu are included in this section:
 BroadWorks Communicator
 External Custom Ringback
 Enhanced Call Logs
 In-Call Service Activation
 Pre-alerting Announcement
 Voice Messaging
 Voice Portal
 Advice Of Charge
 Enterprise Trunk
 MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint
 Number Portability Query
 Session Admission Control Group
 Session Admission Control White List
 BroadWorks Mobility
 Zone Calling Restrictions

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 130 OF 350
 6.1 Access Services Menu
On your Home page, in the Options list, click Services to access the Enterprise –
Services menu page.

Figure 99 Enterprise – Services Menu (Top of Page)

6.2 BroadWorks Communicator

Use the BroadWorks Communicator menu item on the Enterprise – Services menu page
to configure the BroadWorks Communicator settings.

6.2.1 Configure BroadWorks Communicator

Use the Enterprise – BroadWorks Communicator page to set the URL of the BroadWorks
Communicator configuration server.

Figure 100 Enterprise – BroadWorks Communicator

Use this procedure to configure the BroadWorks Communicator settings:

1) To set the configuration server URL, in the Configuration Server URL text box enter
the URL (maximum of 256 characters).
2) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 131 OF 350
 6.3 External Custom Ringback
Use the External Custom Ringback menu item on the Enterprise – Services menu page to
configure the External Custom Ringback service. This service allows you to specify an
external ringback server that substitutes a BroadWorks Media Server and supplies the
media to be returned to the caller.

6.3.1 Configure External Custom Ringback Settings

Use the Enterprise – External Custom Ringback page to configure the External Custom
Ringback settings.

Figure 101 Enterprise – External Custom Ringback

Use this procedure to configure the External Custom Ringback service:

1) To define the prefix digits, in the Prefix Digits text box enter the prefix digits. This is a
numeric value (from 1 through 30 digits), for example, 999.
2) To define the Internet address for the server, in the Server Net Address text box, enter
the address. This is a valid Internet address, for example, [Link]. An
IP address or domain name must be from 1 through 80 characters in length and
cannot contain a space or an @ character.
3) To define the server port, in the Server Port text box, enter the port. This is an integer
value from 1 through 65535, for example, 5050.
4) To select the number of seconds to wait for the response before a timeout occurs,
from the Timeout in Seconds drop-down list, select the number of seconds. You can
select a number from 1 through 20. The default value is “15”.
5) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

6.4 Enhanced Call Logs

Use the Enhanced Call Logs menu item on the Enterprise – Services menu page to view
the configuration set by your system provider administrator for the Enhanced Call Logs
service.

NOTE: This menu item is not present when the Enhanced Call Logs Repository is used to store
call logs.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 132 OF 350
 6.4.1 View Enhanced Call Logs Settings
Use the Enterprise – Enhanced Call Logs page to view the configuration set by your
system provider administrator for the Enhanced Call Logs service for your enterprise.

Figure 102 Enterprise – Enhanced Call Logs

1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Enhanced Call Logs. The Enterprise
– Enhanced Call Logs page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK.

6.5 In-Call Service Activation

Use the Enterprise – In-Call Service Activation page to configure the dual-tone multi-
frequency (DTMF) digits used to activate in-call services.
In-Call Service Activation is a user service used with the Two-Stage Dialing service to:
 Allow users hosted on a time-division multiplexing (TDM) system to activate mid-call
flash services with flash activation DTMF digits. This option is applicable only to non-
intelligent (BroadWorks-controlled) devices.
 Allow users to explicitly transfer calls with consultation using call transfer activation
DTMF digits. This option is applicable only to intelligent devices.

6.5.1 Configure In-Call Service Activation Settings

Use the Enterprise – In-Call Service Activation page to configure DTMF digits used to
activate in-call services.

Figure 103 Enterprise – In-Call Service Activation

1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click In-Call Service Activation. The
Enterprise – In-Call Service Activation page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 133 OF 350
 2) In the * Flash Activation DTMF Digits text box, enter the string of digits used to
activate mid-call services using flash hook. The string can have a maximum of eight
characters, including the special characters “*” and “#”. The default value is “##”.
3) In the * Call Transfer Activation DTMF Digits text box, enter the string of digits used to
activate explicit call transfer services. The string can have a maximum of eight
characters, including the special characters “*” and “#”. The default value is “*1”.
4) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

6.6 Pre-alerting Announcement

The Pre-alerting Announcement service allows users to play an announcement to callers
before ringing their phone.
Use the Pre-alerting Announcement menu item on the Enterprise – Services menu page
to configure the pre-alerting announcement settings for the enterprise. These settings can
be overridden at the group and user levels.

6.6.1 Configure Pre-alerting Announcement Settings

Use the Enterprise – Pre-alerting Announcement page to configure the pre-alerting
announcement settings for your enterprise.

Figure 104 Enterprise – Pre-alerting Announcement

1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Pre-alerting Announcement. The

Enterprise – Pre-alerting Announcement page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 134 OF 350
 2) Specify whether and how the caller is allowed to interrupt the announcement. Select
from the following:
− Do not allow
− Interrupt with any digit
− Interrupt with digit sequence, and specify the sequence. The sequence can be
from 1 through 10 characters in length and can contain only digits and the # and *
characters.
3) Select the audio and video announcement to be played to callers. For the Audio
Announcement or Video Announcement settings, select from the following:
− None
− URL, and provide the URL address of the server where the announcement file is
stored. The URL should be in the following format: http/[Link]
name>[<:port>][path], for example, [Link]
− Custom, and click Browse to find and upload a custom announcement file
4) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and returns
to the previous page.
To cancel your changes and return to the previous page, click Cancel.

6.7 Voice Portal

Use the Voice Portal menu item on the Enterprise – Services menu page to view and
configure the scope of the voice portal.

6.7.1 View and Configure Voice Portal Scope

Use the Enterprise – Voice Portal page to view and configure the scope of the voice
portal.

Figure 105 Enterprise – Voice Portal

1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Voice Portal. The Enterprise – Voice
Portal page appears.
2) If your system provider administrator has configured the voice portal to use a system-
level scope, you will not be able to modify any settings on this page. Click OK to
return to the previous page.
If your enterprise administrator has delegated the choice of voice portal scope to you,
select either “Enterprise” or “Group”. Choosing the “Enterprise” scope allows the
voice portal of any group within your organization to redirect users to the voice portal
of any other group within your organization. Choosing the “Group” scope keeps the
voice portals of your groups completely separate.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 135 OF 350
 3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
4) To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

6.8 Voice Messaging

Use the Voice Messaging menu item on the Enterprise – Services menu page to view and
configure the voice messaging settings for the enterprise.

6.8.1 Configure Voice Messaging Settings

Use the Enterprise – Voice Messaging page to view and configure the Voice Messaging
service.

Figure 106 Enterprise – Voice Messaging

1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Voice Messaging. The Enterprise –
Voice Messaging page appears.
2) For Voice Message Delivery, select Use System Default From E-mail Address to use
the default e-mail address, or to define your own e-mail address, select Default From
E-mail Address and enter the new e-mail address in the text box.
The e-mail address must be from 3 through 80 characters in user@domain format. It
can contain only one @ sign and the following characters: letters, digits, !, #, $, %, &,
*, +, -, /, =, _, {, }, |, ~, `, ., ?, ^, or single quotes.
3) For Voice Message Notification, select Use System Default From E-mail Address to
use the default e-mail address, or to define your own e-mail address, select Default
From E-mail Address and enter the new e-mail address in the text box.
4) For Voice Portal Passcode Lockout, select Use System Default From E-mail Address
to use the default e-mail address, or to define your own e-mail address, select Default
From E-mail Address and enter the new e-mail address in the text box.
5) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 136 OF 350
 6.9 Advice Of Charge
You use the Enterprise – Advice Of Charge page to view the Advice Of Charge service
settings for your enterprise. This is a read-only page.

Figure 107 Enterprise – Advice Of Charge

1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Advice of Charge. The Enterprise –
Advice of Charge page appears.
If Use System Settings is selected, the system-level configuration applies to your
enterprise. If Use Service Provider Settings is selected, the configuration displayed
on this page is in effect for the Advice Of Charge service in your enterprise.
Delay between AoC-D notifications specifies the time in seconds between two
consecutive charge notifications sent to the user's device during a call.
2) Click OK to return to the previous page.

6.10 Enterprise Trunk

An enterprise trunk combines multiple trunk groups and allows the trunk groups to work
together to provide enhanced business trunking capabilities for your enterprise. You can
assign subscribers to an enterprise trunk, rather than to a single trunk group. These
enterprise trunk subscribers can originate and terminate calls through any of the trunk
groups assigned to the enterprise trunk. Thus, an enterprise trunk provides routing
flexibility and redundancy that is not possible with a single trunk group.
A key feature of the Enterprise Trunk service is the ability to originate or terminate calls via
multiple physical paths. With multiple physical paths possible, an enterprise trunk can
provide redundancy, load balancing, far-end hop-off, and more.
The Enterprise – Enterprise Trunk page allows you to create enterprise trunks for your
enterprise. This capability is linked to the Trunk Group feature and is made available
when Trunk Group feature is assigned to the enterprise.
Use the Enterprise – Enterprise Trunk page to view and configure enterprise trunks for
your enterprise. You access this page by selecting the Enterprise Trunk menu item on the
Enterprise – Services menu page. The item is present only if the Trunk Group service is
authorized for the enterprise.
There are two types of enterprise trunks: Weighted Routing and Ordered Routing and you
can create Ordered Routing enterprise trunks consisting of up to 10 trunk groups and
Weighted Routing enterprise trunks consisting of up to 100 trunk groups.
BroadWorks supports five different call routing policies:

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 137 OF 350
 Ordered Load Balancing: The trunk groups are ordered and the Application Server
selects each trunk group in turn following a round-robin algorithm.
Overflow: The trunk groups are ordered and the Application Server selects the first trunk
group that has the capacity available for a new terminating call. For example, the
Application Server does not choose the second trunk group until the first trunk group has
reached its capacity or is unreachable. The first trunk group on the list is always selected
unless it is not available to route the call.
Most Idle: The Application Server always selects the trunk group that has the fewest
number of active originating or terminating calls and has the capacity available for a new
terminating call.
Least Idle: The Application Server always selects the trunk group that has the highest
number of ongoing originating or terminating calls and has the available capacity for a new
terminating call.
Weighted Overflow: Each trunk group is provisioned with a priority and a weight.
Starting with the trunk groups that have the highest priority (the lowest numerical value),
the Application Server selects a trunk group at that priority according to a weighted
random pick. A trunk group that has reached its capacity may not be selected. If all trunk
groups at a particular priority have reached their capacity, then the Application Server
applies the weights to randomly select a trunk group at the next lower priority.

6.10.1 View Enterprise Trunks

Use the Enterprise – Enterprise Trunk page to view the enterprise trunks for your
enterprise. The page lists all the existing enterprise trunks in the enterprise.
1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Enterprise Trunk. The Enterprise –
Enterprise Trunk page appears.
2) Click OK, to return to the previous page.

Figure 108 Enterprise – Enterprise Trunk

6.10.2 Add Enterprise Trunk

Before an Enterprise Trunk can be used for routing, you need to complete the following
steps:
 Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing or Add Enterprise Trunk using Ordered
Routing
 Configure Capacity Management and Assign Trunk Groups
 Assign Priorities (this step applies only to Weighted Routing trunks and is optional)
 Add Users
The procedure you use to add an enterprise trunk depends on the routing you want your
enterprise trunk to use:

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 138 OF 350
  To add an enterprise trunk that uses the Weighted Overflow routing policy, use Add
Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing
 To add an enterprise trunk that uses any other routing policy, use Add Enterprise
Trunk using Ordered Routing

[Link] Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing

Use the Enterprise – Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing page to add a new
Weighted Routing enterprise trunk.

Figure 109 Enterprise – Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing

1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Enterprise Trunk. The Enterprise –
Enterprise Trunk page appears.
2) Click Add by Weighted Routing. The Enterprise - Add Enterprise Trunk using
Weighted Routing page appears.
The page has four tabs: Assign Trunk Groups, Assign Priorities, Add Users, and
Assigned Users. By default, the Assign Trunk Groups tab is displayed.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 139 OF 350
 NOTE: When you select another tab on this page, the current enterprise trunk information is
saved.

3) Type the name (from 1 through 30 characters) for the new enterprise trunk. This
information is mandatory.
4) From the drop-down list, select the maximum number of reroute attempts the system
will use when all routes within the enterprise trunk are exhausted.
5) From the drop-down list, select the maximum number of reroute attempts within a
priority.
6) For the Route Exhaustion Action option, either
− Check None
- or -
− Check Forward to Phone Number / SIP-URI and type the phone number or SIP
URI where you want the calls to be rerouted in case of route exhaustion.
A phone number must be from 2 through 30 digits (2 through 22 digits plus the
leading + sign in E.164 number format). Additional spaces and dashes are
allowed but are not included in the number.
A SIP URI must be a maximum of 161 characters in user@domain format. The
user part can only contain a leading + sign, letters, digits and the following
characters: -, _, !, ~, *, (,), periods, or single quotes. The domain part can be
either a domain name or an IP address, optionally followed by a colon and a port
number. A domain name can only contain letters, digits, periods, and dashes.
7) To save your changes, click OK.
To save your changes and go to another tab, click the tab you want.
To exit without saving, click Cancel.

[Link] Add Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing

Use the Enterprise – Add Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing page to add a new
Ordered Routing enterprise trunk.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 140 OF 350
 Figure 110 Enterprise – Add Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing

1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Enterprise Trunk. The Enterprise –
Enterprise Trunk page appears.
2) Click Add by Ordered Routing. The Enterprise - Add Enterprise Trunk using
Ordered Routing page appears.
The page has three tabs: Assign Trunk Groups, Add Users, and Assigned Users.
The Assign Trunk Groups tab is displayed by default.

NOTE: Whenever you select another tab on this page, the current enterprise trunk information is
saved.

3) Type a name (from 1 through 30 characters) for the new enterprise trunk. This
information is mandatory.
4) From the drop-down list, select the maximum number of reroute attempts the system
will use when all routes within the enterprise trunk are exhausted.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 141 OF 350
 5) Select the routing algorithm by checking one of the following: Ordered Load
Balancing, Overflow, Most Idle, or Least Idle.
6) For the Route Exhaustion Action option, either
− Check None
- or -
− Check Forward to Phone Number/SIP-URI and type the phone number or SIP
URI where you want to reroute the calls in case of route exhaustion.
A phone number must be from 2 through 30 digits (2 through 22 digits plus the
leading + sign in E.164 number format). Additional spaces and dashes are
allowed but are not included in the number.
A SIP URI must be a maximum of 161 characters in user@domain format. The
user part can only contain a leading + sign, letters, digits and the following
characters: -, _, !, ~, *, (,), periods, or single quotes. The domain part can be
either a domain name or an IP address, optionally followed by a colon and a port
number. A domain name can only contain letters, digits, periods, and dashes.
7) To save your changes, click OK.
To save your changes and go to another tab, click the tab you want.
To exit without saving, click Cancel.

[Link] Configure Capacity Management and Assign Trunk Groups

Use the Assign Trunk Groups tab on the Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing,
Add Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing, Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted
Routing, or Modify Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing page to configure enterprise
trunk capacity management settings and assign a trunk group to an enterprise trunk.
1) On the Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing, Add Enterprise Trunk using
Ordered Routing, Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing, or Modify
Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing page, click the Assign Trunk Groups tab.
2) Configure capacity management.
− To enable capacity management, select On. To disable it, select Off.
− In the Maximum Active Calls Allowed box, specify the capacity of the enterprise
trunk, that is, the maximum number of calls allowed at any one time. Note that
the number cannot exceed the number of Business Trunking License Units
(BTLUs) allocated for the enterprise.
− In the Capacity Exceeded Alarm Initial Value box, enter the number of calls for
the capacity exceeded initial value. When the capacity exceeded counter (the
counter that tracks the number of times a call exceeds the allowed capacity)
reaches this value, an alarm is generated. Note that an alarm is never generated
when the initial value is set to “0”.
− In the Capacity Exceeded Alarm Offset Value, enter the number of calls for the
capacity exceeded offset value. After the initial capacity exceeded count has
been reached, an alarm is generated every time the count reaches an exact
multiple of the offset value. Note that an alarm is never generated if the offset
value is set to “0”.
Example: If Capacity Exceeded Alarm Initial Value is set to “2” and Capacity
Exceeded Alarm Offset Value is set to “3”, an alarm is generated the when the
capacity exceeded count reaches 2, 5, 8, 11, and so on.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 142 OF 350
 3) Enter trunk group search criteria and then click Search to display trunk groups that
satisfy your criteria, or just click Search to display all available trunk groups.
4) In the Available Trunk Groups column, select the trunk groups that you want to add to
the enterprise trunk. Trunk groups are listed in alphabetical order.
To select several trunk groups listed in consecutive order, click the name of the first
trunk group you want and, while holding down the SHIFT key, then click the name of
the last trunk group you want to select.
To select more than one non-consecutive trunk group, use your mouse to click the
trunk group names while holding down the CTRL key.
5) Click Add > to transfer selected trunk groups to the Assigned Trunk Groups column.
Or, to move all trunk groups, click Add All >>.
6) To save your changes, click OK.
To save your changes and go to another tab, select the tab you want.
To exit without saving, click Cancel.

NOTE: You can assign a maximum of 10 trunk groups to an Ordered Routing enterprise trunk
and a maximum of 100 trunk groups to a Weighted Routing enterprise trunk.

[Link] Assign Priorities

Use the Enterprise Trunk – Assign Trunk Group Priorities page to assign priorities and
weights to trunk groups in an enterprise trunk. The trunk groups shown in this tab are
those assigned to the enterprise trunk using the Assign Trunk Groups tab.

Figure 111 Enterprise Trunk – Assign Trunk Group Priorities

1) On the Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing or Modify Enterprise Trunk
using Weighted Routing page, click the Assign Priorities tab. The Assign Trunk
Group Priorities page appears.
2) Next to each trunk group to which you want to assign a priority, select the priority you
want from the Priority drop-down list. “1” denotes the highest priority and “10” (default)
the lowest. Enter the weight you want to assign to this trunk group. The weight must
be an integer from 1 through 65536. The higher the weight, the higher the probability
of that trunk group being selected for call termination within its priority when using the
Weighted Overflow routing policy.
3) To save your changes, click Apply.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 143 OF 350
 To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
To save your changes and go to another tab, select the tab you want.
To exit without saving, click Cancel.

NOTE: Assigning priorities to trunk groups is optional. By default, all trunk groups have the
same priority and weight.

[Link] Add Users

Use the Enterprise Trunk – Assign Users page to assign users to an enterprise trunk. The
Available Users column is a searchable list that lists all trunk users in your enterprise that
are not assigned to any enterprise trunk. The Users to be Assigned column shows the
users that are to be assigned.

Figure 112 Enterprise Trunk – Assign Users

1) On the Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing, Add Enterprise Trunk using
Ordered Routing, Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing, or Modify
Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing page, click the Add Users tab. The Assign
Users page appears.
2) Use the Search tool to display available users in the Available Users column.
3) In the Available Users column, select the users to add to the enterprise trunk. Select
some or all of the users. Users are listed in alphabetical order.
To select several users listed in consecutive order, click the name of the first user you
want to add and, while holding down the SHIFT key, click the name of the last user
you want to add.
To select more than one non-consecutive user, use your mouse to click the user
names while holding down the CTRL key.
4) Click Add > to transfer selected users to the Users to be Assigned column. Or, to
move all users, click Add All >>.
5) To save your changes, click Apply.
To save your changes and go to another tab, click the tab you want.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 144 OF 350
 To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
To exit without saving, click Cancel.

6.10.3 View, Modify, or Delete Users

Use the Enterprise Trunk – Assigned Users page to view, modify, or delete users
assigned to a given enterprise trunk.

Figure 113 Enterprise Trunk – Assigned Users

[Link] View Assigned Users

1) On the On the Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing, Add Enterprise Trunk
using Ordered Routing, Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing, or Modify
Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing page, click the Assigned Users tab. The
Assigned Users page appears.
Users can be searched based on Group ID, User ID, Last Name, First Name, Phone
Number, Extension, Department, Alternate Trunk Identity (Alternate Trunk Identity –
User Part and Alternate Trunk Identity Domain in IMS deployments), and Route List
Assigned.
2) Enter the search criteria you want. The list of users satisfying your criteria is
displayed.
3) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

[Link] Access User Information

1) On the On the Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing, Add Enterprise Trunk
using Ordered Routing, Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing, or Modify
Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing page, click the Assigned Users tab. The
Assigned Users page appears.
2) Display users using the criteria you want.
3) Click Edit in the row for the user to edit. The selected user’s User – Profile page
appears, allowing you to modify the user’s information.
For more information on the user profile settings, see the BroadWorks Application
Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide – Part 2.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 145 OF 350
 [Link].1 Delete User from Enterprise Trunk

1) On the Add Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing, Add Enterprise Trunk using
Ordered Routing, Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing, or Modify
Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing page, click the Assigned Users tab. The
Assigned Users page appears.
2) Display users using the criteria you want.
3) Select the row for the user to delete.
4) Click Delete.
To exit the page without deleting the user, click Cancel.

NOTE: The Delete function cannot be undone. Once you click Delete, your deletion is final.
Press Cancel before you click Delete to avoid a deletion.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 146 OF 350
 6.10.4 Modify Enterprise Trunk
Use the Enterprise – Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing or Enterprise –
Modify Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing to modify an enterprise trunk.

Figure 114 Enterprise – Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing

1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Enterprise Trunk. The Enterprise –
Enterprise Trunk page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the enterprise trunk to edit. Depending on the
trunk type, the Enterprise – Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing or
Enterprise – Modify Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing page appears.
3) Edit the enterprise trunk information.
For more information about the enterprise trunk attributes, see section 6.10.2 Add
Enterprise Trunk.
4) To save your changes, click Apply.
To save your changes and go to another tab, click the tab you want.
To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 147 OF 350
 To exit without saving, click Cancel.

NOTE: Selecting a different tab at any moment saves the enterprise trunk information.

Figure 115 Enterprise – Modify Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing

6.10.5 Delete Enterprise Trunk

Use the Enterprise – Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing or Enterprise –
Modify Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing page to delete an enterprise trunk.
1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Enterprise Trunk. The Enterprise –
Enterprise Trunk page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the enterprise trunk to delete. Depending on the
trunk type, the Enterprise – Modify Enterprise Trunk using Weighted Routing or
Enterprise – Modify Enterprise Trunk using Ordered Routing page appears.
3) Click Delete. The Enterprise – Enterprise Trunk page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 148 OF 350
 To exit the page without deleting the enterprise trunk, click Cancel.

NOTE: The Delete function cannot be undone. Once you click Delete, your deletion is final.
Click Cancel before you click Delete to avoid a deletion.

6.11 MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint

Use this item on the Enterprise – Services menu page to configure the MWI Delivery to
Mobile Endpoint service settings.
The service allows users to have a notification send to their mobile phone when they
receive a new voice mail, fax, or video message if their phone has the short messaging
service (SMS) or message waiting indicator (MWI) capability.
The Enterprise – MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint page allows you to create custom SMS
templates used to send additional information about the new messages to the user's
mobile phone. Such a template consists of a collection of pre-defined tags along with the
text to be included in the message. The tags are replaced at run time with the available
information.
This page lists the existing templates and allows you to enable and disable templates.
From this page you can also access pages to modify existing templates or create new
templates. You can create up to four templates per provisioned language to
accommodate different situations. The system determines which template to use based
on the number of new and existing messages.

NOTE: It is recommended that the language encoding of the administrator account you use to
configure a template for a language be compatible with the language encoding for that template.
Otherwise, the text containing characters with no matching encoding may be displayed
incorrectly.

6.11.1 View and Enable SMS Templates

Use the Enterprise – MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint page to view and enable or disable
SMS templates used to send message delivery information to the mobile.

Figure 116 Enterprise – MWI Delivery to Mobile Network

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 149 OF 350
 1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint.
The Enterprise – MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint page appears.
2) To enable or disable a template, check or uncheck the Enable box in the row of the
template.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

6.11.2 Add MWI Delivery Custom Template

Use the Enterprise – MWI Delivery Custom Template – Add page to add a new custom
template.
You can create up to four different templates per language, which are used to build the
contents of the message. The purpose of the multiple templates is to provide flexibility in
the message generated for different syntax required when communicating the existence of
single or multiple voice mail messages to the subscriber.
The possible template types are as follows:
 Single new message with no previous messages: This template is used when the
subscriber receives a single voice mail message while the mailbox is empty.
 Single new message with at least one previous message: This template is used
when the subscriber receives a single new voice mail message and there are existing
messages in the subscriber's voice mailbox.
 Multiple new messages: This template is used when there are more than one new
voice mail messages for the subscriber.
 Default: This template is used when the template that should be used is not
provisioned or has been disabled.
A template consists of up to six lines of text. For each line, you can select a tag and enter
the text to be included before and after the tag. In addition, the “no tag” option allows you
to add punctuation or additional text.
At run time, the tags are replaced by the actual information when the SMS message is
crated from the template. If data for a tag is not available, the entire line corresponding to
that tag is not included in the message.
The available tags and their estimated length are as follows.
Tag Name Estimated Length

%VMNumber 10

%newMsgs 2

%totalMsgs 2

%callerName 15

%callerNumber 10

no tag 0

The estimated tag lengths are used to calculate the estimated character count of the
template. The number of characters in the message is estimated by counting the length of
the actual text including spaces (but excluding tags) and adding the estimated length of
each tag that appears in the message.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 150 OF 350
 If the system administrator has restricted the maximum length of the message, the allowed
message length is displayed on the page.

Figure 117 Enterprise – MWI Delivery Custom Template – Add

1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint.
The Enterprise – MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint page appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise – MWI Delivery Custom Template - Add page appears.
3) From the Language drop-down list, select the language for which you are creating the
template.
4) From the Type drop-down list, select the type of template to create.
5) Create the template, with up to six lines. A line includes components specifying a tag
and text.
− Enter the text that comes before the tag, select a tag from the drop-down list, and
enter the text to follow the tag. The “no tag” tag selection allows you to add
punctuation or additional text.
− To add an additional line, click the + button to the right and repeat the previous
step.
The text of the template appears in the preview area of the page and the number
of characters in the message is displayed at the bottom of the page. If the system
administrator has restricted the maximum length of the message, the allowed
message length is also displayed.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 151 OF 350
 6) Click OK to save your changes.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.
Example:
You can create a template with the “You have %newMsgs new messages and a total of
%totalMsgs messages.” as follows:
 On the first line, type “You have” in the left text box, select the %newMsgs tag from
the drop-down list in the middle, and enter “new messages” in the right text box.
 Click the + button to add a second line.
 On the second line, type “and the total of” in the left text box, select the %totalMsgs
tag from the drop-down list in the middle, and enter “messages.” in the right text box.

6.11.3 Modify MWI Delivery Custom Template

You use the Enterprise – MWI Delivery Custom Template – Modify page to modify an
existing template.

Figure 118 Enterprise – MWI Delivery Custom Template – Modify

1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint.
The Enterprise – MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint page appears.
2) Click Edit in the line of the template to edit. The Enterprise – MWI Delivery Custom
Template – Modify page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 152 OF 350
 3) Modify the template as required. For information about configurable options available
on this page, see section 6.11.2 Add MWI Delivery Custom Template.
4) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

6.12 Number Portability Query

Use this item on the Enterprise – Services menu page to view and configure the number
portability query settings used to determine whether a number portability query should be
performed for a call.
The settings on this page allow you to specify the types of calls (originating, terminating, or
network) and a set of digit patterns to which to compare the phone number to determine
whether to perform a query for the call.
For call originations, the destination number is used to find matching digit patterns; for call
redirections, the redirected-to number is used; and for call terminations, the calling party
number is used.
It is important to understand how this number is selected, as this determines how the digit
patterns must be constructed to match it.
Calls can be broadly divided into group call calls and network calls. Group calls apply
when the terminating party is within the same group or enterprise as the originating party,
unless policies force this type of call to be a network call. All other calls are considered
network calls.
The following guidelines are intended to help you create digit patterns:
 Call originations
For call originations, the destination number is the terminating user’s directory number
(DN) in E.164 format. Users with no DN (phantom users) are matched against the
terminator group’s calling line ID (CLID) in E.164 format. The actual dialed string
(extension, location code + extension, and so on) is not important.
Example: +15145550100
For network calls, the destination number is composed of the dialed digits, unless
modified by the Network Server.
The following services impact the destination number:
− URL dialing: Uniform Resource Locators (URLs) (not phone numbers) never
match digit patterns.
− FAC prefixes: Feature access code (FAC) prefixes (for example, Calling Line ID
Delivery Blocking per Call) are stripped before applying the group or network call
rules. FAC prefixes can be chained, in which case they are all stripped, for
example, *67*805145550100 is converted to 5145550100 (assuming that *67
and *80 are feature access codes assigned to the caller).
− Speed Dial 8 and Speed Dial 100: The dialed speed code is replaced by the
configured number before applying group or network call rules. All the rules are
reapplied after the speed code substitution. For example, if speed dial code “2” is
configured to *675145550100, the FAC prefixes rule applies after substitution.
Assuming that *67 is a FAC assigned to the user, “5145550100” is compared to
the digit patterns when “2” is dialed.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 153 OF 350
 − Call Return FAC: The Call Return feature access code is replaced by the return
number before applying other group or network call origination rules.
− Last Number Redial FAC: The Last Number Redial feature access code is
replaced by the last dialed number before applying other group or network call
rules.
− Service activation/deactivation FACs: Service activation/deactivation feature
access codes that do not initiate outgoing calls (for example, Call Forwarding
Always Activation feature access code) do not trigger a portability query.
− Voice mail FACs: Feature access codes that redirect calls to voice mail (for
example, Voice Mail Retrieval or Voice Portal Access) are replaced by the DN of
the voice portal or third-party voice mail server, and this DN is used for
comparison with the digit patterns.
− Alternate Numbers: When making a group call by dialing an alternate number,
the alternate number in E.164 format is used. If the alternate number only has an
extension defined, the terminator’s primary DN in E.164 format is used.
− Outside access code: The outside access code is not included when matching
digit patterns.
− Emergency and repair calls: If external emergency routing is active, the
translated default emergency number is used for digit pattern matching.
 Calls redirections
For group calls in which the terminator performs the redirection, the redirected-to
number is checked following the same rules as for call originations.
 Call terminations
For group call terminations, the calling number is the originating user’s directory
number in E.164 format. Users with no DN (phantom users) are matched against the
originating group’s CLID in E.164 format. The actual calling string (extension, location
code + extension, and so on) is not important.
For network call terminations, the calling number is derived from the calling party
identity. This may be composed of the digits from the P-Asserted Identity or the From
headers.
The calling number is used even for numbers marked as private or anonymous.
The calling number is normalized into an E.164 format. If the number does not
contain a leading “+”, the country code of the terminating party is appended to the
calling number.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 154 OF 350
 6.12.1 Configure Number Portability Query
Use the Enterprise – Number Portability Query page to configure the number portability
query settings.

Figure 119 Enterprise – Number Portability Query

1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Number Portability Query. The
Enterprise – Number Portability Query page appears.
2) To enable number portability queries for incoming calls, check Enable Number
Portability Query For Incoming Calls.
3) To enable number portability queries for outgoing calls, check Enable Number
Portability Query For Outgoing Calls.
4) To enable number portability queries only for network calls, select Network Calls Only,
or select All Calls to enable the queries for all calls.
5) To add a digit pattern:
− Enter the pattern in the Digit Pattern text box.
A digit string without any wildcard characters is only considered for an exact
match. For instance, 8005551234 entered as a digit string only matches the
“8005551234” number. A digit string can contain a leading “+” to express an
E.164 number or pattern.
The following wildcard characters are allowed:
$ – Denotes any number of digits. For example, “555$” matches any string of
digits beginning with “555”. The “$” can only appear at the beginning or at the
end of a digit pattern and can appear in the string at most once. If a digit string
contains only the “$”, all numbers including numbers in E.164 format match this
pattern.
? – Denotes any single digit. For example, “555?” matches any four-digit string
beginning with “555”. When placed at the beginning of the digit string, this
wildcard character matches either the leading “+” or the first digit.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 155 OF 350
 [ ] – Denotes a single digit that satisfies the specified range of digits. A
consecutive range is indicated with a hyphen “-“, while a nonconsecutive range is
indicated with a comma “,”. Hyphens and commas can be used in combination,
for example, “[5-7, 9]”.
− Click Add. The digit pattern is added to the list.
6) To delete a digit pattern, check the Delete box on the row of the digit pattern.
7) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

6.13 Session Admission Control Group

The Session Admission Control feature provides a mechanism to control the number of
simultaneous sessions at the subscriber and logical link level for a group. The logical link
capacity is controlled by creating sets of access devices logically grouped together, called
session admission control (SAC) groups, and imposing restrictions on the number of
concurrent sessions for a given set of devices (SAC group).
You can define SAC groups that span groups within the enterprise. Enterprise-level SAC
groups can include any devices within the enterprise, including enterprise-level devices,
group-level devices for any group within the enterprise, and any system-wide devices.
Use the Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group page to view, add, modify, or
delete SAC groups for your enterprise.

NOTE: You need full access privilege to session admission control to manage SAC groups.
Read-only access privilege allows you to view but not modify SAC groups.

The following two figures show the Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group page
for an administrator with full and read-only access privileges to session admission control.

Figure 120 Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group (Read-only)

Figure 121 Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group (Read-only)

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 156 OF 350
 6.13.1 View Session Admission Control Groups
1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Session Admission Control Group.
The Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group page appears.
2) Click OK to return to the previous page.

6.13.2 Add Session Admission Control Group

Use the Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group Add page to create a new SAC
group.

Figure 122 Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group Add

1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Session Admission Control Group.
The Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group page appears.
2) Click Add. The Session Admission Control Group – Session Admission Control
Group Add page appears.
3) Enter a unique name for the new SAC group.
4) Enter the Maximum number of concurrent sessions allowed for this group. The
number cannot exceed the maximum number of concurrent subscriber sessions
allowed for the enterprise. You can view this information on the Resources – Session
Admission Control Capacity page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 157 OF 350
 5) To restrict the number of user-originated sessions, enter the maximum number in
Maximum number of concurrent user originating sessions. The number cannot
exceed the maximum number of concurrent subscriber sessions allowed for the
enterprise.
6) To restrict the number of user-terminated sessions, enter the maximum number in
Maximum number of concurrent user terminating sessions. The number cannot
exceed the maximum number of concurrent subscriber sessions allowed for the
enterprise.
7) Enter the number of sessions to reserve for the SAC group in Reserved number of
concurrent sessions reserved. The number cannot exceed the maximum number of
concurrent subscriber sessions allowed for the enterprise.
8) To reserve user-originated sessions, enter the number of sessions in Reserved
number of concurrent user originating sessions reserved.
9) To reserve user-terminated sessions, enter the number of sessions in Reserved
number of concurrent user terminating sessions reserved.

NOTE: The sum of reserved user-originated and user-terminated sessions cannot exceed the
number of reserved concurrent sessions.

10) To make this group the default SAC group, check Default Session Admission Control
Group.

NOTE: One enterprise-level SAC group can be defined as the default SAC group to which new
devices are added. This includes any new devices added at system level, new devices added
for the enterprise, or new devices added for any group within the enterprise.

11) To include the intra-SAC group sessions in the total number of sessions for the SAC
group, check Count intra Session Admission Control group sessions.
12) To block emergency and repair calls when the call limit is reached for the SAC group,
check Block emergency and repair calls due to Session Admission Control limits.
13) Assign devices.

− Use the Search utility to find the devices you want to assign.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting
Started Web Interface Administration Guide.
− In the Available Devices column select the devices to assign to this SAC group
and click Add >. Or, to add all the available devices, click Add All >>.
To select a device, click its name. To select several devices listed in consecutive
order, click the name of the first device, while holding down the SHIFT key; then
click the name of the last device you want to select. To select more than one
non-consecutive device, click the device names while holding down the CTRL
key.
14) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 158 OF 350
 6.13.3 Modify Session Admission Control Group
Use the Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group Modify page to modify an existing
SAC group.

Figure 123 Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group Modify

NOTE: If you have read-only access privilege to session admission control, you can view but
not modify information on this page as illustrated in the next figure.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 159 OF 350
 Figure 124 Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group Modify (Read-only)

1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Session Admission Control Group.
The Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the Session Admission Control group you want to
edit. The Session Admission Control Group – Session Admission Control Group
Modify page appears.
3) Modify information as needed. For information about the parameters that appear on
this page, see section 6.13.2 Add Session Admission Control Group.
4) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

6.13.4 Delete Session Admission Control Group

Use the Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group page to delete an SAC group.

Figure 125 Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group (Delete)

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 160 OF 350
 1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Session Admission Control Group.
The Enterprise – Session Admission Control Group page appears.
2) Check the Delete box in the row of the SAC group you want to delete.

WARNING: The Delete function cannot be undone. Once you delete an SAC group, your
deletion is final. Press Cancel before you click Apply or OK to avoid a deletion.

3) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

6.14 Session Admission Control White List

Use this item on the Enterprise – Services menu page to view and configure the Session
Admission Control (SAC) white list for your enterprise.
The SAC white list allows certain calls to complete even if the SAC group has reached
maximum capacity. It consists of up to 100 digit patterns to which outgoing and redirected
calls of a SAC group are compared.
When a member of a SAC group makes or redirects a call that matches an entry in the
white list, the call is allowed to complete even if the SAC group has reached maximum
capacity. Although the call is not blocked, it is counted toward the capacity of the SAC
group.
For outbound calls that have exceeded SAC capacity limits, the system identifies the
called number for call originations and the redirecting number for call redirections, and
determines whether a matching entry exists within the white list.
It is important to understand how this number is selected, as this determines how the digit
patterns must be constructed. The following guidelines are intended to help you create
the digit patterns:
 Call Originations
Call originations can be broadly divided into group calls and network calls. A call is
considered a group call when the terminating party is in the same enterprise as the
originating party, unless policies force this type of call to be a network call. All other
originations are considered network calls.
For group call originations, the called number is the terminating user’s directory
number (DN) in E.164 format. Users with no DNs (phantom users) are matched
against the terminator group’s calling line ID in E.164 format. The actual dialed string
is not important (for example, extension or location code and extension).
For network call originations, the called number typically consists of the dialed digits.
Following are some rules governing called number selection:
− URL dialing: Uniform Resource Locator (URL) (not phone number) never
matches a digit pattern.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 161 OF 350
 − FAC prefixes: Feature access code (FAC) prefixes (for example, Calling Line ID
Delivery Blocking Per Call) are stripped before applying the group or network call
origination rules. FAC prefixes can be chained, in which case they are all
stripped, for example, *67*805145550100 is converted to 5145550100 (assuming
that *67 and *80 are feature access codes assigned to the caller).
− Speed Dial 8 and Speed Dial 100: The dialed speed code is replaced by the
configured number before applying other rules. All the rules are reapplied after
the speed code substitution. For example, if speed dial code “2” is configured to
*675145550100, the FAC prefixes rule applies after substitution. Assuming that
*67 is a FAC assigned to the user, “5145550100” is compared to the white list
entries when “2” is dialed.
− Call Return FAC: The Call Return feature access code is replaced by the return
number before applying other group or network call origination rules.
− Last Number Redial FAC: The Last Number Redial feature access code is
replaced by the last dialed number before applying other group or network call
origination rules.
− Service activation/deactivation FACs: Service activation/deactivation feature
access codes that do not initiate outgoing calls (for example, Call Forwarding
Always Activation feature access code) are not denied and not included in the
SAC capacity counts. These feature access codes do not need to be added to
the white list.
− Voice mail FACs: Feature access codes that redirect calls to voice mail (for
example, Voice Mail Retrieval or Voice Portal Access) are replaced by the DN of
the voice portal or third-party voice mail server, and this DN is used for
comparison with the white list entries.
− Alternate Numbers: When making a group call by dialing an alternate number,
the alternate number in E.164 format is used for comparison with the white list
entries. If the alternate number only has an extension defined, the terminator’s
primary DN in E.164 format is used.
− Outside access code: The outside access code, which is always considered a
network origination, may or may not be included in the dialed digits. This is
determined based on the access code configuration.
− Emergency and repair calls: Emergency and repair calls are always allowed
and are included in the SAC capacity counts. Emergency and repair numbers do
not need to be added to the white list.
 Call Redirection
For group calls in which the terminator performs the redirection, the number checked
against the white list is the original called number. Redirected calls follow the same
rules as call originations.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 162 OF 350
 6.14.1 View and Configure Session Admission Control White List
Use the Enterprise – Session Admission Control White List page to view and configure the
Session Admission Control white list for your enterprise.

Figure 126 Enterprise – Session Admission Control White List

1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Session Admission Control White
List. The Enterprise – Session Admission Control White List page appears.
2) To enable the white list, check the Enable White List box.
3) To add a digit pattern:
− Enter the digits in the Digit Pattern text box. The following wildcard characters are
allowed:
$ – Denotes any number of digits. For example, “555$” matches any string of
digits beginning with “555”. The “$” can only appear at the end of a digit pattern.
If a digit pattern contains only the “$”, any number in E.164 format matches this
pattern.
? – Denotes any single digit. For example, “555?” matches any four-digit string
beginning with “555”. When placed at the beginning of the digit string, this
wildcard character matches either the leading “+” or the first digit.
[ ] – Denotes a single digit that satisfies the specified range of digits. A
consecutive range is indicated with a hyphen “-“, while a nonconsecutive range is
indicated with a comma “,”. Hyphens and commas can be used in combination,
for example “[5-7, 9]”.
− Click Add. The digit pattern is added to the list.
4) To delete a digit pattern, check the Delete box on the row of the digit pattern.
5) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 163 OF 350
 6.15 BroadWorks Mobility
Use this item on the Enterprise – Services menu to view the BroadWorks Mobility settings
for your enterprise.

Figure 127 Enterprise – BroadWorks Mobility

1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click BroadWorks Mobility. The

Enterprise – BroadWorks Mobility page appears.
The page provides the following read-only information.
Setting Description

Use System Settings When there is a check mark next to this option, system-level settings
are used for the BroadWorks Mobility service in your enterprise.

Use Service Provider When there is a check mark next to this option, the settings displayed
Settings on this page are used for the BroadWorks Mobility service in your
enterprise. The settings are as listed in the following rows.

Enable Location When there is a check mark next to this option, BroadWorks Mobility
Services sends Service Control Function (SCF) queries to get the mobile
subscriber’s location content for calls that are terminated to the mobile
subscriber.

Enable MSRN Lookup When there is a check mark next to this option, BroadWorks Mobility
sends SCF queries to get the Mobile Station Roaming Number (MSRN),
in a GSM network, or Temporary Location Directory Number (TLDN), in
an ANSI-41 network, of the mobile subscriber for least cost routing for
calls that are terminated to the mobile subscriber.

Enable Mobile State When there is a check mark next to this option, BroadWorks Mobility
Checking sends SCF queries to get the current power state of the mobile device
for the calls that are terminated to the mobile subscriber. If the current
state of the mobile device is “off”, the call is forked to the mobile device.

Deny Call Originations When there is a check mark next to this option, BroadWorks Mobility
denies mobile originations.

Deny Call When there is a check mark next to this option, BroadWorks Mobility
Terminations denies calls terminated to the mobile device and does not alert the
mobile device for calls terminated to the desk phone.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 164 OF 350
 Setting Description

Enable When there is a check mark next to this option, BroadWorks Mobility
Announcement sends network announcement suppression information to the mobile
Suppression network for calls anchored in BroadWorks.

2) Click OK to return to the previous page.

6.16 Zone Calling Restrictions

Use the Zone Calling Restrictions menu item on the Enterprise – Services menu page to
view and configure Zone Calling Restrictions and Roaming Restrictions policies.
The Zone Calling Restrictions policy enforces the rule so that a user cannot redirect or
conference an inter-zone call involving an off-network destination, or place off-network
calls when roaming. The Roaming Restriction policies enforce the rules so that a roaming
user cannot place or receive any calls as follows:
 When the Origination Roaming Restrictions policy is enabled, Zone Calling
Restrictions users are prevented from originating non-emergency calls from any
roaming device.
 When the Emergency Origination Roaming Restrictions policy is enabled, Zone
Calling Restrictions users are prevented from originating emergency calls from any
roaming device.
 When the Termination Roaming Restrictions policy is enabled, Zone Calling
Restrictions users are prevented from receiving calls at any roaming device.

6.16.1 View and Configure Zone Calling Restrictions

Use the Enterprise – Zone Calling Restrictions page to view and configure the Zone
Calling Restrictions and Roaming Restrictions policies.

Figure 128 Enterprise – Zone Calling Restrictions

1) On the Enterprise – Services menu page, click Zone Calling Restrictions. The
Enterprise – Zone Calling Restrictions page appears.
2) Enable or disable the Zone Calling Restrictions and Roaming Restrictions policies.
Check or uncheck the following options:
− Enable Zone Calling Restrictions
− Enable Origination Roaming Restrictions
− Enable Emergency Origination Roaming Restrictions
− Enable Termination Roaming Restrictions

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 165 OF 350
 3) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 166 OF 350
 7 Call Center Menu

The Enterprise – Call Center menu page includes menu items used to configure the Call
Center and Route Point services settings for your enterprise.
The BroadWorks Call Center solution automatically processes incoming calls received by
a single phone number by distributing them to a group of agents. It places incoming calls
in a queue if all agent lines are busy.
The Call Center solution provides three levels of service:
 Call Center – Basic – The Call Center – Basic service provides basic queuing
capabilities, distributing calls to devices and people. It is an inexpensive solution for
multi-receptionist and other environments that require basic queuing capability.
 Call Center – Standard – In addition to queuing capabilities, the Call Center –
Standard service provides such features as agent states, supervisor function, and
reporting.
 Call Center – Premium – The Call Center – Premium service is the most feature-rich
Call Center solution. In addition to the capabilities of the standard offering, it provides
features such as Night Service and Forced Forwarding. It is intended to meet the
needs of most call center environments.
The Route Point service is used by a remote application (for example, an external call
center) to queue and route calls. It provides functionality similar to that of the Call Center –
Premium service but it does not perform call distribution and reporting functions. Route
Point provides the following functions:
 Queuing of incoming calls
 Sending notifications to the remote application about the incoming calls
 Handling call management actions from the remote application and applying those
actions to specific calls in the queue
Links to the following menu pages from the Call Center menu are included in this section:
 Agent Default Settings (All Services)
 Agent Threshold Profiles (Call Center – Premium)
 Agent Unavailable Codes (Call Center – Standard, Call Center – Premium, and Route
Point)
 Call Disposition Codes (Call Center – Premium and Route Point)
 Routing Priority Settings (All Call Center Services)
 External Reporting Settings (Call Center – Standard and Call Center – Premium)
 Report Branding (Call Center – Standard and Call Center – Premium)
 Report Templates (Call Center – Standard and Call Center – Premium)
 Scheduled Reports (Call Center – Standard and Call Center – Premium)

NOTE: The Group – Call Centers and Group – Route Point pages for groups that have the
appropriate services assigned also include links to those pages. When you configure a setting,
the result is the same independently of how the page was accessed.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 167 OF 350
 The settings to configure for your enterprise depend on the services your enterprise has
been authorized. The settings that apply to specific services are identified in each section.

7.1 Access Call Center Menu

On your Home page, in the Options list, click Call Center to access the Enterprise – Call
Center menu page.

Figure 129 Enterprise – Call Center Menu

7.2 Agent Default Settings (All Services)

Use the Enterprise – Agent Default Settings page to configure agent default settings for
your enterprise.

Figure 130 Enterprise – Agent Default Settings (Call Center – Premium)

1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Agent Default Settings. The
Enterprise – Agent Default Settings page appears.
2) Select or type information as applicable to your type of service:

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 168 OF 350
 For all Call Center services:
− For Use Guard Timer Setting, check Default to use the system default, or check
Enterprise to use the guard timer defined for the enterprise on this page.
− If you selected Enterprise, check Enable guard timer for <x> seconds and
select a number of seconds form the drop-down list.
In addition, for Call Center – Standard, Call Center – Premium, and Route Point
services:
− For the Use Agent Unavailable Settings, check Default to use the system default
settings, or check Enterprise to use the settings defined on this page and
configure the following:
− Check Force Agent to unavailable on Do Not Disturb activation to change the
agent's status to "Unavailable" when the agent activates the Do Not Disturb
service.
− Check Force agent to unavailable after <number> consecutive bounces and
select the number of bounces from the drop-down list to change the agent's
status to “Unavailable” after the agent fails to answer the configured number
of consecutive call center/route point calls.
− Check Force agent to unavailable on not reachable to automatically change
the agent's status to “Unavailable” when the agent becomes unreachable.
In addition, for Call Center – Premium and Route Point services:
− Check Force Agent to unavailable on personal calls to change the agent's status
to "Unavailable" when the agent is on a personal call.
3) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

7.3 Agent Threshold Profiles (Call Center – Premium)

Use this item on the Enterprise – Call Center menu page to configure thresholds for
various statistical measurements about agents’ performance.
An agent threshold profile consists of a set of thresholds and a list of agents to which
those thresholds apply.
For each measurement that can have thresholds set, you can configure a yellow and a red
threshold, with the red threshold having higher severity than the yellow threshold.
When a threshold is crossed, the system sends an alert to the Call Center client, so that it
can display a visible indicator of the appropriate color to the user.
In addition, you can configure up to eight e-mail addresses for sending notifications about
crossed thresholds.
An agent must be assigned to exactly one profile. A default profile is automatically created
by the system. This profile applies to all agents who are not assigned to any other profile.
If you remove an agent from a non-default profile, the agent is automatically assigned to
the default profile. The only way to remove an agent from the default profile is to assign
the agent to another profile.
By default, the thresholds in the default profile do not have a value, and therefore, they are
effectively disabled. You can configure the default profile if needed.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 169 OF 350
 7.3.1 View Agent Threshold Profiles
Use the Enterprise – Agent Threshold Profiles page to view agent threshold profiles
defined for your enterprise.

Figure 131 Enterprise – Agent Thresholds Profiles

1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Agent Threshold Profiles. The
Enterprise – Agent Threshold Profiles page appears.
2) Click OK. The previous page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 170 OF 350
 7.3.2 Add Agent Threshold Profile
Use the Enterprise – Agent Threshold Profile Add page to define a new agent threshold
profile for your enterprise.

Figure 132 Enterprise – Agent Threshold Profile Add

1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Agent Threshold Profiles. The
Enterprise – Agent Threshold Profiles page appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise – Agent Threshold Profile Add page appears.
3) Enter a name and a description of the profile.
4) For each statistical measurement listed on this page, you can configure a yellow
threshold and/or a red threshold in hours and minutes. A threshold cannot be set to
"0:00" and a yellow threshold must be assigned a lower value than the corresponding
red threshold. You can leave the field empty if you do not want to assign the
threshold to a measurement.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 171 OF 350
 The following table lists the measurements for which thresholds can be configured.
Measurement Allowed Values Notes

Current Call State 00:01 through 1440:00 (up to a When the agent is idle, this is the time
Idle Time day). that has elapsed since the agent
became idle.

Current Call State 00:01 through 1440:00 (up to a When the agent is on a call, this is the
On-Call Time day). time the agent has spent on the
current call.

Current Agent State 00:01 through 1440:00 (up to a When the agent is unavailable, this is
Unavailable Time day). the time that has elapsed since the
agent became unavailable.

Average Busy In 00:01 through 1440:00 (up to a This is the average time spent by an
day). agent on an incoming ACD call since
the last sign-in.

Average Busy Out 00:01 through 1440:00 (up to a This is the average time spent by an
day). agent on an outgoing ACD call since
the last sign-in.

Average Wrap-Up 00:01 through 1440:00 (up to a This is the average time spent by an
day). agent to wrap up a call since the last
sign-in.

5) To send e-mail notification(s) when a threshold is crossed, check Enable Email

Notification and enter up to eight e-mail addresses where notifications should be sent.
The e-mail address must be from 3 through 80 characters in user@domain format. It
can contain only one @ sign and the following characters: letters, digits, !, #, $, %, &,
*, +, -, /, =, _, {,}, |, ~, `, ., ?, ^, or single quotes.
6) Use the search function to find available agents.
7) To assign agents to the profile, select the agents in the Available Agents column and
click Add >. Or to select all agents, click Add All >>.
8) To remove some assigned agents, select the agents to remove in the Assigned
Agents column and click Remove <. Or to remove all assigned agents, click Remove
All <<.
To select an agent, click their name. To select several agents listed in consecutive
order, click the name of the first agent, while holding down the SHIFT key; then click
the name of the last agent you want to select. To select more than one non-
consecutive agent, click the agent names while holding down the CTRL key.

NOTE: When an agent is assigned to a profile, they are automatically unassigned from the
previous profile to which they were assigned. When an agent is unassigned from a profile, they
are automatically assigned to the default profile.

An agent cannot be explicitly unassigned from the default profile. To unassign an agent from the
default profile, you have to assign the agent to another profile.

9) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without changing, click Cancel or select another page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 172 OF 350
 7.3.3 Modify or Delete Agent Threshold Profile
Use the Enterprise – Agent Threshold Profile Modify page to modify or delete an existing
agent threshold profile.

Figure 133 Enterprise – Agent Threshold Profile Modify (Top of Page)

1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Agent Threshold Profiles. The
Enterprise – Agent Threshold Profiles page appears.
2) Click Edit on the row of the profile to edit. The Enterprise – Agent Threshold Profile
Modify page appears.
3) To delete the profile, click Delete. The previous page appears.

WARNING: The Delete operation is final and cannot be undone.

4) Modify information as required. For information about the settings that can be
configured on this page, see section 7.3.2 Add Agent Threshold Profile.
5) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 173 OF 350
 To exit without changing, click Cancel or select another page.

7.4 Agent Unavailable Codes (Call Center – Standard, Call Center – Premium,
and Route Point)
Agent unavailable codes can be used to better track agents’ unavailability. You may
require agents in your enterprise who change their status to “Unavailable” to enter an
agent unavailable code that explains the reason for their unavailability. You can also
configure the feature to automatically assign a predefined code to agents in specific
situations, such as receiving a personal call or activating the Do Not Disturb service.
Use the Enterprise – Agent Unavailable Codes page to configure the agent unavailable
codes for your enterprise.

Figure 134 Enterprise – Agent Unavailable Codes

7.4.1 Configure Agent Unavailable Codes Settings

Use the Enterprise – Agent Unavailable Codes page to enable the use of agent
unavailable codes for your enterprise and to configure agent unavailable codes defaults.
1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Agent Unavailable Codes. The
Enterprise – Agent Unavailable Codes page appears.
2) Configure the settings as follows.
Parameter Description

Enable Agent Check or uncheck this option to enable or disable the Agents
Unavailable Codes Unavailable Codes feature. When the feature is disabled, unavailable
codes received from any client or device are ignored and no error is
generated.

Default code on Do Not From the drop-down list, select the code to automatically assign to
Disturb activation agents when they turn on their Do Not Disturb service. If no code is
specified, and Force use of Agent Unavailable Codes is enabled, the
generic default code (set on this page) is used.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 174 OF 350
 Parameter Description

Default code on personal From the drop-down list, select the code to automatically assign to
calls (Premium call agents when they make or receive personal calls. If no code is
centers and route points) specified and Force use of Agent Unavailable Codes is enabled, the
generic default code (set on this page) is used.

Default code on Configure this option if you want an unavailable code to be

consecutive bounces automatically assigned to an agent when a configurable number of
consecutive calls delivered to the agent have bounced. If no code is
specified and Force use of Agent Unavailable Codes is enabled, the
generic default code (set on this page) is used.

Default code on not From the drop-down list, select the code to automatically assign to
reachable agents when they become unreachable. If no code is specified and
Force use of Agent Unavailable Codes is enabled, the generic default
code (set on this page) is used.

Force use of agent Check this box to force the use of Agent Unavailable Codes and
unavailable codes with select a code from the drop-down list. When this option is enabled,
default code the agent is required to enter a code when they change their status to
“Unavailable”. The default code is used when a code is required but
no code or an invalid code is provided by the client application.

3) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without changing, click Cancel or select another page.

7.4.2 View, Activate, or Deactivate Agent Unavailable Codes

Use the Enterprise – Agent Unavailable Codes page to view, activate, or deactivate agent
unavailable codes.

Figure 135 Enterprise – Agent Unavailable Codes

1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Agent Unavailable Codes. The
Enterprise – Agent Unavailable Codes page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 175 OF 350
 2) To activate a code, check the Active box in the row for the code. To deactivate the
code, deselect the box.
3) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

7.4.3 Add Agent Unavailable Code

Use the Enterprise – Agent Unavailable Codes Add page to add an agent unavailable
code.

Figure 136 Enterprise – Agent Unavailable Codes Add

1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Agent Unavailable Codes. The
Enterprise - Agent Unavailable Codes page appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise - Agent Unavailable Codes Add page appears.
3) Enter the code name and description. The name must be unique in your enterprise
and can be from 1 through 10 characters.
4) To activate the code, check Active.
5) Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without changing, click Cancel or select another page.

7.4.4 Modify or Delete Agent Unavailable Code

Use the Enterprise – Agent Unavailable Codes Modify page to edit or delete an agent
unavailable code.

Figure 137 Enterprise – Agent Unavailable Codes Modify

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 176 OF 350
 1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Agent Unavailable Codes. The
Enterprise - Agent Unavailable Codes page appears.
2) Click Edit in the row for the code you want to modify or delete. The Enterprise - Agent
Unavailable Codes Modify page appears for the selected code.
3) To delete the code, click Delete. The code is deleted and the previous page appears.

WARNING: The Delete operation is final and cannot be undone.

4) To modify the code, change information as required.

5) Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without changing, click Cancel or select another page.

7.5 Call Disposition Codes (Call Center – Premium and Route Point)
Disposition codes are additional attributes that can be applied to inbound and outbound
calls to tag calls with comments, results, and so on. More than one disposition code can
be assigned to a call.
Disposition codes can be defined at the enterprise level, in which case they apply to all
route points and Premium call centers in the enterprise, or at the call center or route point
level, in which case they apply only to the call center or route point where they are defined.
Use the Enterprise – Call Disposition Codes page to configure enterprise-level disposition
codes.

Figure 138 Enterprise – Call Disposition Codes

7.5.1 View, Activate, or Deactivate Enterprise-level Disposition Codes

Use the Enterprise – Call Disposition Codes page to view, activate, or deactivate
disposition codes for your enterprise.
1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Call Disposition Codes. The
Enterprise – Call Disposition Codes page appears.
2) To activate a code, check the Active box in the row of the code. To deactivate the
code, deselect the box.
3) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 177 OF 350
 To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

7.5.2 Add Disposition Code

Use the Enterprise – Call Disposition Code Add page to add an enterprise-level
disposition code.

Figure 139 Enterprise – Call Disposition Codes Add

1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Call Disposition Codes. The
Enterprise – Call Disposition Codes page appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise – Call Disposition Codes Add page appears.
3) To make the disposition code active, check the Active box.
4) Enter the disposition code. The code has to be unique in your enterprise and can be
from 1 through 10 characters.
5) Enter the description of the disposition code.
6) Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

7.5.3 Modify or Delete Disposition Code

Use the Enterprise – Call Disposition Code Modify page to modify or delete an enterprise-
level disposition code.

Figure 140 Enterprise – Call Disposition Codes Modify

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 178 OF 350
 1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Call Disposition Codes. The
Enterprise – Call Disposition Codes page appears.
2) Click Edit in the row for the disposition code you want to modify or delete. The
Enterprise – Call Disposition Codes Modify page appears.
3) To delete the code, click Delete. The code is deleted and the previous page appears.

WARNING: The Delete function is final and cannot be undone.

4) To modify the code, change information as required. For information about the
parameters on this page, see section 7.5.2 Add Disposition Code.
5) Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

7.5.4 View Disposition Code Usage

Use the Usage tab on the Enterprise – Call Disposition Code Modify page to view a
disposition code usage.

Figure 141 Enterprise – Call Disposition Codes Usage

1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Call Disposition Codes. The
Enterprise – Call Disposition Codes page appears.
2) Click Edit in the row of the disposition code you want to view. The Enterprise – Call
Disposition Codes Modify page appears.
3) Click the Used By tab. The list of call centers and route points that use the selected
disposition code appears.
4) To exit the page, click OK.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 179 OF 350
 7.6 Routing Priority Settings (All Call Center Services)
Use the Enterprise – Call Center Routing Policies page to select the routing policy for your
enterprise call centers and to prioritize the call centers in your enterprise.
When you add a call center, it is automatically assigned the lowest priority. To change
that, assign it the priority you want.
When you delete a call center, the routing priorities of the remaining call centers may
become non-contiguous. To make them contiguous, refresh the list by clicking Apply.

Figure 142 Enterprise – Call Center Routing Policies

1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Routing Priority Settings. The
Enterprise – Call Center Routing Policies page appears.
2) Select the routing policy you want to apply when routing calls to agents from the
following:
− Select Longest Wait Time to first answer calls that have been waiting the longest.
− Select Priority Order to answer all the calls in a higher priority queue before
answering any call in a lower priority queue.
3) Place your enterprise call centers in order of priority. For each call center, enter its
priority in the Priority text box, where 1 is the highest priority, 2 is the second highest
priority, and so on. You can enter any whole or decimal number.
When the page is refreshed, the call centers are renumbered from 1 to N, in the
relative order assigned by you, and reordered accordingly. For example, if you
assigned priority 7 to call center A and priority 3.5 to call center B, the call center B is
listed first with priority 1 and the call center A is listed second with priority 2.
4) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel to display the previous page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 180 OF 350
 7.7 External Reporting Settings (Call Center – Standard and Call Center –
Premium)
Use the Enterprise – Call Center External Reporting Settings page to enable or disable
external reporting for your enterprise.

Figure 143 Enterprise – Call Center External Reporting Settings

1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click External Reporting Settings. The
Enterprise – Call Center External Reporting Settings page appears.
2) For External Reporting select one of the following options:
− Select Enhanced to store reporting data in a centralized database and enable
Call Center reporting.
− Select Off to disable Call Center reporting and collect statistics on the local server.
3) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel to display the previous page.

7.8 Report Branding (Call Center – Standard and Call Center – Premium)
Use this menu item on the Enterprise – Call Center menu page to customize report
branding for your enterprise. You can customize the header and footer of the reports.
To use custom branding, define a custom branding file and store it in a location you can
access while performing the procedure in this section.
The branding template is an XSL-FO document that defines the contents of headers and
footers through the use of specific XML tags. The XSL-FO file can be created using the
Oracle Business Intelligence Publisher Add-in for Microsoft Word in the same way that the
style templates are created. The same header and footer must be defined for all pages of
the report. For more information, see the BroadWorks Call Center Reports Customization
Guide and the BroadWorks Call Center Solution Guide.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 181 OF 350
 Figure 144 Enterprise – Report Branding

1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Report Branding. The Enterprise –
Report Branding page appears.
2) To use system-level branding, check System. Or to use custom branding, check
Custom and click Browse to find and upload a custom branding file.
3) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel to display the previous page.

7.9 Report Templates (Call Center – Standard and Call Center – Premium)
Use this menu item on the Enterprise – Call Center menu page to view and manage report
templates for your enterprise.

Figure 145 Enterprise – Report Templates

Use the following administrative procedures to configure and manage report templates for
your enterprise:
 List Report Templates
 Add Report Template
 Modify, Delete, Enable, or Disable Report Template
 View Report Template Usage

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 182 OF 350
 7.9.1 List Report Templates
Use the Enterprise – Report Templates page to list report templates created for your
enterprise. When generating reports, you can also use system templates made available
for report generation.
1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Report Templates. The Enterprise
– Report Templates page appears listing enterprise-level templates. The template
type specifies whether the template is used to generate agent or call center reports.
2) Click OK to return to the previous page.

7.9.2 Add Report Template

You use the Enterprise – Report Template Add page to create a custom report template
for your enterprise.
Before you add a report template using this page, you need to:
 Identify data requirements for the reports and select the appropriate data template.
The data template determines whether the report template is an agent or call center
template, a real-time or historical template, and whether it is interval-based.
 Design a style template you want to use for the reports generated using this template.
The style template is an XSL-FO document designed using the Oracle Business
Intelligence Publisher Add-in for Microsoft Word. For more information, see the
BroadWorks Call Center Reports Customization Guide.

Figure 146 Enterprise – Report Template Add

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 183 OF 350
 1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Report Templates. The Enterprise
– Report Templates page appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise – Report Template Add page appears.
3) Provide a name and description of the template (up to 80 characters each).
4) From the Data Template drop-down list, select the data template to use for this report
template.

NOTE: Once the template is created, the data template selection cannot be modified.

5) Upload the style template. Click the Browse button to the right of Style Template and
then select the style template to upload.
6) To make the template available for report generation, check Enable for Report
Generation.
7) For an Agent report template only, specify the scope of the template, that is who can
use the template in addition to administrators. For Scope, select:
− Supervisors only to allow only call center supervisors to use the template.
− Supervisors and Agents to allow supervisors and agents to use the template.
8) For Interval scope, specify whether the template will be used for real-time or historical
reports. This option can only be set if the selected data template is a real-time data
template. Otherwise, the report template is defined as historical and the scope cannot
be changed.
9) Provide the filtering variables, if applicable. For Filtering Variables, enter the filter
number and the required values. The filtering variables further refine the set of data
used for report generation. The number and type of filtering variables depends on the
data template selected.
− Filter Number is an index that references a specific filter for the selected data
template.
− Value 1 through Value 5 are the filtering values used in the selected filter during
report generation and depend on the filter you select.

NOTE: Currently, all filters require only zero or one value to be provided. Value 2 through Value
5 are designed to allow future changes.

10) Specify which optional parameters to include in the report.

Figure 147 Report Template Add – Input Parameters (Agent Interval Statistics Data Template)

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 184 OF 350
 Figure 148 Report Template Add – Input Parameters (Call Center Call Details Data Template)

− In the Input Parameters section, select Required for each optional parameter you
want to include in the report, and select Hidden for the remaining optional
parameters. When a parameter is set to required, a value must be supplied when
generating reports.

NOTE: The input parameters depend on the data template you selected, and for some templates
there may be no optional input parameters as illustrated in Figure 148.

11) Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel to display the previous page.

7.9.3 Modify, Delete, Enable, or Disable Report Template

You use the Enterprise – Report Template Modify page to modify, delete, enable, or
disable a custom report template.

Figure 149 Enterprise – Report Template Modify

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 185 OF 350
 1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Report Templates. The Enterprise
– Report Templates page appears.
2) Click Edit in the row for the template you want to modify. The Enterprise – Report
Template Modify page appears.
3) To delete the template, click Delete. The template is deleted and the previous page
appears.

NOTE: The Delete operation is final and cannot be undone.

4) To enable or disable the template, check or uncheck the Enable for Report
Generation box.
5) Modify information as required. See section 7.9.2 Add Report Template for
information about the options available on this page.
6) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel to display the previous page.

7.9.4 View Report Template Usage

Use the Usage tab on the Enterprise – Report Template Modify page to view the reports
scheduled using a selected template. The Edit link navigates you to the Scheduled Report
Modify page of the selected report.

Figure 150 Enterprise – Report Template Modify – Usage

1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Report Templates. The Enterprise
– Report Templates page appears.
2) Click Edit in the row of the template for which you want to view usage. The Report
Template Modify page appears.
3) Click the Usage tab. The list of scheduled reports using the selected template
appears.
4) To access a specific report, click Edit in the row for the report. This brings you to the
Scheduled Report Modify page for the report.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 186 OF 350
 7.10 Scheduled Reports (Call Center – Standard and Call Center – Premium)
You use this item on the Enterprise – Call Center menu page to schedule reports and to
view, delete or modify scheduled reports in your enterprise.
This page only appears when External Reporting is set to either “Enhanced” or “Both” on
the Enterprise – Call Center External Reporting Settings page.
The Enhanced Reporting feature allows you to schedule reports about call centers and
agents in your enterprise. Reports can be scheduled to run only once or to run
periodically according to the specified schedule.
Use the following administrative procedures to schedule and manage reports:
 View Scheduled Reports
 Schedule Report
 Modify or Delete Scheduled Report

7.10.1 View Scheduled Reports

You use the Enterprise – Scheduled Reports page to view a list of scheduled reports
created within your enterprise. This includes scheduled reports created at the enterprise
and individual user (supervisor or agent) level.
The Active tab (default) displays the reports that still have occurrences scheduled to run in
the future. The Completed tab displays the reports for which all occurrences have run.

Figure 151 Enterprise – Scheduled Reports

1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Scheduled Reports. The
Enterprise – Scheduled Reports page appears, listing the active reports.
2) To view the completed reports, click the Completed tab.
3) Click OK to return to the previous page.

7.10.2 Schedule Report

You use the Enterprise – Scheduled Report Add page to schedule a report.
The options available on this page depend on the report template, the type of report:
Agent or Call Center, and the recurrence pattern you choose for the report.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 187 OF 350
 Figure 152 Enterprise – Scheduled Report Add

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 188 OF 350
 1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Scheduled Reports. The
Enterprise – Scheduled Reports page appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise – Scheduled Reports Add page appears.
3) Provide a name and description for the report (maximum of 80 characters each).
4) Select a report template. From the Report Template Name drop-down list, select the
report template to use for this report.
Scheduling Details
5) Specify the recurrence pattern of the report. From the Recurs drop-down list, select
one of the following options:
− Never to make it a one-time report.
− Daily and specify the start date and the time to run the report and the frequency of
occurrence in days from 1 through 999.

Figure 153 Scheduled Report Add – Daily Recurrence Pattern

− Weekly and specify the start date, the time to generate the report, the frequency
of occurrence in weeks (from 1 through 999), and the day or days of the week on
which the report should run.

Figure 154 Scheduled Report Add – Weekly Recurrence Pattern

− Monthly and specify the start date, the time to run the report, the frequency of
occurrence in months (from 1 through 999), and the day for the recurrence of the
report. For the day of recurrence, select one of the following options:
− To schedule the report on a specific day of the month, for example the 27th,
check Day <X> of the month and enter the day from 1 through 31. If you
select 29, 30, or 31, the occurrence will fall on the last day of the month for
months that are shorter than 29, 30, or 31 days respectively.
− To schedule the report on a specific day of the week within the month, for
example the second Monday of the month, check The <Xth> <Day-of-Week>
of the month, and select Xth and Day-of-Week from the drop-down lists.

Figure 155 Scheduled Report Add – Monthly Recurrence Pattern

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 189 OF 350
 − Yearly and specify the start date, the time to run the report, the frequency of
occurrence in years (, for example every 2 years, and the day for the recurrence
of the report from the following options:
− To schedule the report on a specific day of the year, check Day <X> of
<Month>, enter the day and select the month. For example, if you select
April, you can enter a day from 1 through 30, and if you select February, you
can enter a day from 1 through 29.
− To schedule the report on a specific day of the week and month, for example
the first Sunday of January, check The <Xth> <Day-of-Week> of <Month>
and select Xth, Day-of-Week, and Month from the drop-down lists.

Figure 156 Scheduled Report Add – Yearly Recurrence Pattern

6) Specify when the report should run. In the Report Time section, enter the following
information:
− Select the scheduling time zone from the drop-down list.
− For a non-recurring report, specify the actual date and time to run the report.

Figure 157 Scheduled Report Add – Scheduling Details for One-Time Report

− For a recurring report, specify when to run the report for the first time. The
subsequent times are calculating based on the recurrence pattern.

Figure 158 Scheduled Report Add – Scheduling Details for Recurring Report

7) For recurring reports, specify when the report generation should end. In the
Recurrence Range section, select one of the following options:
− Never to run the report continuously.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 190 OF 350
 − After <X> occurrences to end the report generation after X occurrences and
enter the number of occurrences from 1 through 999.
− Date to end the report generation on a specific date and enter a date in the
MM/DD/YYYY format.
Report Details
8) For a call center report, specify whether the report data should be grouped by call
center or by Dialed Number Identification Service (DNIS).
9) Select the sampling period. The sampling period is only applicable to interval-based
report templates. It can be one of the following: every quarter hour, every half hour,
hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly.
10) Select the report time zone from the drop-down list.
11) Select the date and time format. The selected format is used for all dates that appear
in the generated report.
12) Specify the report time frame, that is, the period for which you are requesting the
report. The report time frame always has a beginning date and time and an end date
and time.
− For a non-recurring report, specify the actual dates and times.
− For a recurring report, select the time frame relative to the report generation time.
For example, the previous month, previous five days, and so on. At the time of
report generation, the time frame is converted to absolute dates and times.
13) For a weekly sampling period, select the day of the week when the sampling should
start. This is only applicable for interval-based report templates.
14) Select the file format of the report, which can be either XLS or PDF.
Agent/Call Center Selection
15) Depending on the report type, select agents or call centers to include in the report.

− To run the report for all agents/call centers in your enterprise, check the Include
All Agents or Include All Call Centers box.

NOTE: If you check this box you cannot select agents/call centers individually.

− To include specific agents/call centers, search for available agents/call centers;

then in the Available Agents/Call Centers column, select agents/call centers and
click Add >. To select all available agents, click Add All >>.

NOTE: An explicit list of agents/call centers cannot have more than 100 elements.

− To exclude some agents/call centers from the report, in the Selected Agents/Call
Centers for the report column, select the agents to remove and click Remove <.
Or to remove all selected agents, click Remove All <<.

NOTE: Agents deleted from a call center can be included in the report. They are identified by a
“*” next to their name.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 191 OF 350
 Performance Parameters

NOTE: The number and type of parameters you need to provide depends on the selected report
template. Some reports do not have any performance parameters. This section is present only
if some performance parameters need to be provided for the report.

16) If applicable, select or enter parameters as required by the selected report template.
Destinations for Report Generation
17) In the E-mail Address box enter the e-mail address to which the report is to be sent.
The e-mail address must be from 3 through 80 characters in user@domain format. It
can contain only one @ sign and the following characters: letters, digits, !, #, $, %, &,
*, +, -, /, =, _, {, }, |, ~, `, ., ?, ^, or single quotes.
18) In the Additional E-mail addresses box, enter up to eight additional e-mail addresses
where to send the report.
19) Click OK. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel to display the previous page.

7.10.3 Modify or Delete Scheduled Report

You use the Enterprise – Scheduled Report Modify page to modify or delete a scheduled
report. You can modify both active and completed reports.
Completed reports are removed from the system after a configured (by the system
administrator) period of time. However, as long as a report exists in the system, it can be
modified and rescheduled to run in the future. In such a case, the status of a completed
report changes to active.

Figure 159 Enterprise – Scheduled Report Modify (Top of Page)

1) On the Enterprise – Call Center menu page, click Scheduled Reports. The
Enterprise – Scheduled Reports page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 192 OF 350
 2) To modify a completed report, click the Completed tab.
3) Click Edit in the row for the report to modify. The Enterprise – Scheduled Report
Modify page appears.
4) To delete a scheduled report, click Delete. The report is deleted and the previous
page appears.

NOTE: The Delete operation is final and cannot be undone.

5) To modify a report, change information as required. For information about the

settings available on this page, see section 7.10.2 Schedule Report.
6) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel to display the previous page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 193 OF 350
 8 Communication Barring Menu

Communication Barring allows you to define barring profiles and apply them to groups to
restrict calls they can make or receive.
A communication barring profile consists of:
 An ordered list of communication barring rules for originating calls
 A default action for originating calls if none of the originating barring rules applies
 An ordered list of communication barring rules for redirecting calls
 A default action for redirecting calls if none of the redirecting barring rules applies
 An ordered list of communication barring rules for incoming (terminating) calls
 A default action for incoming calls if none of the incoming barring rules applies
 An ordered list of communication barring rules for Call Me Now calls
 A default action for Call Me Now calls if none of the Call Me Now barring rules applies
A communication barring rule is created by selecting a criteria entry and applying an
action, some conditions, and a priority to it.
You can define your own criteria entries and/or use system-level criteria entries assigned
to you by the system administrator. You can only define criteria entries based on digit
patterns in phone numbers. But system level criteria entries contain other criteria to
restrict calls.
To see the criteria assigned to your enterprise, use the System Defined Communication
Barring Criteria and System Defined Communication Barring Criteria items on the
Enterprise – Resources menu page.
The Enterprise – Communication Barring menu page includes menu items that allow you
to configure the different aspects of the Communication Barring service in your enterprise.
This chapter includes procedures related to Enterprise – Communication Barring menu
items.
Links to the following menu pages from the Communication Barring menu are included in
this chapter:
Menu Item Description

Digit Pattern Criteria Use this menu item to create digit patterns for filtering calls.

Profiles Use this menu item to create communication barring profiles for imposing
restrictions on calls.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 194 OF 350
 8.1 Access Communication Barring Menu
On your Home page, in the Options list, click Communication Barring to access the
Enterprise – Communication Barring menu page.

Figure 160 Enterprise – Communication Barring Menu

8.2 Digit Pattern Criteria

Use this item on the Enterprise – Communication Barring page to create and manage digit
pattern criteria for the enterprise.
Digit pattern criteria are criteria based on digit patterns. They are used to filter calls by
comparing phone numbers to digit patterns.

8.2.1 View Digit Pattern Criteria Entries

Use the Enterprise – Digit Pattern Criteria page to view digit pattern criteria entries defined
for your enterprise. Depending on your permissions you may have full or read-only
access to this page.

Figure 161 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria

1) On the Enterprise – Communication Barring menu page, click Digit Pattern Criteria.
The Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria page appears.
2) To return to the previous page, click OK.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 195 OF 350
 8.2.2 View Digit Pattern Criteria Entry Details and Usage
Depending on your administrator profile, use either Enterprise – Communication Barring
Digit Pattern Criteria Modify or Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria
View page to view the details and usage of a digit pattern criteria entry.

Figure 162 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria Modify

Figure 163 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria View

1) On the Enterprise – Communication Barring menu page, click Digit Pattern Criteria.
The Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria page appears.
2) To see the details of an entry, click Edit or View on the row for the entry. The
Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria Modify/View page appears.
3) Use tabs to see the different details of the digit pattern criteria entry.
− To see the entry’s digit patterns, click Digit Patterns.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 196 OF 350
 Figure 164 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria Modify – Digit Patterns

Figure 165 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria View – Digit Patterns

− To see the communication barring profiles that use the entry, click Usage.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 197 OF 350
 Figure 166 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria Modify – Usage

Figure 167 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria View – Usage

4) To display the previous page, click OK.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 198 OF 350
 8.2.3 Add Digit Pattern Criteria Entry
You use the Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria Add page to create
a digit pattern criteria entry.

Figure 168 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria Add

1) On the Enterprise – Communication Barring menu page, click Digit Pattern Criteria.
The Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria page appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria Add page
appears.
3) Enter a name and description for the entry. The name is mandatory and can be from
1 through 40 characters in length.
4) Click the Digit Patterns tab. The entry is created and the Digit Patterns tab appears.

Figure 169 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria Modify – Digit Patterns

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 199 OF 350
 5) Add digit patterns. For each digit pattern you want to add:
− In the Digit Pattern box, enter a digit pattern. The following wildcard characters
are allowed:
$ – Denotes any number of digits. For example, “555$” matches any string of
digits beginning with 555. The “$” can only appear at the beginning or at the end
of a digit pattern, and it cannot appear in a digit pattern more than once.
? – Denotes any single digit. For example, “555?” matches any four-digit string
beginning with “555”.
[ ] – Denotes a single digit that satisfies the specified range of digits. A
consecutive range is indicated with a hyphen “-”, while a nonconsecutive range is
indicated with a comma “,”. Hyphens and commas can be used in combination,
for example “[5-7, 9]”.
+ – Denotes an E.164 digit pattern and is only allowed as the first character of the
pattern.
− Click Add. The pattern appears at the bottom of the page.
6) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

8.2.4 Modify or Delete Digit Pattern Criteria Entry

You use the Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria Modify page to
modify or delete a digit pattern criteria entry.

Figure 170 Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria Modify

1) On the Enterprise – Communication Barring menu page, click Digit Pattern Criteria.
The Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit Pattern Criteria page appears.
2) Click Edit on the row for the entry. The Enterprise – Communication Barring Digit
Pattern Criteria Modify page appears.
3) To delete the entry, click Delete. The page is deleted and the previous page appears.

WARNING: The delete operation cannot be undone.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 200 OF 350
 4) To modify the entry, change information as required. See section 8.2.3 Add Digit
Pattern Criteria Entry for information about the digit pattern criteria entry settings.
5) Click Apply, OK, or any tab. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes
and displays the previous page. Clicking a tab saves the changes and displays the
tab.
To exit without saving, click Cancel.

8.3 Profiles
Communication Barring profiles specify rules for filtering calls and applying actions to calls
that satisfy required criteria. They can be applied to groups to impose restrictions on calls.
For information, see section 11.5.2 Select or View Group Communication Barring Profile.
Use the Enterprise – Profiles page to manage communication barring profiles for the
enterprise.

8.3.1 View Profiles

Use the Enterprise – Communication Barring Profiles page to view communication barring
profiles defined for your enterprise. Depending on your permissions you may have full or
read-only access to this page.

Figure 171 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profiles

Figure 172 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profiles (Read-only)

1) On the Enterprise – Communication Barring menu page, click Profiles. The

Enterprise – Communication Barring Profiles page appears.
2) To return to the previous page, click OK.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 201 OF 350
 8.3.2 View Profile Details and Usage
Depending on your administrator profile, use either Enterprise – Communication Barring
Profile Modify or Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile View page to view the details
and usage of a communication barring profile.

NOTE: The Call Me Now tab only appears in the Call Me Now service has been authorized for
your enterprise.

Figure 173 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify

Figure 174 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile View

1) On the Enterprise – Communication Barring menu page, click Profiles. The

Enterprise – Communication Barring Profiles page appears.
2) Click Edit or View in the row for the profile to view. The Enterprise – Communication
Barring Profile Modify/View page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 202 OF 350
 3) Use tabs to see the different details of the profile:
− To view the rules for originating calls, click the Originating tab. The list of rules to
apply to originating calls appears.

Figure 175 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify – Originating Calls

− To view the rules for redirected calls, click the Redirecting tab. The list of rules to
apply to redirecting calls appears.

Figure 176 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify – Redirecting Calls

− To view the rules for incoming calls, click the Incoming tab. The list of rules to
apply to incoming calls appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 203 OF 350
 Figure 177 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify – Incoming Calls

− To view the rules for Call Me Now calls, click the Call Me Now tab. The list of
rules to apply to Call Me Now calls appears.

NOTE: The Call Me Now tab only appears in the Call Me Now service has been authorized for
your enterprise.

Figure 178 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify – Call Me Now Calls

− To view the groups that have been assigned this profile, click the Usage tab. The
list of groups that have been assigned the selected profile appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 204 OF 350
 Figure 179 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify – Usage

4) To return to the previous page, click OK.

8.3.3 Add Profile

You use the Enterprise – Communication Barring Profiles Add page to add a
communication barring profile for your enterprise.

NOTE: The Call Me Now tab only appears in the Call Me Now service has been authorized for
your enterprise.

Figure 180 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Add

1) On the Enterprise – Communication Barring menu page, click Profiles. The

Enterprise – Communication Barring Profiles page appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Add page appears.
3) Enter a name and a description that will help you identify the profile. The name is
mandatory and can be from 1 through 40 characters in length.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 205 OF 350
 4) Check the Apply profile to attended call transfers box to specify that this profile should
be applied to attended call transfers.
When this option is checked and direct transfer screening is disabled by the system
administrator, attended call transfers are screened against the transferring party’s
communication barring profile. Otherwise, attended transfers are screened against the
originating party’s communication barring profile.

NOTE: At any point, to save the changes, click Apply, OK, or another tab. Apply saves the
changes; OK saves the changes and returns to the Enterprise – Communication Barring Profiles
page; and clicking another tab, saves the changes and displays the information for that tab.

To cancel your unsaved changes and return to the Enterprise – Communication Barring Profiles
page, click Cancel.

5) Configure rules for originating, redirecting, incoming, and Call Me Now calls.
− To configure rules for originating calls, click the Originating tab.

Figure 181 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify – Originating Calls

− To configure rules for redirecting calls, click the Redirecting tab.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 206 OF 350
 Figure 182 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify – Redirecting Calls

− To configure rules for incoming calls, click the Incoming tab.

Figure 183 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify – Incoming Calls

− To configure rules for Call Me Now calls, click the Call Me now tab.

NOTE: The Call Me Now tab only appears in the Call Me Now service has been authorized for
your enterprise.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 207 OF 350
 Figure 184 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify – Call Me Now Calls

6) For each rule to create, select a criteria entry to use for filtering calls. From the
Criteria drop-down list, select a criteria entry and click Add. The entry appears at the
bottom of the list of rules but above the rule for All Other Calls.

NOTE: You can use the same criteria entry in a profile more than once.

7) For each row, specify the action to apply to calls that satisfy the criteria in this criteria
entry. For Action, select an action from the drop-down list.
8) For an originating criteria entry only:
− If you selected Treatment, specify the treatment to apply to calls.
− If you selected Transfer, specify the phone number to transfer the calls to. A
phone number used for outgoing calls can be from 2 through 30 digits (2 through
22 digits plus the leading + sign in E.164 number format). Spaces and dashes
are allowed but are not included in the number.
− If you selected Auth Code (timed), specify the maximum allowed duration of the
call in the Maximum Duration column. The duration must be from 60 seconds
through 24 hours.
9) For any criteria entry:
− If you selected Allow (timed), specify the maximum allowed duration of the call in
the Maximum Duration column. The value must be from 60 seconds through 24
hours.
10) Optionally, specify when the criteria in this entry apply. From the Time Schedule and
Holiday Schedule drop-down lists select schedules.
11) Specify the priority to assign to the rule, in relation to other rules for selected type of
calls in this profile. You can enter a whole or decimal number. The rules are applied
to calls in the order you set. Priority* is a required field.
12) To delete a rule, check the Delete box on the row for the rule.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 208 OF 350
 13) Click Apply, OK, or another tab. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes
and displays the Enterprise – Communication Barring Profiles page. Clicking another
tab saves the changes and displays the information for that tab.

8.3.4 Modify or Delete Profile

You use the Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify page to modify or delete a
selected communication barring profile.

NOTE: The Call Me Now tab only appears in the Call Me Now service has been authorized for
your enterprise.

Figure 185 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profile Modify

1) On the Enterprise – Communication Barring menu page, click Profiles. The

Enterprise – Communication Barring Profiles page appears listing the existing
communication barring profiles.
2) Click Edit on the row of the profile to edit. The Enterprise – Communication Barring
Profile Modify page appears.
3) To delete the profile, click Delete. The profile is deleted and you are redirected to the
previous page.

WARNING: The Delete operation is final and cannot be undone.

4) To modify the profile, change information as required. See section 8.3.3 Add Profile
for information about the options available on this page.
5) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
6) To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 209 OF 350
 8.3.5 Select Default Profile
You can select a default profile, which will be applied to all groups that do not have a
communication barring profile assigned.
Use the Enterprise – Communication Barring Profiles page, to select the default profile for
your enterprise.

Figure 186 Enterprise – Communication Barring Profiles

1) On the Enterprise – Communication Barring menu page, click Profiles. The

Enterprise – Communication Barring Profiles page appears listing the existing
communication barring profiles.
2) Check the Default box on the row for the profile you want to be the default profile for
your enterprise.
3) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 210 OF 350
 9 Meet-Me Conferencing Menu

The Enterprise – Meet-Me Conferencing menu page includes a menu item that allow you
to view the number of Meet-Me conference ports assigned to your enterprise.

9.1 Access Meet-Me Conferencing Menu

On your Home page, in the Options List, click Meet-Me Conferencing to access the
Enterprise – Meet-Me Conferencing menu page.

Figure 187 Enterprise – Meet-Me Conferencing Menu

9.2 Meet-Me Conference Ports

Use the Meet-Me Conference Ports menu item on the Enterprise – Meet-Me Conferencing
menu page to display the number of Meet-Me conference ports assigned to your
enterprise.

9.2.1 View Meet-Me Conference Ports

Use the Enterprise – Meet-Me Conference Ports page to view the number of ports
assigned to your enterprise by the system provider administrator.

Figure 188 Enterprise – Meet-Me Conference Ports

1) On the Enterprise – Meet-Me Conferencing menu page, click Meet-Me Conference

Ports. The Enterprise – Meet-Me Conference Ports page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 211 OF 350
 10 Utilities Menu

The Enterprise – Utilities menu page includes menu items that relate to enterprise utilities.
This section includes procedures related to Enterprise – Utilities menu items that can be
performed only by the enterprise administrator.
Links to the following menu pages from the Utilities menu are included in this section:
 BroadWorks Anywhere Number Lookup
 Common Phone List
 Device Profile Authentication Password Rules
 Enterprise Directory
 Feature Access Codes
 Password Rules
 Passcode Rules
 SIP Authentication Password Rules (AS Mode)
 Answer Confirmation
 Device Management Event Queues
 LDAP Directory
 Service Pack Migration
 Verify Translation and Routing
 Voice Portal Branding
 Web Portal Branding

NOTE: The pages under the Utilities menu option allow you to configure utilities for your
enterprise ID account. To add or modify information for a specific enterprise, see section 11
Configure Group Administration, Services, and Resources.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 212 OF 350
 10.1 Access Utilities Menu
On your Home page, in the Options List, click Utilities to access the Enterprise – Utilities
menu page.

Figure 189 Enterprise – Utilities Menu

10.2 BroadWorks Anywhere Number Lookup

Use the Enterprise – BroadWorks Anywhere Number Lookup page to verify whether a
number is used as a BroadWorks Anywhere number in your enterprise.

Figure 190 Enterprise – BroadWorks Anywhere Number Lookup

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click BroadWorks Anywhere Number

Lookup. The Enterprise – BroadWorks Anywhere Number Lookup page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 213 OF 350
 2) Enter the number to look for and then click Find. If you enter the number in E164
format, the number is used for the search as entered. If no country code is specified,
the system default country code is used.
The users that have this number configured as their BroadWorks Anywhere location
are listed at the bottom of the page. If the lookup returns no results, the “No Entries
Present” message appears.
3) To display the previous page, click OK.

10.3 Common Phone List

Use the Enterprise – Common Phone List page to display the common phone numbers
available for the enterprise. From this page, you can import a phone list (.CSV), add or
delete a common phone number, or select a common phone number to be modified.

Figure 191 Enterprise – Common Phone List

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Common Phone List. The Enterprise
– Common Phone List page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

10.3.1 Add Common Phone Number

Use the Enterprise – Common Phone List Add page to add a common phone number.
Phone numbers in the common phone list also appear in the enterprise directory.

Figure 192 Enterprise – Common Phone List Add

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Common Phone List. The Enterprise
– Common Phone List page appears.
2) Click Add. The Enterprise – Common Phone List Add page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 214 OF 350
 3) Type the name of the person associated with the phone number. The name can be
up to 20 characters.
4) Type the phone number from 2 through 30 digits (2 through 22 digits plus the leading
+ sign in E.164 number format). Enter the complete phone number. Additional
spaces and dashes are allowed but are not included in the number.
5) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
6) Click Cancel to display the previous page without saving your changes.

10.3.2 Modify Common Phone Number

Use the Enterprise – Common Phone List Modify page to modify a common phone
number.

Figure 193 Enterprise – Common Phone List Modify

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Common Phone List. The Enterprise
– Common Phone List page appears.
2) Click Modify. The Enterprise – Common Phone List Modify page appears.
3) Edit the current information. To edit information for a field, highlight and then type
over the text. Enter the complete phone numbers without spaces or dashes.

NOTE: If you click Delete to remove a common phone number, be advised that the Delete
function cannot be undone. Once you click Delete, your deletion is final. You can press Cancel
before you click Delete to avoid a deletion.

4) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
5) Click Cancel to display the previous page without saving your changes.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 215 OF 350
 10.3.3 Import Phone List
Use the Enterprise – Common Phone List Import page to import a phone list (in .CSV
format) into the common phone list. Phone numbers in the common phone list also
appear in the enterprise directory.

Figure 194 Enterprise – Common Phone List Import

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Common Phone List. The Enterprise
– Common Phone List page appears.
2) Click Import Phone List. The Enterprise - Import Phone List dialog box appears.
3) Select the .CSV file containing the phone list to import and click OK.
4) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

10.3.4 Delete Phone Number from Common Phone List

Use the Enterprise – Common Phone List page to delete a phone number from the
common phone number list for the enterprise.

Figure 195 Enterprise – Common Phone List

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Common Phone List. The Enterprise
– Common Phone List page appears.
2) Check the box beside the common phone number to delete.
3) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 216 OF 350
 10.4 Device Profile Authentication Password Rules
Use this item on the Enterprise – Utilities menu page to configure the rules for device
profile authentication passwords.

10.4.1 Set Device Profile Authentication Password Rules

Use the Enterprise – Device Profile Authentication Password Rules page to configure the
rules to follow when creating or updating device profile authentication passwords.
The settings you configure on this page are effective only if the Use Service
Provider/Enterprise Settings option has been selected for the Configuration setting by the
system administrator. Otherwise the settings have no effect and the system-level settings
are used. The selected Configuration option is displayed at the top of the page.

Figure 196 Enterprise – Device Profile Authentication Password Rules

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Device Profile Authentication

Password Rules. The Enterprise – Device Profile Authentication Password Rules
page appears.
2) Specify the password format using the following options:
− Indicate whether a password can contain the authentication user name. A check
mark means the password cannot contain the authentication user name. The
default is not checked.
− Indicate whether a password can contain the old password. A check mark
means the password cannot contain the old password. The default is not
checked.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 217 OF 350
 − Indicate whether a password can be the reverse of the old password. A check
mark means the password cannot be the reverse of the old password. The
default is not checked.
− Indicate whether a password must contain numbers. A check mark means that
the password must contain the selected number of numbers. The default is not
checked. The number of numbers can be set from 1 through 10.
− Indicate whether a password must contain uppercase alpha characters. A check
mark means that the password must contain the selected number of uppercase
alpha characters. The default is not checked. The number of uppercase alpha
characters can be set from 1 through 10.
− Indicate whether a password must contain lowercase alpha characters. A check
mark means that the password must contain the selected number of lowercase
alpha characters. The default is not checked. The number of lowercase alpha
characters can be set from 1 through 10.
− Indicate whether a password must contain non-alphanumeric characters. A
check mark means that the password must contain the selected number of non-
alphanumeric characters. The default is not checked. The number of non-
alphanumeric characters can be set from 1 through 10.
− Indicate the minimum length of the password. Click the drop-down list to select a
number from 3 through 40. The minimum length is also restricted by the
previously selected rules. The default is three.
3) Configure device profile lockout settings. For Authentication Lockout, select one of
the following options:
− Never lock out to not lock out device profiles due to authentication failure.
− Temporarily lock out after <X> authentication failures and select the number from
the drop-down list.
4) If you checked Temporarily lock out after <x> authentication failures, specify what to
do after a temporary lockout:
− Specify when to clear a temporary lockout:
− Select Wait <X> minutes before processing new authentication attempts and
select the number from the drop-down list.
− Select Double wait time (starting with 5 minutes) before processing new
authentication attempts.
− Specify whether to permanently lock out the device profile after a specified
number of temporary lockouts. To enable permanent lockout, check Permanently
lockout after <X> temporary lockouts and select the number from the drop-down
list. To disable it, deselect the option.
5) To be notified by e-mail when a device is permanently locked out, check When
authentication is permanently locked out, send email to and enter an e-mail address in
the text box. The e-mail address must be from 3 through 80 characters in
user@domain format. It can contain only one @ sign and the following characters:
letters, digits, !, #, $, %, &, *, +, -, /, =, _, {, }, |, ~, `, ., ?, ^, or single quotes.
6) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 218 OF 350
 10.5 Enterprise Directory
Use the Enterprise Directory menu item on the Enterprise – Utilities menu page to:
 Display Enterprise Directory
 Display Enterprise Directory Summary
 Display Enterprise Directory Detail
Use the Enterprise Directory menu item on the Enterprise – Utilities menu page to display
the enterprise directory. From this page, you can access an enterprise directory summary
or an enterprise directory detail report.

10.5.1 Display Enterprise Directory

Use the Enterprise – Enterprise Directory page to display the enterprise directory.
The Enterprise – Enterprise Directory page is a list page that contains an advanced
search. The Name, User ID, Phone Number, Extension, Department, Mobile, E-mail
Address, Yahoo ID, Group ID, and IM&P ID appear for each member in the enterprise
directory. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list pages allow you to
present the data several different ways. You can click the headings of a column to change
the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search
criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous. The advance search lets
you define specific search criteria to narrow your search and display a manageable list.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web
Interface Administration Guide.

Figure 197 Enterprise – Enterprise Directory

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Enterprise Directory. The Enterprise –
Enterprise Directory page appears.
2) Click Search to display the enterprise directory.

NOTE: If the enterprise directory contains more than 1,000 entries, you need to narrow the
search criteria to produce fewer entries. For more information on defining search criteria, see
the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

3) Click OK to display the previous page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 219 OF 350
 10.5.2 Display Enterprise Directory Summary
Use the Enterprise – Enterprise Directory page to display the enterprise directory.
The Enterprise – Enterprise Phone List (Summary) is a summary of the enterprise
directory. You can print this report.

Figure 198 Enterprise – Enterprise Phone List (Summary)

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Enterprise Directory. The Enterprise –
Enterprise Directory page appears.
2) Click Enterprise Directory Summary. The Enterprise – Enterprise Phone List
(Summary) report appears in a new window.

NOTE: You can print this report.

3) Click the x at the top right-hand corner of Enterprise – Enterprise Phone List
(Summary) window to close the report.
4) To display the previous page, click OK.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 220 OF 350
 10.5.3 Display Enterprise Directory Detail
Use the Enterprise – Enterprise Directory page to display the enterprise directory.
The Enterprise – Enterprise Phone List (Detail) is a detailed report of the enterprise
directory. You can print this report.

Figure 199 Enterprise – Enterprise Phone List (Detail)

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Enterprise Directory. The Enterprise –
Enterprise Directory page appears.
2) Click Enterprise Directory Detail. The Enterprise – Enterprise Phone List (Detail)
appears in a new window.

NOTE: You can print this report.

3) Click the x at the top right-hand corner of the Enterprise – Enterprise Phone List
(Detail) to close the report.
4) To display the previous page, click OK.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 221 OF 350
 10.6 Feature Access Codes
Use the Feature Access Codes menu item on the Enterprise – Utilities menu page to
configure feature access codes. Default feature access codes appear on this page. You
can type over existing codes to configure the defaults.

NOTE: For certain services, you can enter feature access codes and speed codes in addition to
phone numbers and extensions. For instance, you can configure the Auto Attendant to go
directly to a user’s voice mail by prefixing the destination number by the “Direct Voice Mail
Transfer” feature access code. You can use feature access codes and/or speed codes with the
following services:
Blind Transfer
Call Forwarding (Call Forwarding Always [CFA], Call Forwarding Busy [CFB], Call Forwarding
Group No Answer [CFNA], Selective Call Forwarding [SCF])
Auto Attendant
Hunt Group and Call Center
Simultaneous Ringing
Sequential Ringing
CommPilot Express

10.6.1 Configure Feature Access Codes

Use the Enterprise – Feature Access Codes page to configure feature access codes.

Figure 200 Enterprise – Feature Access Codes (Top of Page)

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 222 OF 350
 The Enterprise – Feature Access Codes page allows you configure the feature access
codes for the enterprise. The following table provides the default feature access codes.
Once you change these feature access codes, your new codes become the default values
for the groups in your enterprise.
1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Feature Access Codes. The
Enterprise– Feature Access Codes page appears.
2) Type the main feature access code for each feature. Feature access codes must be
from two through five characters. Valid characters include 0 – 9, A – D, *, and #.
Each feature access code must be unique. Make sure that feature access codes are
not the same as telephone extensions.
3) Type alternate feature access codes if required.
4) To disable a feature access code, uncheck the Enable box in the row of the feature
access code.
To enable a disabled feature access code, check the Enable box in the row of the
feature access code.

NOTE: By default, feature access codes are enabled.

5) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.
The following table lists the main default feature access codes and provides their
descriptions.
Code Name Description

*34 Advice Of Charge Activation Activates the Advice of Charge service for the next
call when the service is not enabled for all calls.

*77 Anonymous Call Rejection Activates the Anonymous Call Rejection service.
Activation After the user dials the feature access code, the
system plays an announcement to inform the user that
the service has been successfully activated. If the
service was already active, the user still receives the
announcement.

*87 Anonymous Call Rejection Deactivates the Anonymous Call Rejection service.
Deactivation After the user dials the feature access code, the
system plays an announcement to inform the user that
the service has been successfully deactivated, even if
the service was never activated.

*52* Anonymous Call Rejection Provides the status of the Anonymous Call Rejection
Interrogation service.

#8 Automatic Callback Deactivation Cancels all current pending callbacks.

#9 Automatic Callback Menu Access Provides access to an Interactive Voice Response

(IVR) menu that lists the current pending callbacks
and allows the user to cancel individual callbacks.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 223 OF 350
 Code Name Description

*14 BroadWorks Anywhere E.164 Allows users to dial E.164 numbers. The user dials
Dialing the feature access code as an alias to the “+” sign.
The system replaces the feature access code digits
with the “+” sign and resumes the call with an E.164
number.

*15 Call Bridge Allows a Shared Call Appearance (SCA) location to

initiate or join an SCA-Bridge, upon which the
Application Server automatically selects an
appropriate call appearance to bridge on.
The Call Bridge FAC becomes visible when one or
more of the following services are authorized
(enterprise or group) or assigned (user):
 BroadWorks Anywhere
 Shared Call Appearance
 Shared Call Appearance 5
 Shared Call Appearance 10
 Shared Call Appearance 15
 Shared Call Appearance 20
 Shared Call Appearance 25
 Shared Call Appearance 30
 Shared Call Appearance 35
 Executive
 Flexible Seating Guest
*72 Call Forwarding Always Activation Redirects incoming phone calls to another number,
such as a mobile phone or administrative assistant.
After dialing the feature access code, the user dials
the phone number where they want their calls to be
redirected.

*73 Call Forwarding Always Deactivates the Call Forwarding Always service.
Deactivation Upon deactivation, calls ring on the user’s phone
unless the user has another service set up, such as
Call Forwarding Busy, Call Forwarding No Answer, or
Do Not Disturb.

*21* Call Forwarding Always Allows the user to get the current status and
Interrogation destination of the Call Forwarding Always service.
The status is active or inactive and the destination is
voice mail or the current forwarding number.

*21 Call Forwarding Always to Voice Redirects incoming phone calls to the user’s voice
Mail Activation mail.

#21 Call Forwarding Always to Voice Deactivates the Call Forwarding Always To Voice Mail
Mail Deactivation service. Upon deactivation, calls ring on the user’s
phone unless the user has another service set up,
such as Call Forwarding Busy, Call Forwarding Busy
To Voice Mail, Call Forwarding No Answer, or Do Not
Disturb.

*90 Call Forwarding Busy Activation Redirects incoming phone calls to another number,
such as a mobile phone or administrative assistant,
when the user is on the phone. After dialing the
feature access code, the user dials the phone number
where they want their calls to be redirected.

*91 Call Forwarding Busy Deactivates the Call Forwarding Busy service. Upon
Deactivation deactivation, calls ring on the user’s phone unless the
user has another service set up, such as Call
Forwarding Always, Call Forwarding No Answer, or
Do Not Disturb.

*67* Call Forwarding Busy Allows the user to get the current status and
Interrogation destination of the Call Forwarding Busy service. The
status is active or inactive and the destination is voice
mail or the current forwarding number.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 224 OF 350
 Code Name Description

*40 Call Forwarding Busy To Voice Redirects incoming phone calls to voice mail when the
Mail Activation user is on the phone.

#40 Call Forwarding Busy To Voice Deactivates the Call Forwarding Busy To Voice Mail
Mail Deactivation service. Upon deactivation, calls ring on the user’s
phone unless they have set up another service such
as Call Forwarding Always, Call Forwarding Always
To Voice Mail, Call Forwarding No Answer, or Do Not
Disturb.

*92 Call Forwarding No Answer Redirects incoming phone calls to another number,
Activation such as a mobile phone or administrative assistant,
when the user does not answer the phone. After
dialing the feature access code, the user dials the
phone number where they want their calls to be
redirected.

*93 Call Forwarding No Answer Deactivates the Call Forwarding No Answer service.
Deactivation Upon deactivation, calls ring on the user’s phone
unless they have set up another service such as Call
Forwarding Busy, Call Forwarding Always, or Do Not
Disturb.

*61* Call Forwarding No Answer Allows the user to get the current status and
Interrogation destination of the Call Forwarding No Answer service.
The status is active or inactive and the destination is
voice mail or the current forwarding number.

*41 Call Forwarding No Answer To Redirects incoming phone calls to voice mail when the
Voice Mail Activation user does not answer the phone.

#41 Call Forwarding No Answer To Cancels the Call Forwarding Busy To Voice Mail
Voice Mail Deactivation service. Upon deactivation, calls ring on the user’s
phone unless they have set up another service such
as Call Forwarding Busy, Call Forwarding Busy To
Voice Mail, Call Forwarding Busy, or Do Not Disturb.

*94 Call Forwarding Not Reachable Redirects incoming phone calls to a different number
Activation when the user’s device is not accessible by
BroadWorks. After dialing the feature access code,
the user dials the phone number where they want
their calls to be redirected.

*95 Call Forwarding Not Reachable Deactivates the Call Forwarding Not Reachable
Deactivation service. After deactivation, should the user’s phone
become unreachable, calls are no longer rerouted to
an alternate device through the Call Forwarding Not
Reachable service.

*63* Call Forwarding Not Reachable Allows users to get the status of the Call Forwarding
Interrogation Not Reachable service.

#76 Call Forwarding Selective The Selective Call Forwarding service can be
Activation activated only if the service is configured with the
following minimum requirements:
 The Default Call Forward to phone number/SIP URI
is configured.
 At least one selective criterion is configured and
active.

#77 Call Forwarding Selective Deactivates the Call Forwarding Selective service.
Deactivation After the service has been deactivated, no criteria are
used when a call is being redirected.

*54* Calling Line ID Delivery Blocking Allows the user to get the status of the Calling Line ID
Interrogation Delivery Blocking service.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 225 OF 350
 Code Name Description

*67 Calling Line ID Delivery Blocking Hides the user’s calling line ID for the next call.
per Call Before placing a call, the user dials the feature access
code; then places the call as usual.

*31 Calling Line ID Delivery Blocking Prevents display of the user’s calling line ID for all
Persistent Activation calls.

#31 Calling Line ID Delivery Blocking Displays the user’s calling line ID for all calls.
Persistent Deactivation

*65 Calling Line ID Delivery per Call Displays the users calling line ID for the next call.

*68 Call Park Places a call on hold with the intent of retrieving it
from another extension. The call can be parked on
the user’s own extension or on another extension
within the same group.

*88 Call Park Retrieve Retrieves a call that has been parked.

*98 Call Pickup Answers the ringing phone within the assigned call
pickup group. If more than one phone in the assigned
call pickup group is ringing, the phone that has been
ringing the longest is answered. Pickup groups are
defined by the group administrator.

*48 Call Recording – Pause Allows the user to pause recording a call. The user’s
Call Recording service must be set to On Demand,
On Demand with User Initiated Start, or Always with
Pause/Resume mode; otherwise dialing the code has
no effect.

*49 Call Recording – Resume Allows the user to resume recording a call after the
recording has been paused.

*44 Call Recording – Start Allows the user to record an ongoing call or the next
outgoing call. The user’s Call Recording service must
be set to On Demand or On Demand with User
Initiated Start mode; otherwise dialing the code has no
effect.

*45 Call Recording – Stop Allows the user to stop recording a call. This option is
only available in On Demand with User Initiated Start
mode.

*11 Call Retrieve Retrieves an existing active call from another

endpoint. The user dials the feature access code
from the location where the call is to be retrieved.
This feature can be used from the primary location,
from a Shared Call Appearance alternate location,
from a BroadWorks Anywhere location, or from a
Flexible Seating Host to which you are currently
associated.
In addition, a user with the Executive service can
retrieve a call that is connected to an assistant
location, and a user with the Executive-Assistant
service can use the Call Retrieve feature access code
via the Executive-Assistant Initiate Call feature access
code to retrieve/pull an executive’s call to the
assistant’s location.

*69 Call Return Call the phone number of the last received call. Calls
can be returned only to numbers that are acceptable
according to the user’s Outgoing Calling Plan.

#92# Call Return Number Deletion Allows the user to delete the last incoming number for
the Call Return service.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 226 OF 350
 Code Name Description

*53* Call Waiting Interrogation Allows the user to get the status of the Call Waiting
service.

*43 Call Waiting Persistent Activation Turns on the Call Waiting service for all calls.

#43 Call Waiting Persistent Turns off the Call Waiting service for all calls.
Deactivation

*70 Cancel Call Waiting Turns off the Call Waiting service for the next call.

*99 Clear Voice Message Waiting Clears the audible (and visible for some devices)
Indicator message waiting indicator on the user’s phone.

*33* Communication Barring User- Activates the user’s current communication barring
Control Activation profile.

#33* Communication Barring User- Deactivates the user’s current communication barring
Control Deactivation profile.

*#33# Communication Barring User- Provides information about the user’s current
Control Query communication barring profile.

*56* Connected Line Identification Allows the user to get the status of the Connected
Restriction Interrogation Line Identification Restriction service.

*57 Customer Originated Trace Places a trace on the last number that called the user.

*97 Directed Call Pickup Answers a call at a specific extension within the
assigned call pickup group. To answer the ringing call
at an extension, the user dials the feature access
code followed by that extension.
Call pickup groups are defined by the group
administrator.

*33 Directed Call Pick-up with Dials an allowed prefix, followed by the assigned code
Barge-in and an extension to either pick up a ringing call in the
user’s group or to join an ongoing call with someone
in the group.

*55 Directed Voice Mail Transfer Transfers a caller on hold to voice mail.

*80 Diversion Inhibitor Prevents redirection services from being activated on

the terminating side of an unanswered call.

*78 Do Not Disturb Activation Activates the Do Not Disturb service. When the
service is active, the user’s phone does not ring and
all calls receive busy treatment, such as a voice
message.

*79 Do Not Disturb Deactivation Turns off the Do Not Disturb service.

#83 Escalate Call Supervision Call center agents can use this code to escalate calls
to a supervisor. A supervisor who is not on a call and
who does not have the Do Not Disturb service
enabled is considered available and the call is routed
to that supervisor. The caller is put on hold by the
agent when the escalation to the supervisor is
initiated.
The feature access code is available to agents with
Call Center – Standard or Call Center – Premium
service assigned.

#63 Executive-Assistant Call Push Allows an assistant to push a call to the executive to
whom the call is intended. It can be either an
incoming filtered call or a call initiated by the assistant
on behalf of the executive.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 227 OF 350
 Code Name Description

#64 Executive-Assistant Initiate Call Allows an assistant to initiate a call on behalf of an

executive.

#65 Executive-Assistant Opt-in Allows an executive assistant to opt in to an executive

pool.

#66 Executive-Assistant Opt-out Allows an executive assistant to opt out of an

executive pool.

#61 Executive Call Filtering Activation Activates executive call filtering.

#62 Executive Call Filtering Deactivates executive call filtering.

Deactivation

*26 Find-me/Follow-me Call Push Allows the user to send a call that they received from
a Find-me/Follow-me group back to the group to re-
alert the members.
This feature access code is only available to users
who are defined as BroadWorks users of a Find-
me/Follow-me group.

*22 Flash Call Hold Places a call on hold with the flash hook to place
another call. Users can toggle between the two calls
by pressing the flash-hook.

#72 Forced Forwarding Activation Activates forced forwarding for a call center queue.

#73 Forced Forwarding Deactivation Deactivates forced forwarding for a call center queue.

#58 Group Call Park Hunts for the first available user in the assigned call
park group and parks the call there.

#51 Hunt Group Busy Activation Enables the Hunt Group Busy policy for the user’s
hunt group. When the policy is enabled, all calls to
the hunt group receive busy treatment.

#52 Hunt Group Busy Deactivation Disables the Hunt Group Busy policy for the user’s
hunt group.

#53 Hunt Group Busy Interrogation Provides the status of the Hunt Group Busy policy for
the user’s hunt group.

#82 Initiate Silent Monitoring A supervisor can use this code to silently listen in on a
call handled by an agent that they are monitoring.
This feature access code is available to supervisors
with the Call Center Monitoring service assigned.

*66 Last Number Redial Dials the most recently dialed phone number called
from the user’s extension.

*96 Legacy Automatic Callback Allows users to camp on a busy called party. When
Invocation the user dials the feature access code after a call to a
busy destination, a callback request is created and the
user is automatically called back when the called party
hangs up.

#96 Legacy Automatic Callback Cancels all active Legacy Automatic Callback
Cancelation requests.

*12 Location Control Activation Allows users to activate a location. The feature
access code has to be dialed from the location to
activate. This feature can be used from a Shared Call
Appearance alternate location or a BroadWorks
Anywhere location.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 228 OF 350
 Code Name Description

*13 Location Control Deactivation Deactivates a location. The feature access code has
to be dialed from the location to deactivate. This
feature can be used from a Shared Call Appearance
alternate location or a BroadWorks Anywhere
location.

#80 Make Outgoing Call as Call Allows users working as call center agents to make
Center calls using a call center phone number. Users can
thus override the default setting configured by the
administrator.

#81 Make Personal Outgoing Call Allows users working as call center agents to make
calls using their own phone number. Users can thus
override the default setting configured by the
administrator.

#23 Mobility Call Anchoring Activation Anchors the mobile phone on BroadWorks for all calls.
This allows the user to use their personal mobile
device as their business phone and use originating
and terminating services available from their office
phone.

*23 Mobility Call Anchoring Activation Anchors the current call made from the same mobile
Per Call device from which the FAC is dialed on BroadWorks.
This allows the user to use their personal mobile
device to make a business call. The call is processed
as if it were originated from the user's office phone.

#24 Mobility Call Anchoring Disables call anchoring for all calls to and from the
Deactivation mobile.

*24 Mobility Call Anchoring Disables call anchoring for the current call made from
Deactivation Per Call the same mobile device from which the FAC is dialed.
This allows the user to use their business mobile
device to make a personal call. The call is processed
in the mobile network.

#29 Mobility Calling Line ID Activation Sets the calling line ID phone number to the user's
mobile phone number.

*28 Mobility Calling Line ID Activation Sets the calling line ID phone number of the mobile
Per Call device from which the FAC is dialed to the device's
phone number for the current call.

#28 Mobility Calling Line ID Sets the calling line ID phone number to the user's
Deactivation fixed line calling line ID.

*29 Mobility Calling Line ID Sets the calling line ID phone number of the mobile
Deactivation Per Call device from which the FAC is dialed to the calling line
ID of the user's main line for the current call.

#84 Monitoring Next Call Allows call center supervisors to request Silent
Monitoring for the next call center call.

*60 Music On Hold Per-Call Deactivates the Music On Hold service for the current
Deactivation calls.

#70 Night Service Activation Manual Activates Night Service for a specified call center at
Override the time of activation. Calls incoming to the queue are
provided with the Night Service Manual Override
announcement and transferred to the queue
configured for the regular Night Service. The queue
remains in that state until the Night Service Manual
Override service is deactivated.

#71 Night Service Deactivation Deactivates Night Service Manual Override and the
Manual Override call center returns to its configured behavior.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 229 OF 350
 Code Name Description

*610 No Answer Timer Sets the numbers of rings before No-Answer handling
is applied to the Voice Messaging, Third-Party Voice
Mail Support, Call Forwarding No Answer, Call
Forwarding No Answer To Voice Mail, and Sequential
Ringing services.

*84 Number Portability Activates the number portability announcement.

Announcement Activation

*85 Number Portability Deactivates the number portability announcement.

Announcement Deactivation

*71 Per Call Account Code Charges a call to an account code assigned to the
user.

*50 Push to Talk Provides an intercom-like functionality where the user

can call another party and be instantly connected.

*51* Selective Call Rejection Allows the user to get the status of the Selective Call
Interrogation Rejection service.

*75 Speed Dial 100 Calls the two-digit speed dial number.

*74 Speed Dial 8 Calls the two to nine-digit speed dial number.

*47 Sustained Authorization Code Unlocks user’s calls. When the user is required to
Activation (calls unlocking) provide authorization codes for outgoing calls, this
code allows them to “unlock” this requirement. Having
unlocked code activation, the user in no longer
prompted for an authorization code and their calls
proceed without interruption.

*37 Sustained Authorization Code Locks user’s calls. When the user dials this feature
Deactivation (calls locking) access code, the services that require authorization
codes for outgoing calls return to their normal
behavior and prompt the user for an authorization
code.

*86 Voice Mail Retrieval Allows users to retrieve BroadWorks and third-party
voice mail.

*62 Voice Portal Access Allows users to access their voice portal.

10.7 Password Rules

Use the Password Rules menu item on the Enterprise – Utilities menu page to set
password rules.

10.7.1 Set Password Rules

Use the Enterprise – Password Rules page to configure the password rules to be used
when creating or updating passwords.
The Enterprise – Password Rules page allows you to define how group administrators and
users create and maintain their passwords. You can choose to set the password rules for
one of two levels of users:
 All group administrators: In this case, as an enterprise administrator, you can set the
password rules for group administrators or for group administrators and users.
 All group administrators and users: In this case, you can only display the password
rules because the system provider has set them for all administrators and users.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 230 OF 350
 Figure 201 Enterprise – Password Rules

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Password Rules. The Enterprise –
Password Rules page appears.
2) Determine who the rules apply to. Select one of the following options:
− Select Group Administrators Only if you want the rules to apply to group
administrators. Group administrators can set different password rules for their
users.
− Select Group Administrators and Users if you want the rules to apply to group
administrators and users. The group administrator’s Password Rules page is
read-only.
− Select Group Administrators and Users use external authentication to turn on
external authentication. When this option is selected, group administrators and
users without a password must use external authentication to log in to
BroadWorks. Their passwords cannot be created or modified through the web
portal. When this option is deselected, users without a password cannot log in to
BroadWorks.

NOTE: Users without a password can be converted to normal users by having a password
assigned to them.

− Check Allow users to be created on web portal to allow users (without

passwords) to be created on the web portal. These users can log in to
BroadWorks using only external authentication. When this option is turned
off, users cannot be created on the web portal.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 231 OF 350
 3) Specify the password format:
− Indicate whether a password cannot be the same as the login ID. A check mark
means the password cannot be the same as the login ID. The default is not
checked.
− Indicate whether a password cannot contain an old password. A check mark
means the password cannot contain the old password. The default is not
checked.
− Indicate whether a password cannot be the reverse of an old password. A check
mark means the password cannot be the reverse of the old password. The
default is not checked.
− Indicate whether a password must contain numbers. A check mark means that
the password must contain the selected number of numbers. The default is not
checked. The number of numbers can be set from 1 through 10.
− Indicate whether a password must contain uppercase alpha characters. A check
mark means that the password must contain the selected number of uppercase
alpha characters. The default is not checked. The number of uppercase alpha
characters can be set from 1 through 10.
− Indicate whether a password must contain lowercase alpha characters. A check
mark means that the password must contain the selected number of lowercase
alpha characters. The default is not checked. The number of lowercase alpha
characters can be set from 1 through 10.
− Indicate whether a password must contain non-alphanumeric characters. A
check mark means that the password must contain the selected number of non-
alphanumeric characters. The default is not checked. The number of non-
alphanumeric characters can be set from 1 through 10.
− Select the minimum length of the password from the drop-down list. The
minimum length is also restricted by previously selected rules. The default is six.
4) For Passwords expire, select from the following:
− Never, if you do not want passwords to expire
− After <X> Days, and type the number of days (from 1 through 1999) to make
passwords expire after a set number of days
5) For Disable login, select from the following:
− Never, to indicate that login is never disabled.
− After <X> failed login attempts, and select the maximum allowed number of login
attempts from the drop-down list. After the set number of failed login attempts,
the user’s account is locked and the user cannot log in to BroadWorks.
6) To send an e-mail notification when a user account is locked, check When login is
disabled, send e-mail to, and type the e-mail address to send notification to.
The e-mail address must be from 3 through 80 characters in user@domain format. It
can contain only one @ sign and the following characters: letters, digits, !, #, $, %, &,
*, +, -, /, =, _, {,}, |, ~, `, ., ?, ^, or single quotes.
7) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 232 OF 350
 10.8 Passcode Rules
Use this menu item on the Enterprise – Utilities menu page to set passcode rules for the
voice portal.

10.8.1 Set Passcode Rules

Use the Enterprise – Passcode Rules page to configure the passcode rules that affect
access to the voice portal.

Figure 202 Enterprise – Passcode Rules

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Passcode Rules. The Enterprise –
Passcode Rules page appears.
2) Check the following rules to apply to the format of the passcode:
− Indicate whether a passcode must not be the user’s own extension or phone
number. A check mark means the passcode cannot be the user’s own extension
or phone number. The default is not checked.
− Indicate whether a passcode must not be the user’s own extension or phone
number reversed. A check mark means the passcode cannot be the user’s own
extension or phone number reversed. The default is not checked.
− Indicate whether a passcode must not contain a configured number of repeated
digits and enter the number. A check mark means the password cannot contain
a configured number of repeated digits. The default is not checked.
− Indicate whether a passcode must not contain configured numbers of sequentially
ascending or sequentially descending digits and enter the numbers. A check
mark means the password cannot contain configured numbers of sequentially
ascending or sequentially descending digits. The default is not checked.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 233 OF 350
 − Indicate whether a passcode must not be repeating patterns, for example,
"514514". A check mark means the password cannot be repeating patterns. The
default is not checked.
− Indicate whether a passcode must not be any of the configured number of last
passcodes and enter the number. For example, if you enter “3”, the passcode
cannot be any of the last three passcodes. The default is not checked.
− Indicate whether a passcode must not be the reverse of the old passcode. A
check mark means the passcode cannot be the user’s old passcode reversed.
The default is not checked.
− Indicate the minimum and maximum number of characters for passcodes. Select
the minimum and the maximum number of characters from the drop-down lists.
3) Specify when passcodes expire. The default is Never.
− Select Never to indicate that passcodes do not expire.
− Otherwise, select After <X> Days and type the number of days before passcodes
expire in the input box.
4) Specify when logins are disabled. The default is Never.
− Select Never to indicate that login attempts are not disabled.
− Otherwise, select After <X> failed login attempts and select the number of login
attempts from the drop-down list. Check When login is disabled, send e-mail to,
and type the e-mail address to send notification of failed login attempts.
The e-mail address must be from 3 through 80 characters in user@domain
format. It can contain only one @ sign and the following characters: letters,
digits, !, #, $, %, &, *, +, -, /, =, _, {, }, |, ~, `, ., ?, ^, or single quotes.
5) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

10.9 SIP Authentication Password Rules (AS Mode)

Use this item on the Enterprise – Utilities menu page to configure rules for SIP
authentication passwords. This item is not available in XS mode.

10.9.1 Set SIP Authentication Password Rules

Use the Enterprise – SIP Authentication Password Rules page to configure the rules to
follow when creating or updating SIP authentication passwords.
The settings you configure on this page are effective only if the Use Service
Provider/Enterprise Settings option has been selected for the Configuration setting by the
system administrator. Otherwise the settings have no effect and the system-level settings
are used. The selected Configuration option is displayed at the top of the page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 234 OF 350
 Figure 203 Enterprise – SIP Authentication Password Rules

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click SIP Authentication Password Rules.
The Enterprise – SIP Authentication Password Rules page appears.
2) Specify the password format using the following options:
− Indicate whether a password can contain the authentication user name. A check
mark means the password cannot contain the authentication user name. The
default is not checked.
− Indicate whether a password can contain the old password. A check mark
means the password cannot contain the old password. The default is not
checked.
− Indicate whether a password can be the reverse of the old password. A check
mark means the password cannot be the reverse of the old password. The
default is not checked.
− Indicate whether a password must contain numbers. A check mark means that
the password must contain the selected number of numbers. The default is not
checked. The amount of numbers can be set from 1 through 10.
− Indicate whether a password must contain uppercase alpha characters. A check
mark means that the password must contain the selected number of uppercase
alpha characters. The default is not checked. The amount of uppercase alpha
characters can be set from 1 through 10.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 235 OF 350
 − Indicate whether a password must contain lowercase alpha characters. A check
mark means that the password must contain the selected number of lowercase
alpha characters. The default is not checked. The amount of lowercase alpha
characters can be set from 1 through 10.
− Indicate whether a password must contain non-alphanumeric characters. A
check mark means that the password must contain the selected number of non-
alphanumeric characters. The default is not checked. The amount of non-
alphanumeric characters can be set from 1 through 10.
− Indicate the minimum length of the password. Click the drop-down list to select a
number from 3 through 40. The minimum length is also restricted by the
previously selected rules. The default is 3.
3) Specify device endpoint lockout settings. For Authentication Lockout, select one of
the following options:
− Never lock out, if you do not want device endpoints to be locked out due to
authentication failure.
− Temporarily lock out after <X> authentication failures and select the number from
the drop-down list.
4) If you checked Temporarily lock out after <X> authentication failures, specify what to
do after a temporary device endpoint lockout:
− Specify when to clear a temporary lockout:
− Select Wait <X> minutes before processing new authentication attempts and
select the number from the drop-down list.
− Select Double wait time (starting with 5 minutes) before processing new
authentication attempts.
− Specify whether to permanently lock out the device endpoint after a specified
number of temporary lockouts. To enable permanent lockout, check Permanently
lockout after <X> temporary lockouts and select the number from the drop-down
list. To disable it, deselect the option.
5) Specify trunk group lockout settings. For Authentication Lockout, select one of the
following options:
− Never lock out if you do not want to enable trunk group lockouts.
− Temporarily lock out after <X> authentication failures and select the number from
the drop-down list.
6) If you checked Temporarily lock out after <X> authentication failures, specify what to
do after a temporary trunk group lockout:
− Specify when to clear a temporary lockout:
− Select Wait <X> minutes before processing new authentication attempts and
select the number from the drop-down list.
− Select Double wait time (starting with 5 minutes) before processing new
authentication attempts.
− Specify whether to permanently lock out the trunk group after a specified number
of temporary lockouts. To enable permanent lockout, check Permanently lockout
after <X> temporary lockouts and select the number from the drop-down list. To
disable it, deselect the option.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 236 OF 350
 7) To be notified by e-mail when a device endpoint or a trunk group is permanently
locked out, check When authentication is permanently locked out, send email to and
enter an e-mail address in the text box.
The e-mail address must be from 3 through 80 characters in user@domain format. It
can contain only one @ sign and the following characters: letters, digits, !, #, $, %, &,
*, +, -, /, =, _, {,}, |, ~, `, ., ?, ^, or single quotes.
8) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

10.10 Answer Confirmation

Use the Answer Confirmation menu item on the Enterprise – Utilities menu page to
configure an answer confirmation for forking services. This is used with the Simultaneous
Ringing Personal and Sequential Ringing services to (optionally) prompt the called party to
enter a digit to confirm the acceptance of the call.
Configuring an answer confirmation ensures that a call is connected to a live party or goes
to the user’s BroadWorks mailbox. The answering party may be prompted to enter a
confirmation digit before being connected to the calling party. Alerting continues for all
other destinations until the successful collection of a confirmation digit. Upon collection of
a successful confirmation digit, the call is connected and other forking destinations are
released as usual.

10.10.1 Configure Answer Confirmation

Use the Enterprise – Answer Confirmation page to configure the answer confirmation.

Figure 204 Enterprise – Answer Confirmation

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Answer Confirmation. The Enterprise
– Answer Confirmation page appears.
2) Select the type of announcement:
− Select “System Announcement” to enable the default system prompt. The default
prompt is played as a confirmation request announcing the message Please
press any key to complete the call.
− Select “Custom Announcement” to upload a custom announcement, and then
click Browse to select the custom announcement.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 237 OF 350
 3) In the Confirmation Timeout text box, enter the time in seconds. If no digit is collected
before a timeout occurs, the call leg is released. The timeout value is the time (in
seconds) before the call is released. The default value is “5 seconds”. You can
configure a range from 2 through 30 seconds.
4) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

10.11 Device Management Event Queues

Use the Device Management Event Queues menu item on the Enterprise – Utilities menu
page to view or cancel device management events generated by a user or administrator in
your enterprise.
Events can be cancelled before they are completed, that is, while they are waiting to be
processed or are being processed.

10.11.1 View or Cancel In Progress and Pending Events

You use the In Progress/Pending tab on the Enterprise – Device Management Event
Queues page, to view detailed information on or cancel in progress and pending device
management events triggered by a user or administrator in your enterprise.

Figure 205 Enterprise – Device Management Event Queues – In Progress/Pending

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Device Management Event Queues.
The Enterprise – Device Management Event Queues page appears.
The In Progress/Pending tab appears by default listing events that are either being
processed or waiting to be processed, which can be either pending or queued
internally. The events are shown in order of processing, with the first event in the list
being currently processed or next in line to be processed.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
2) To cancel an event, check the Cancel box in the row of the event.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 238 OF 350
 NOTE: An event being processed on another host can only be cancelled on that host.

3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

10.11.2 View Completed Events

You use the Completed tab on the Enterprise – Device Management Event Queues page,
to view detailed information on the completed device management events triggered by a
user or administrator in your enterprise.

Figure 206 Enterprise – Device Management Event Queues – Completed

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Device Management Event Queues.
The Enterprise – Device Management Event Queues page appears.
2) Click the Completed tab. This tab lists the events that have completed, ordered by
completion time. This includes events cancelled while queued internally.
This page is a list page. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list
pages allow you to search several different ways. You can click the heading of a
column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the
data to specify search criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Administration Guide.
3) Click OK to exit the page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 239 OF 350
 10.12 LDAP Directory
Use the LDAP Directory menu item on the Enterprise – Utilities menu page to configure
the LDAP Directory for users in the enterprise.

10.12.1 Configure LDAP Directory

Use the Enterprise – LDAP Directory page to configure the Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol (LDAP) directory for the enterprise.
The Enterprise – LDAP Directory page allows you to configure the LDAP directory for
groups.

Figure 207 Enterprise – LDAP Directory

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click LDAP Directory. The Enterprise –
LDAP Directory page appears.
2) Type or select data in the following input boxes:
− Directory Address: Enter the address of the LDAP server, which should be an IP
address or a fully qualified domain name, which should be an IP address or a fully
qualified domain name. It can be a maximum of 80 characters and cannot
contain spaces or an @ character.
− Directory Port: Enter the port of the LDAP server, which should be an integer
from 1 through 65535. The default is 389.
− Search Base: Enter the search base of the LDAP server. The search base is the
search root suffix, which should reflect the domain name of the site you are
searching.
− If the LDAP server requires connections protected by the Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL) security protocol, check Use SSL. The use of SSL requires BroadWorks to

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 240 OF 350
 store a digital certificate from your directory server. Request your system provider
administrator to load your directory server’s certificate for you.
− If the LDAP server requires authentication, check Requires Authentication. Then
specify the authenticated DN (distinguished name) and password. The
authenticated DN should be a unique reference to the authenticated user within
the directory tree. The password is the password for the authenticated user.
− If the LDAP server supports sort control, check Supports Sort Control. (Using this
control speeds up the search.)
− If the LDAP server supports paged results control, check Supports Paged Results
Control. (Using this control speeds up the search.)
− You can specify a search filter to include in all directory server searches in the
Search Filter text box. By default, the suggested search filter is
“(telephoneNumber=*)”, which will restrict all directory server searches made
using the CommPilot Call Manager to directory users with the telephoneNumber
attribute specified.
− Check Always Include Search Attribute in Search Filter if you want to force the
current Search Attribute to be included in all directory server searches, even
when the user leaves search parameters blank. By default, a search with blank
parameters will use only the value of the Search Filter box described above. For
example, “(telephoneNumber=*)”. If you check this box, the system will also
include the current search attribute with a wildcard character. For example,
“(telephoneNumber=*)(cn=*)”.
− You can use the table at the bottom of the web page to specify up to four
attributes for the system to return from the directory server and appear in the
CommPilot Call Manager after each successful search. In the Attribute Name
column of the table, specify the attributes you wish to display, and assign a text
label to appear for each attribute in the Web Label column. You must select one
of the attributes listed in this table to be the current search attribute. Click the
button corresponding to your choice in the Search Attribute column.
3) Save your changes: Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

10.13 Service Pack Migration

Use the Service Pack Migration menu item on the Enterprise – Utilities menu page to:
 Display Service Pack Migration Tasks
 Add Service Pack Migration Task
 Modify Service Pack Migration Task
 Copy Service Pack Migration Task
 Delete Service Pack Migration Task
 Report on Service Pack Migration Task
 Terminate Service Pack Migration Task

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 241 OF 350
 10.13.1 Display Service Pack Migration Tasks
Use the Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks page to display the service pack
migration tasks for your enterprise. From this page, you can add or copy a service pack
migration task, or select a service pack migration task to be modified or deleted. You can
also view the status of an in-progress or processed task.

Figure 208 Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Service Pack Migration. The
Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks page appears.
Following is a table of the columns on this page with a description for each.
Column Description

Copy Click this check box to copy a service pack migration task.

Scheduled Start Date The date the service pack migration task is scheduled to run.

Scheduled Start Time The time of day the service pack migration task is scheduled to run.

Description The description of the service pack migration task.

Status The status of the service pack migration task. Status states include the
following:
Pending: Indicates that the service pack migration task is scheduled to run
in the future.
Processing: The task is currently being processed.
Awaiting edits: Indicates that the service pack migration task has been
copied from another task and is awaiting edits to, at the minimum, the
Scheduled Start Time to run. Once it is edited, the task will display a
Pending status.
Completed: Indicates the task is complete. Click on this task to display a
summary report of the service pack migration task.
Completed with errors: The task has completed but errors occurred during
execution.
Expired: The task did not start within the configured time window. The task
is now cancelled and will not run unless it is rescheduled to a later time.
Stopped by system: Indicates the task was stopped by the system. The
reason for this is either it encountered errors or it was not complete at the
time it reached the execution time limit. You can copy this task to be
rescheduled or modified as required.
Terminated by administrator: Indicates the service pack migration task
was terminated by an administrator. You can copy this task to be
rescheduled or modified as required.

Edit Click this link to edit the service pack migration task.

2) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 242 OF 350
 10.13.2 Add Service Pack Migration Task
Use the Service Pack Migration Wizard: Step 1 of 5 – Schedule New Task page to add a
new service pack migration task to perform on groups or users.

Figure 209 Service Pack Migration Wizard: Step 1 of 5 – Schedule New Task

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Service Pack Migration. The
Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks page appears.
2) Click Add Migration Task Wizard. The Service Pack Migration Wizard: Step 1 of 5 –
Schedule New Task page appears. This is the first page of the Service Pack
Migration wizard.
3) Type information specific to the new service pack migration task. To move between
input boxes, use the TAB key on the keyboard, or click in the next input box.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 243 OF 350
 Following is a table of the input boxes and a description for each. Required input boxes
are indicated with an asterisk (*).
Setting Name Allowed Values Description or Instruction Example

Description * 1 through 80 The description of the service pack Call Waiting

characters. Cannot migration task.
contain a * character.

Scheduled Start Valid date in The date the service pack migration 3/27/2014
Date * MM/DD/YYYY task is scheduled to run. Type the
format. date in month/day/year format or click
on the calendar icon to select the
date from the pop-up calendar. To
select a date, click the calendar icon
to the right of the text box for a date.
On the calendar box, to change the
month, click either of the inner circles
with arrowheads. To change the
year, click either of the outer circles
with arrowheads. Then, click the day.
The selected date appears in the text
box

Scheduled Start Time in HH:MM Time of day the service pack 12:00 AM
Time * format, with 0 < HH migration tasks is scheduled to run.
<= 12, 00 <= MM <= Type the time in Hour: Minute format
59. and select AM or PM from the drop-
down.

Expire after <x> 1 through 168 The number of hours following the 6
hours * scheduled start date and time after
which the task expires. If the task
does not start within the configured
timeframe because too many tasks
are running, it is cancelled and will
not run unless it is rescheduled to a
later date and/or time.

Automatically 1 through 9 The period of time defined for the 1

stop after <x> execution of the service pack
hours migration task. This setting is
intended to prevent a service pack
migration task from extending beyond
a scheduled maintenance window.

When the task is 3 through 80 The optional e-mail address to be adm@abcdistr

finished, E-mail characters in notified of the results of the service [Link]
the results to user@domain pack migration task. Check the
format. check box to the left of the When the
Can contain only one task is finished, E-mail the results to
@ sign and the label and type the e-mail address in
following characters: the input box to the right.
letters, digits, !, #, $,
%, &, *, +, -, /, =, _, {,
}, |, ~, `, ., ?, ^, or
single quotes.

Abort the The number of errors The optional limit of errors permitted 5
migration after (nn) can be from 1 during the execution of the service
<x> errors occur through 99. pack migration task. The task is
terminated when the limit is reached.
Check the box to the left of the Abort
the migration after <x> errors occur
label and then type the number of
errors permitted before a service
pack migration task terminates in the
input box to the right.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 244 OF 350
 Setting Name Allowed Values Description or Instruction Example

Reporting Options

Report all users in the migrated groups This report contains all users in the
group included in the service pack
migration task.

Report only users matching the selection This report contains all users
criteria affected by the service pack
migration task.

Service Quantity Options

Automatically increase the allocations to Automatically increases service

migrated users as needed quantities of related services.

Terminate the migration for any group with Prohibits service pack migration for Terminate the
Service Quantity violations groups with inadequate service migration for
quantities (recommended). any group with
Service
Quantity
violations

4) To save this information and display the next setup page, click Next >. The Service
Pack Migration Wizard: Step 2 of 5 – Select Groups to Migrate page appears. To
save the information and return to the Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks
page, click Finish. To cancel the Service Pack Migration Wizard and return to the
Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks page, click Cancel.

Figure 210 Service Pack Migration Wizard: Step 2 of 5 – Select Groups to Migrate

5) Click Search to find all groups or use the search criteria to find a particular group.
The groups appear in the Available Groups column.
6) To migrate all groups, check Migrate all groups.
7) To migrate specific groups, select several groups in sequential order and click the first
name. Then hold down the SHIFT key on the keyboard and click the last name. To
select several groups, but not in a particular order, click the names while holding down
the CTRL key on the keyboard.
− To move only selected groups from one box to the other, click Add >.
− To move all the groups from one box to the other, click Add All >>.
Assigned groups appear in the Assigned Groups box.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 245 OF 350
 8) To remove groups, click the groups or several groups to move to the Available
Groups box and click Remove <. You can select some or all of the groups in a
column. To select several items in sequential order, click the first group, hold down
the SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last group. To select several groups,
but not in a particular order, click the names while holding down the CTRL key on the
keyboard.
To move all the assigned groups from one box to the other, click Remove All <<.
Unassigned groups appear in the Available Groups box.
9) To save this information and display the next setup page, click Next >. The Service
Pack Migration Wizard: Step 3 of 5 – User Selection Criteria page appears. To save
the information and return to the Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks page,
click Finish. To cancel the Service Pack Migration Wizard and return to the
Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks page, click Cancel.

Figure 211 Service Pack Migration Wizard: Step 3 of 5 – User Selection Criteria

10) Check the criteria to use in migration.

Following is a table of the criteria and a description for each.
Criteria Description

Migrate users who have all of the Migrates all users who are assigned all of the services and
specified services and service packs service packs checked on this page.

Migrate users who have any of the Migrates all users who are assigned any of the services or
specified services and service packs service packs checked on this page.

Migrate users who have none of the Migrates all users who are not assigned any of the services
specified services and service packs or service packs checked on this page.

NOTE: To migrate all users, deselect all check boxes and choose to migrate either users who
have all of the specified services and service packs, or users who have none of the specified
services and service packs.

11) Check the services and service packs to migrate in the Migrate check boxes.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 246 OF 350
 12) To save this information and display the next setup page, click Next >. The Service
Pack Migration Wizard: Step 4 of 5 – Services and Packs to Remove page appears.
To save the information and return to the Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks
page, click Finish. To cancel the Service Pack Migration Wizard and return to the
Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks page, click Cancel.

Figure 212 Service Pack Migration Wizard: Step 4 of 5 – Services and Packs to Remove

13) Check the service packs and services to remove in the Remove check boxes. Retain
user configurations for existing services by removing and replacing service packs or
services with service packs that include the same services.
14) To save this information and display the next setup page, click Next >. The Service
Pack Migration Wizard: Step 5 of 5 – Services and Packs to Assign page appears. To
save the information and return to the Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks
page, click Finish. To cancel the Service Pack Migration Wizard and return to the
Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks page, click Cancel.

Figure 213 Service Pack Migration Wizard: Step 5 of 5 – Services and Packs to Assign

15) Check the service packs and services to assign to each user included in the migration
in the Assign check boxes.
16) To save the information and return to the Service Pack Migration Tasks page, click
Finish.
To cancel the Service Pack Migration Wizard and return to the Enterprise – Service
Pack Migration Tasks page, click Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 247 OF 350
 10.13.3 Modify Service Pack Migration Task
Use the Enterprise – Modify Service Pack Migration Task page to modify a service pack
migration task. Only service pack migration tasks in the Pending or Awaiting edits state
can be modified.

Figure 214 Enterprise – Modify Service Pack Migration Task

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Service Pack Migration. The
Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the service pack migration task to edit. The
Enterprise – Modify Service Pack Migration Task page displays the Schedule settings
for the service pack migration task, as indicated by the active tab.
Edit the Schedule settings: Following is a table of the input boxes with either a
description or instruction for each. Required settings are indicated with an asterisk (*).
Setting Name Allowed Values Description or Instruction Example

Description * 1 through 80 The description of the service pack Call Waiting

characters. Cannot migration task.
contain a * character.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 248 OF 350
 Setting Name Allowed Values Description or Instruction Example

Scheduled Start Valid date in The date the service pack migration 3/27/2014
Date * MM/DD/YYYY format. task is scheduled to run. Type the
date in month/day/year format or click
on the calendar icon to select the
date from the pop-up calendar. To
select a date, click the calendar icon
to the right of the text box for a date.
On the calendar box, to change the
month, click either of the inner circles
with arrowheads. To change the
year, click either of the outer circles
with arrowheads. Then, click the day.
The selected date appears in the text
box

Scheduled Start Time in HH:MM Time of day the service pack 12:00 AM
Time * format, with 0 < HH <= migration tasks is scheduled to run.
12, 00 <= MM <= 59. Type the time in Hour: Minute format
and select A.M. or P.M. from the
drop-down list.

Expire after <x> 1 through 168. The number of hours following the 6
hours * scheduled start date and time after
which the task expires. If the task
does not start within the configured
timeframe because too many tasks
are running, it is cancelled and will
not run unless it is rescheduled to a
later date and/or time.

Automatically 1 through 9. The period of time defined for the 1

stop after <x> execution of the service pack
hours * migration task. This setting is
intended to prevent a service pack
migration task from extending beyond
a scheduled maintenance window.

When the task is 3 through 80 The optional e-mail address to be adm@abcdist

finished, E-mail characters in notified of the results of the service [Link]
the results to user@domain format. pack migration task. Check the
Can contain only one check box to the left of the When the
@ sign and the task is finished, E-mail the results to
following characters: label and type the e-mail address in
letters, digits, !, #, $, the input box to the right.
%, &, *, +, -, /, =, _, {, },
|, ~, `, ., ?, ^, or single
quotes.

Abort the The number of errors The optional limit of errors permitted 5
migration after (nn) can be from 1 during the execution of the service
<x> errors occur through 99. pack migration task. The task is
terminated when the limit is reached.
Check the check box to the left of the
Abort the migration after <x> errors
occur label and type the number of
errors permitted before a service
pack migration task terminates in the
input box to the right.

Reporting Options

Report all users in the migrated groups This report contains all users in
the group included in the service
pack migration task.

Report only users matching the selection This report contains all users
criteria affected by the service pack
migration task.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 249 OF 350
 Setting Name Allowed Values Description or Instruction Example

Service Quantity Options

Automatically increase the allocations to Automatically increases service

migrated users as needed quantities of related services.

Terminate the migration for any group with Prohibits service pack migration for
Service Quantity violations groups with inadequate service
quantities (recommended).

3) To edit the Groups settings for the service pack migration task, click Groups. The
Groups tab displays the group settings for the service pack migration task.

Figure 215 Enterprise – Modify Service Pack Migration Task – Groups

4) To migrate all the groups, check Migrate all groups.

5) To migrate specific groups, click Search to find all groups or use the search criteria to
find a particular group. The groups appear in the Available Groups column.
6) To migrate specific groups, select several groups in sequential order and click the first
name. Then hold down the SHIFT key on the keyboard and click the last name. To
select several groups, but not in a particular order, click the names while holding down
the CTRL key on the keyboard.
− To move only selected groups from one box to the other, click Add >.
− To move all the groups from one box to the other, click Add All >>.
Assigned groups appear in the Assigned Groups box.
7) To remove groups, click the groups or several groups to move to the Available
Groups box and click Remove <. You can select some or all of the groups in a
column. To select several items in sequential order, click the first group, hold down
the SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last group. To select several groups,
but not in a particular order, click the names while holding down the CTRL key on the
keyboard.
To move all the assigned groups from one box to the other, click Remove All <<.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 250 OF 350
 Unassigned groups appear in the Available Groups box.
8) To edit the Select user’s settings for the service pack migration task, click Select
users. The Select users tab displays the user settings for the service pack migration
task.

Figure 216 Enterprise – Modify Service Pack Migration Task – Select Users

9) Edit the Select user’s settings. Check the criteria to use in migration.
Following is a table of the criteria and a description for each.
Criteria Description

Migrate users who have all of the specified Migrates all users who are assigned all of the
services and service packs services and service packs checked on this page.

Migrate users who have any of the specified Migrates all users who are assigned any of the
services and service packs services or service packs checked on this page.

Migrate users who have none of the Migrates all users who are not assigned any of the
specified services and service packs services or service packs checked on this page.

NOTE: To migrate all users, deselect all check boxes and choose to migrate either users who
have all of the specified services and service packs or users who have none of the specified
services and service packs.

10) Check the services and service packs to migrate in the Migrate check boxes.
To edit the Remove settings for the service pack migration task, click the Remove tab.
The Remove tab displays the service and service pack removal settings for the
service pack migration task.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 251 OF 350
 Figure 217 Enterprise – Modify Service Pack Migration Task – Remove

11) Check the service packs and services to remove in the Remove check boxes. Retain
user configurations for existing services by removing and replacing service packs or
services with service packs that include the same services.
12) To edit the Assign settings for the service pack migration task, click the Assign tab.
The Assign tab displays the service assignment settings for the service pack migration
task.

Figure 218 Enterprise – Modify Service Pack Migration Task – Assign

13) Check the service packs and services to assign to each user included in the migration
in the Assign check boxes.

NOTE: Remember to remove the check mark for service packs and services that you do not
want to assign.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 252 OF 350
 14) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

10.13.4 Copy Service Pack Migration Task

Use the Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks page to copy a service pack migration
task. It is useful to copy a service pack migration task to create a new service pack
migration task with slightly different parameters, or to re-schedule an existing service pack
migration task.

Figure 219 Enterprise – Service Packs Migration Tasks

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Service Pack Migration. The
Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks page appears.
2) Check the service pack migration task to copy in the Copy check box.
3) Click Apply to copy the service pack migration task. The Enterprise – Service Pack
Migration Task page displays the new service pack migration task with Copy of in the
description column. The copied task is in the Awaiting edits status and has to be
edited before it can be processed. For instructions to modify this service pack
migration task, see section 10.13.3 Modify Service Pack Migration Task.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 253 OF 350
 10.13.5 Delete Service Pack Migration Task
You can delete a service pack migration task before or after processing.

NOTE: A service pack migration task cannot be deleted while it is being processed. It needs to
be completed, terminated, or stopped first.

You use the Enterprise – Modify Service Pack Migration Task page to delete a pending
service pack migration task or a task that is awaiting edits.

Figure 220 Enterprise – Modify Service Pack Migration Task

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 254 OF 350
 You use the Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Task Status page to delete a service
pack migration task that is completed, terminated, or stopped.

Figure 221 Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Task Status (Delete Task)

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Service Pack Migration. The
Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row for the service pack migration task to delete.
Depending on the status of the task, either the Enterprise – Modify Service Pack
Migration Task page or the Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Task Status page
appears.
3) Click Delete. The Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks page appears. The
service pack migration task is deleted. It does not appear in the list of service pack
migration tasks.
To exit without deleting the task, click Cancel.

NOTE: The Delete function cannot be undone. Once you click Delete, your deletion is final.
You can press Cancel before you click Delete to avoid a deletion.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 255 OF 350
 10.13.6 Report on Service Pack Migration Task
Use the Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Task Status page to display a summary
report of a service pack migration task that is in-progress or complete. If the service pack
migration task was terminated as a result of errors, the report will assist you in
troubleshooting service pack migration tasks with errors.

Figure 222 Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Task Status

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Service Pack Migration. The
Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row of the service pack migration task to report. The
Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Task Status page appears.
The following information is displayed:
− Description: The description of the service pack migration task.
− Scheduled Start Date: The date the service pack migration task is scheduled to
run.
− Scheduled Start Time: The time of day the service pack migration tasks is
scheduled to run.
− Actual Start Date: The date the service pack migration task actually started to
run.
− Actual Start Time: The time of day the service pack migration task started to run.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 256 OF 350
 − Expire after: The period of time after the scheduled start date and time the task
can start processing. After that time, the task is cancelled and cannot run.
− Automatically stop after: The period of time defined for the execution of the
service pack migration task.
− When the task is finished, E-mail the results to: The optional e-mail address to be
notified of the results of the service pack migration task.
− Abort the migration after: The number of errors permitted before a service pack
migration task terminates.
− Status: The status of the task including the number or processed groups and
users and the number of errors that occurred while processing the task.
− Reporting option: The report can include either all users in the group included in
the service pack migration task or all users affected by the service pack migration
task. Click the link to access the detailed report of a task that is complete.
− Service Quantity option: During migration the system can either automatically
increase the service quantities required to complete the migration or prohibit
service pack migration for groups with inadequate service quantities.
− Migrate these groups: The groups identified in the service pack migration task.
− Migrate users with all of these services: If specified, users are migrated who are
assigned all of the services identified.
− Migrate users with all of these service packs: If specified, users are migrated who
are assigned all of the service packs identified.
− Remove these services: The services specified to be removed during the service
pack migration task.
− Remove these service packs: The service packs specified to be removed during
the service pack migration task.
− Assign these services: The services specified to be assigned during the service
pack migration task.
− Assign these service packs: The service packs specified to be assigned during
the service pack migration task.
3) Select click here for task report, for a detailed report on a task that has run. The
report includes a report on the success of the migration as well as any errors. An
example of a report follows.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 257 OF 350
 Figure 223 Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Task Report

For additional information, see the BroadWorks User Service Pack Migration Guide.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 258 OF 350
 10.13.7 Terminate Service Pack Migration Task
Use the Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Task Status page to terminate a service pack
migration task in-progress.

Figure 224 Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Task Status (Terminate Task)

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Service Pack Migration. The
Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Tasks page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row of the service pack migration task to terminate. The
Enterprise – Service Pack Migration Task Status page appears.
3) Click Terminate. The service pack migration task stops and the Service Pack
Migration Tasks page appears.
To exit without terminating the task, click Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 259 OF 350
 10.14 Verify Translation and Routing
Use this menu item on the Enterprise – Utilities menu page to create Verify Translation
and Routing (VTR) requests and run test calls to gather information about translation,
routing, and services for calls.

Figure 225 Enterprise – Verify Translation and Routing (Parameters)

Figure 226 Enterprise – Verify Translation and Routing (SIP Message)

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 260 OF 350
 1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Verify Translation and Routing. The
Enterprise – Verify Translation and Routing page appears.
2) Select the type of request you want to submit. For Select VTR Type, select
Parameters or SIP Message.
3) If you selected Parameters, provide the following information:
− From the Origination Type drop-down list, select the type of origination to use to
trigger the VTR request.
− In the Origination text box, enter the originating address/identification of the
selected type:
− A line or port number must contain the “@” character and can be can be a
maximum of 161 characters.
− A phone number can be a maximum of 23 characters.
− A user ID must be in the “user@domain” form and can be a maximum of 161
characters.
− A URL must contain the “@” character and can be a maximum of 256
characters.
− In the Destination text box, enter the call destination address/identification. It can
be of any type allowed for call originations.
− In the Contact text box, enter a diversion URI, an IP address, or a phone number
to use for the test call. The URI must contain the @ character and can be a
maximum of 256 characters.
− In the Diversion text box, enter a diversion URI, an IP address, or a phone
number to use for the test call. The URL must contain the @ character and can
be a maximum of 256 characters.
4) If you selected SIP message, enter the message in the Enter a SIP message to be
used text box. The SIP message must be longer than 20 characters to be considered
valid.
5) To submit the request, click the Execute VTR request link. The result of the test is
displayed in the VTR Result box.
6) To exit the page, click OK.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 261 OF 350
 10.15 Voice Portal Branding
Use the Voice Portal Branding menu item on the Enterprise – Utilities menu page to set a
group’s voice portal branding.

10.15.1 Select Messages for Voice Portal Branding

Use the Enterprise – Voice Portal Branding page to select messages to be played to users
of the voice portal.

Figure 227 Enterprise – Voice Portal Branding

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Voice Portal Branding. The Enterprise
– Voice Portal Branding page appears.
2) Select “Default Greeting” to select the default greeting for callers who reach the voice
portal for your enterprise ID account.
Or,
Select “Branded Greeting” and type the name of your custom greeting, or click
Browse to locate your custom greeting.
3) Select “Default Greeting” to select the default greeting played to callers when they
reach voice messaging mailboxes within your enterprise ID account.
Or,
Select “Branded Greeting” and enter the name of the custom greeting, or click
Browse to locate the file with the recorded greeting.
4) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 262 OF 350
 10.16 Web Portal Branding
Use the Web Portal Branding menu item on the Enterprise – Utilities menu page to:
 Configure Web Portal Branding
 Create Custom Settings
 Create Custom Web Branding
 Create Custom Web Content

10.16.1 Configure Web Portal Branding

Use the Enterprise – Web Portal Branding page to configure the look and feel of the web
portal for all administrators and users within your enterprise ID account. Changes are
effective immediately. System providers may set the web-branding scheme for the entire
system, but enterprises can override this setting for their customers.
The Enterprise – Web Portal Branding page allows you to select several web-branding
options. You can select from a predefined set of color schemes and graphics. Or, you
can use your own custom settings. Custom headers, titles, menus, and a custom skin can
be created for the CommPilot web portal. You can also add custom web content to
provide an additional web browser window that can be used for tutorials, advertising,
marketing, or other information.
The following procedure explains how to configure the web portal, however for detailed
information and procedures to customize the CommPilot web portal using your custom
settings, see the BroadWorks Web Customization and Localization Guide.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 263 OF 350
 Figure 228 Enterprise – Web Portal Branding

1) On the Enterprise – Utilities menu page, click Web Portal Branding. The Enterprise
– Web Portal Branding page appears.
2) Click the Banner Display “On” or “Off.”
The current banner or advertisement displayed is what all users see on their pages.
To select a previously saved banner, click Browse. The maximum width for a banner
is 468 pixels; maximum height for a banner is 60 pixels. If the image you upload is too
large, you are informed.
In the When clicked, send user to: box, type the web address (for example,
[Link] of the page that should open when the user clicks on
the banner.
3) Click the User Custom Web Content “On” or “Off”.
If you have created a web-based custom tutorial or marketing content to be displayed
upon first log in for a user, type the URL for the user custom web content. For more
information, see section 10.16.4 Create Custom Web Content.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 264 OF 350
 The following figure shows a sample Tutorial page.

Figure 229 Tutorial Page Sample

4) For Group Custom Web Content, check On or Off.

If you have created web-based custom tutorial or marketing content to be displayed
upon first log in for a group administrator, enter the URL for the group custom web
content. For more information, see section 10.16.4 Create Custom Web Content.
5) For Logo Display, check On or Off.
When Logo Display is disabled, the BroadSoft logo is displayed. When enabled, your
customized logo is displayed in the upper left corner of the page.
To select a new logo, click Browse. The maximum width for a logo is 280 pixels;
maximum height for a logo is 50 pixels. If the image you upload is too large, you are
informed.
6) Select one or more Custom Settings: Use Custom Header, Use Custom Menu, and
Use Custom Titles. These settings apply for all levels of users.
− Custom Header means all titles and icons in the header.
− Custom Menu means the order of the menu items in the left navigation area, the
names of menu items, and how the names are presented (left-justified or right-
justified).
− Custom Titles means the page titles in the lower left side of the headers, for
example, System Provider — Enterprises.
To select one or more of the Custom Settings, the files to support these changes must
already exist on your web server. For more information, see section 10.16.2 Create
Custom Settings.
7) Select a skin (or theme).

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 265 OF 350
 Select the Classic, Desert, Forest, Ocean, or Tropical theme for icons and colors. For
instructions to use a custom theme, see section 10.16.3 Create Custom Web
Branding.
8) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

10.16.2 Create Custom Settings

Custom headers, custom titles, and custom menus can be created. After the files have
been created, their use can be selected for web branding. For information and procedures
to create custom headers, titles, and menus, see the BroadWorks Web Portal Branding
Guide.

10.16.3 Create Custom Web Branding

A custom skin can be created for the CommPilot web portals by adding graphics files and
a style sheet to specific directories on the Application Server. You use the command line
interface (CLI) to copy and organize files and then the web interface to select a custom
skin. For information and procedures to create a custom skin, see the BroadWorks Web
Portal Branding Guide. For detailed information and procedures for the command line
interface, see the BroadWorks Application Server Command Line Interface Administration
Guide.

10.16.4 Create Custom Web Content

BroadWorks custom web content feature enables a system provider or enterprise to
provide an additional web browser window of custom content that can be used for a
tutorial, advertising, marketing, or other information desired by the provider.
The content can be branded for each enterprise. In addition, group administrators and
users of the system can be provided with different content, which is based on their login
level.
The content must be created by the system provider, the enterprise, or BroadSoft. For
information and procedures to create custom web content, see the BroadWorks Web
Customization and Localization Guide.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 266 OF 350
 11 Configure Group Administration, Services, and Resources

In BroadWorks, tasks traditionally associated with system providers are distributed among
system providers, provisioning administrators, enterprises administrators, group
administrators, and end users. Distributing the workload allows more control and
interaction on the part of the customer. It also reduces the need and turnaround time for
additions, changes, and deletions for customers, further reducing the need for and work of
the service department.
Recommended responsibilities of an enterprise through the web interface of the
Application Server are as follows:
 Add groups and group administrators
 Provision phone numbers and access resources
 Provision services
 Assist or train group administrators to configure services
This guide provides information and procedures for adding and modifying group profiles,
resources, services, and utilities that are accessible only to an enterprise. For information
and procedures for the group administrator, see the BroadWorks Application Server
Group Web Interface Administration Guide (Parts 1 and 2).

11.1 Select Group

Use the Enterprise – Groups page to select a group to configure.
The Enterprise – Groups page allows you to select a group to configure. It is a list page
that allows you to search several different ways. You can click the headings of a column
to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the data to
specify search criteria, or click the page links (for example, Next or Previous). For more
information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface
Administration Guide.

Figure 230 Enterprise – Groups

1) On your Home page, in the Options list, click Profile. The Enterprise – Profile menu
page appears.
2) Click Groups. The Enterprise – Groups page appears.
3) Click Edit or any item in the row of the group to configure. The Group – Profile menu
page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 267 OF 350
 11.2 Profile Menu
Use the Profile menu item on the Group – Profile menu page to:
 Modify Group Profile
 Modify Group Web Policies
 Configure Call Processing Policies
For information and procedures for the group administrator, see the BroadWorks
Application Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide (Parts 1 and 2). This guide
provides information and procedures for adding and modifying group information for an
enterprise.

11.2.1 Access Group Profile Menu

Use the Group – Profile menu page to configure group profiles. It displays menu items to
modify profiles for specific groups.

Figure 231 Group – Profile Menu

1) On the Enterprise – Groups page, click Edit in the row of the group to configure or
click on any item in the row.
2) The Group – Profile menu page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 268 OF 350
 11.2.2 Modify Group Profile
Use the Group – Profile page to modify group profile information.
The Group – Profile page allows you to view or change group profile information.
Enterprises can modify the entire group profile, whereas, group administrators are not able
to modify the Additional Information section.

Figure 232 Group – Profile

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Profile. The Group – Profile page appears.
2) Type information specific to the group. To move between input boxes, use the TAB
key on the keyboard, or click in the next input box.
This table describes each input box. Required input is indicated with an asterisk (*).
Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Group ID * (Read only) Displays a unique identification ABCcompany

code for this group, to be used
when adding group members,
and so on.

Default The drop-down box Select a domain from the drop- [Link]
Domain * lists the available down list. The default domain is m
domains. at the beginning of the list. (Default)

Group Name 1 through 80 The company name. Do not use ABC Company,
characters. backslashes or double quotation Inc.
marks.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 269 OF 350
 Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Calling Line ID 1 through 80 The name that appears as the ABC Company,
Group Name characters. Cannot group’s calling line ID. Inc.
contain %, +,
backslash, double
quotes, or extended
ASCII characters.

Calling Line ID The drop-down box The number that appears as the 3015551000
Group Number lists available numbers. group’s calling line ID.

Location 1 through 30 The unique location code for the 12

Dialing Code characters. group (used for inter-site dialing).

Contact Name 1 through 30 The primary contact for the Joe Smith
characters. company, first and last name.

Contact Phone 1 through 30 The complete phone number of 3015551000

characters. the above-named contact for the
group including, for example, a
“1” for a long-distance number.
Do not use spaces or dashes.

Contact E-mail 3 through 80 characters The e-mail address of the above- joe@abcompany
in user@domain named contact for the group. .com
format.
Can contain only one
@ sign and the
following characters:
letters, digits, !, #, $, %,
&, *, +, -, /, =, _, {, }, |,
~, `, ., ?, ^, or single
quotes.

Time Zone * The drop-down box The group’s time zone. (GMT-05:00)
lists the time zones to (US) Eastern
select from. Standard Time

User Limits

Limited to Integer from 1 through Indicates there is to be a limited 20

999999. number of users in this group.
Enter the limit in the box.

Additional Information

Address 2 lines, maximum 80 The street address of the group 123 Main Street
characters each. or company.

City 1 through 50 The city name of the group or Gaithersburg

characters. company.

State/Province The drop-down box Select the state or province from MD

lists the values from the drop-down list.
which to select.

Zip/Postal 1 through 50 The zip or postal code of the 20877

Code characters. group or company.

Country 1 through 50 The country of the group or United States

characters. company.

3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 270 OF 350
 11.2.3 Modify Group Web Policies
Use the Group – Group Web Policies page to modify group policies.
This page allows you to view or change group policies for accessing group information,
including calling plans, enhanced call logs, extension dialing, Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol (LDAP) integration, voice messaging, department administrators, user
authentication, user profiles, and group directory.

Figure 233 Group – Group Web Policies

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Group Web Policies. The Group – Group
Web Policies page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 271 OF 350
 2) Select the web access policies you want to assign for the group. The following table
lists the different access options and explains their meaning.
Calling Plan

Full access to calling plan This policy provides administrators of this group with full control over
the configuration of group-level and user-level calling plans.

Restricted calling plan view This policy prevents the display of all group-level calling plan pages,
displays Collect Calls only on the User – Incoming Calling Plan page,
and displays International, Operator-assisted, 700/900, 976, and
Casual calls only on the User – Outgoing Calling Plan page.

Call Logs

Full access to call logs for This policy allows users to delete their call logs.
users

Read-only access to call This policy provides users to view but not delete their call logs.
logs for users

Extension Dialing

Full access to extension This policy provides group administrators with control over the length
dialing of the extensions in the group on the Utilities – Extension Dialing
page.

Read-only access to This policy provides group administrators with read-only access to the
extension dialing length of the extensions you set for their group.

No access to extension This policy hides the Utilities – Extension Dialing page.
dialing

LDAP Integration

Full access to LDAP This policy provides group administrators with full control over the
integration LDAP directory to be used for their group on the Utilities – LDAP
Directory page.

Read-only access to LDAP This policy provides group administrators with read-only access to the
integration LDAP directory information you configure for their group.

No access to LDAP This policy hides the Utilities – LDAP Directory page.
integration

Voice Messaging

Full access to voice This policy provides users with control over the messaging server to
messaging be used for their voice messages on the Messaging – Voice
Management page, unless a group administrator configures the
system otherwise.

Restricted voice This policy prevents users from viewing or changing the mail server
messaging view they configure for their voice messages and specifying an e-mail
address to direct voice messages to.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 272 OF 350
 Department Administrator User Policy

Full access to users in that This policy provides department administrators with the ability to
department create, modify, and delete users in their departments.

Restricted from adding or This policy prevents department administrators from creating,
removing users; read-only modifying, and deleting users in their departments, but does allow
access to user profile them to view users’ complete profile information. Note that this also
restricts the Shared Call Appearance and Alternate Numbers
configuration pages to a user’s view.

Restricted from adding or This policy prevents department administrators from creating,
removing users; no access modifying, and deleting users in their departments, and hides the
to user profile Profile menu item on users’ home pages. Note that this also restricts
the Shared Call Appearance and Alternate Numbers configuration
pages to a user’s view.

No access to users This policy hides the Users menu item on department administrators’
home pages, thereby preventing access to any user management
pages.

Department Administrator Trunk Group Policy

Full access to trunk groups When the department administrators have full access to trunk groups,
they can modify the trunk groups in their own department.

No access to trunk groups If the department administrators have no access to trunk groups, they
do not see the trunk groups in their department at all.

Department Administrator Phone Number/Extension Access

Full access to phone When the department administrators have full access to phone
numbers/extensions numbers/extensions, they can modify the phone numbers/extensions
in their own department.

Read-only access to phone When the department administrators have read-only access to phone
numbers/extensions numbers/extensions, they can view but cannot modify the phone
numbers/extensions in their department.

Department Administrator Calling Line ID Number Access

Full access to calling line This policy allows department administrators to modify the calling line
ID number ID (CLID) numbers in their department.

Read-only access to calling This policy allows department administrators to view CLID numbers in
line ID number their department without modifying them.

User Authentication

Full access to user This policy allows users with the Authentication service assigned to
authentication for users modify their user names and passwords on the Utilities -
Authentication page.

No access to user This policy hides the Utilities - Authentication page for users, thereby
authentication for users preventing users from modifying their user names and passwords.

User Profile

Full access to user profile This policy allows users to access and modify profile information for
for users their own accounts.

Read-only access to user This policy allows users to view the profile information for their own
profile for users accounts without modifying it.

No access to user profile This policy hides the Profile link on users’ home pages, thereby
for users preventing users’ access to their profile information.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 273 OF 350
 User Group Directory

Full access to group This policy provides users with access to the enterprise directory on
directory for users in portal the Utilities – Enterprise Directory page.

No access to group This policy hides the Enterprise Directory link on users’ Utilities page.
directory for users in portal

Auto Attendant Name Dialing

Full user access to Name This policy allows group administrators and users to view and modify
Dialing fields the user’s last and first name used by the Auto Attendant for name
dialing on the user’s Profile page.

No user access to Name This policy hides the Name Dialing Last Name and Name Dialing First
Dialing fields Name fields on the User – Profile page from the group administrators
and users, thereby preventing them from viewing and modifying the
user’s last and first names used by the Auto Attendant for name
dialing.

3) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 274 OF 350
 11.2.4 Configure Call Processing Policies
Use the Group – Call Processing Policies page to configure BroadWorks call
processing behavior.

NOTE: On a per-call basis, the system selects the policy to use at the lowest configured level.
If the group policies are not configured, the policies defined at the enterprise level are used.

Figure 234 Group – Call Processing Policies (Top of Page)

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 275 OF 350
 Figure 235 Group – Call Processing Policies (Bottom of Page)

1) On the Group – Profile menu page, click Call Processing Policies under the
Advanced menu. The Group – Call Processing Policies page appears.
2) Select or enter information as described in the following table.
Field Description

Calling Line ID

Use group name for Calling Line Select this option to specify that the group name should be
Identity used for calling line identity.

Allow Department Name Override Select this option to allow the department name to be used
instead of the group calling line ID name for calling line
identity. Note that this option is only available when the Use
group name for Calling Line Identity option is checked.

Use Group Calling Line Id Policy This option allows you to specify whether group or enterprise
Use Enterprise Calling Line Id Policy Calling Line ID policy should be used.
 Select Use Group Calling Line Id Policy to use the policy
defined on this page.
 Select Use Enterprise Calling Line Id Policy to use the policy
defined at the enterprise level.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 276 OF 350
 Field Description

External Calls: This option allows you to override the enterprise Calling Line
 Use user phone number for ID policy settings for external calls, at the group level.
Calling Line Identity  Check Use user phone number for Calling Line Identity to
 Use configurable CLID for Calling send the user’s phone number as calling line ID for outgoing
Line Identity external calls.
 Use group/department phone  Check Use configurable CLID for Calling Line Identity to
number for Calling Line Identity send the user’s custom calling line ID phone number for
outgoing external calls.
 Check Use group/department phone number for Calling Line
Identity to send the group or department phone number as
calling line ID for outgoing external calls. The department
phone number is used if the user belongs to a department
that has a phone number assigned; otherwise the group
phone number is used. This option is available only if there
is a group phone number configured (at the Group – Profile
level). The group number, if available, appears at the bottom
of the screen.
Enterprise Calls This option allows you to override the enterprise Calling Line
 Use extension ID policy settings for enterprise calls at the group level.
 Use location code plus extension  Select Use extension to send the user’s extension as calling
 Use External Calls Policy line identity.
 Select Use location code plus extension to send the group’s
location code followed by the user’s extension as calling line
identity.
 Select Use External Calls Policy to use the setting configured
on this page for external calls.
Group Calls This option allows you to override the enterprise Calling Line
 Use extension ID policy settings for group calls at the group level.
 Use location code plus extension  Select Use extension to send the user’s extension as calling
 Use External Calls Policy line identity.
 Select Use location code plus extension to send the group’s
location code followed by the user’s extension as calling line
identity.
 Select Use External Calls Policy to use the setting configured
on this page for external calls.
Emergency Calls: This option allows you to override the enterprise Calling Line
 Use user phone number for ID policy settings for emergency calls at the group level.
Calling Line Identity  Check Use user phone number for Calling Line Identity to
 Use configurable CLID for Calling send the user’s phone number as calling line ID for outgoing
Line Identity emergency calls.
 Use group/department phone  Check Use configurable CLID for Calling Line Identity to
number for Calling Line Identity send the user’s custom calling line ID phone number for
outgoing emergency calls.
 Check Use group/department phone number for Calling Line
Identity to send the group or department phone number as
calling line ID for outgoing emergency calls. The department
phone number is used if the user belongs to a department
that has a phone number assigned; otherwise the group
phone number is used. This option is enabled only if there is
a group phone number configured (at the Group – Profile
level). The group number, if available, appears at the bottom
of the screen.
Allow Alternate Numbers for Select this option to allow an alternate number to be used as
Redirecting Identity a redirecting identity in the redirection header.

Allow Configurable CLID for Select this option to allow a configurable CLID to be used as
Redirecting Identity a redirecting identity in the redirection header.

Block Calling Name for External Select this option to block the user’s calling name when the
Calls user makes a call to an external destination.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 277 OF 350
 Field Description

Calling Line ID Group Number This is a read-only field. It displays, if available, the calling
line identity number of the user’s group. If the group phone
number is not configured, this field is empty and the settings
that require group phone number are disabled.

Calling Line ID Group Name This is a read-only field. Depending on the configuration, it
can display the group name or the group calling line identity
name, or it can be empty. When this field is empty, the
settings that require the group name are disabled.

Media

Use Group Media Policy This option allows you to specify the Group Media policy to
Use Service Provider/Enterprise use.
Media Policy  Select Use Group Media Policy to use the policy defined on
this page.
 Select Use Service Provider/Enterprise Media Policy to use
the policy defined at the enterprise level.
Media Policy: This option allows you to specify the Media policy to use.
 Force Use of Uncompressed  Select Force Use of Uncompressed Codec to force, on
Codec group basis, a user’s device to use an uncompressed codec.
 Supported Media For example, fax machines and modems require the use of a
 None clear channel and an uncompressed codec. This setting
does not apply to virtual users.
 Select Use Supported Media to provision, on a group basis,
what media (codec) subscribers are permitted to use. This is
done by building media sets that are applied to subscribers.
The policy does not apply to virtual subscriber services such
as Auto Attendant, voice portal, hunt group, trunk group, call
center, and so on.
 Select None to specify that no Media Policy is enforced at
the group level.

Call Limits

Use Group Call Limits Policy This option allows you to specify the Call Limits policy to use.
Use Service Provider/Enterprise  Select Use Group Call Limits Policy to use the policy defined
Call Limits Policy on this page.
 Select Use Service Provider/Enterprise Call Limits Policy to
use the policy defined for the enterprise.
Enable Maximum Number of Select this option and enter the number in the text box to
Concurrent Calls specify, on a group basis, the maximum number of
simultaneous calls. If a user exceeds the maximum number
of simultaneous calls allowed on terminations, the calling
party is provided Busy treatment. Busy treatment may
include Voice Messaging, Call Forwarding Busy, and any
other active service assigned to the subscriber that is invoked
on Busy. If the terminating subscriber has no active services
assigned that trigger on Busy, Busy tone is provided to the
calling party. Note that this feature only counts originating
and terminating calls for a subscriber. Redirected calls are
not counted as part of this policy.
NOTE: This setting does not apply to virtual users.

Enable Maximum Number of Select this option and enter the number in the text box to
Concurrent Video Calls restrict the number of concurrent video calls per user. If the
user exceeds the maximum number of simultaneous video
calls allowed on terminations, the calling party is provided
Busy treatment. Busy treatment may include Voice
Messaging, Call Forwarding Busy, and any other active
service assigned to the subscriber that is invoked on Busy.
Note that this feature only counts originating and terminating
calls for a subscriber. Redirected calls are not counted as
part of this policy.
NOTE: This setting does not apply to virtual users.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 278 OF 350
 Field Description

Enable Maximum Duration for Select this box and enter the number in the text box to
Answered Calls specify, on a group basis, the maximum allowed call time in
minutes for answered calls. If a user exceeds the maximum
time on a given call, the call is torn down and an abnormal
release is indicated within the call detail record.
NOTE: This setting does not apply to virtual users.

Enable Maximum Duration for Select this box and enter the number in the text box to
Unanswered Calls specify, on a group basis, the maximum allowed call time in
minutes for unanswered calls. If a user exceeds the
maximum time on a given call, the call is torn down and the
calling party is given reorder tone.

Enable Maximum Number of Select this box and enter the number in the text box to place
Concurrent Redirected Calls a limit on the number of simultaneous redirections for each
subscriber. This policy is similar to the policy that limits the
number of simultaneous calls, the difference being that this
policy counts only calls that are redirected.
When the maximum number of concurrent redirected calls
specified by this policy is exceeded, the call is short-circuited
similar to the Maximum Redirection Depth policy.
The Maximum Number of Concurrent Redirected Calls policy
applies to the same redirecting services as the Maximum
Redirection Depth policy. However, the Maximum Number of
Concurrent Redirected Calls policy does not apply to
redirecting services assigned to virtual subscribers.

Enable Maximum Number of Similar to Maximum Number of Concurrent Redirected Calls

Concurrent Find Me/Follow Me policy, this policy allows you to limit the number of
Invocations simultaneous invocations of Find Me/Follow Me services.
These services include Simultaneous Ringing, Sequential
Ringing, and Remote Office.

Enable Maximum Find Me/Follow Select this box and enter the number in the text box to limit
Me Depth the cascading of forking services, that is, Simultaneous
Ringing and Sequential Ringing. It is similar to the Maximum
Redirection Depth policy, but different in that it counts only
the diversion entries where the reason is “follow-me”.
Simultaneous Ringing and Sequential Ringing both cause
redirections that add a “follow-me” diversion entry, which
means that the policy restricts the cascading of these forking
services. Although it is not a forking service, Remote Office
also causes a redirection with a “follow-me” diversion entry.
Therefore, the policy also applies to the Remote Office
service.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 279 OF 350
 Field Description

Maximum Redirection Depth Select this box and enter the number in the text box to specify
the maximum number of cascaded redirections or “hops” on a
group basis.
The Maximum Redirection Depth policy applies to the
following redirecting services:
 Call Forwarding Always
 Call Forwarding Busy
 Call Forwarding No Answer
 Selective Call Forwarding
 Voice Mail Deposit
 Direct Voice Mail Transfer
 SIP Phone Forwarding (302 from SIP phone)
 Call Processing Language
 Client-initiated Blind Transfer (for example, from the
CommPilot Call Manager or BroadWorks Assistant–
Enterprise)
 Phone-initiated Blind Transfer
 Series Completion
 PBX Deflection Before Answer
 Trunk Group Forward on Unreachable or Capacity
Exceeded Condition
The Maximum Redirection Depth policy also applies to
redirecting services assigned to virtual subscribers, such as
Auto Attendant. Since these subscribers do not have per-
user call processing policies, the Application Server applies
the policies of the virtual subscriber’s group, service
provider/enterprise, or system.

Translations and Routing

Use Group Translation and Routing This option allows you to specify the Translation and Routing
Policy policy to use.
Use Service Provider/Enterprise  Select Use Group Translation and Routing Policy to use the
Translation and Routing Policy policy defined on this page.
 Select Use Service Provider/Enterprise Translation and
Routing Policy to use the policy defined for the enterprise.
Network Usage: Specify whether calls should be routed via the network
 Force All Calls to use the interface as follows:
Network  Select Force All Calls to use the Network to force all calls
 Force All Calls to the Network from the enterprise including extensions dialed and location
except extension/location code + extensions dialed to route via the network interface.
 Do not Force Enterprise/Group Note that a Network Server with Private Dial Plan is required
Calls to the Network for extension dialed and location code/extension dialed calls
to work properly when forced to the network.
 Select Force All Calls to the Network except
extension/location to force all calls from the enterprise,
excluding extensions dialed and location code + extensions
dialed, to route via the network interface.
 Select Do not Force Enterprise/Group Calls to the Network to
specify that routing of enterprise/group calls via the network
interface should not be enforced.
Enable Enterprise Extension Dialing Select this option to allow enterprise extension dialing. When
the policy is disabled, the call routes to the Network Server.
When the policy is enabled, the call routes to the enterprise
destination, internally (within the same Application Server
cluster).

Enforce Group Calling Line Identity Select this option to enforce group calling line identity
Restriction restrictions.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 280 OF 350
 Field Description

Allow Enterprise/Group Call Typing When this option is selected, 302 responses from the
For Private Dialing Plan Network Server that result in a group or enterprise call are
routed internally within the Application Server, if the
destination is hosted on the same Application Server, and if
the Network Server used a Private Dialing Plan Routing
policy.
NOTE: The Allow Group Call Typing for Private Dialing Plan
policy, as well as the Override CLID Restriction For Private
Call Category policy, only applies in an IP Multimedia
Subsystem (IMS) deployment if the use of enhanced network
translations is enabled by the system administrator (so that
queries to the Network Server can be made).

Allow Enterprise/Group Call Typing The Allow Enterprise/Group Call Typing for Public Dialing
For Public Dialing Plan Plan Call Processing policy is very similar to the one above,
with the exception that the type of network from the Network
Server contact must be set to “PUBLIC”. The category must
still be “PRIVATE” to indicate that an Enterprise Routing
policy was used. Note that if the category is not set to
“PRIVATE”, the call is routed externally.

Override CLID Restriction For When the Network Server returns a contact via its private dial
Private Call Category plan (the cat and ton parameters in the returned contact are
both set to “PRIVATE”), whether or not the destination is part
of the same enterprise as the caller. The CLID restrictions
can be overridden (the caller’s privacy made public) if the
Override CLID Restriction for Private Call Category Call
Processing policy is enabled, for calls going to the network.

Use Enterprise CLID For Private Select this option if you want the enterprise CLID to be used
Call Category to identify the caller for inter-Application Server calls via a
private dialing plan. Previously the caller’s directory number
(DN) was used to identify the caller. The enterprise CLID is:
 The user’s extension for intra-group calls
 The user’s location code followed by the user’s extension for
intra-enterprise calls

Incoming Caller ID

Use Group Dialable Caller ID Policy This option allows you to specify the Dialable Caller ID policy
Use Service Provider/Enterprise to use.
Dialable Caller ID Policy  Select Use Group Dialable Caller ID Policy to use the policy
defined on this page.
 Select Use Service Provider/Enterprise Dialable Caller ID
Policy to use the policy defined for the enterprise.

Dialable Caller ID: On/Off Check On to enable or check Off to disable the use of
dialable caller ID.

3) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 281 OF 350
 11.3 Resources Menu
Use this menu to:
 Assign Group Paging Targets Capacity
 Allocate Meet-Me Conference Ports
 Assign Domains
 Assign Network Classes of Service
 Assign Numbers
 Authorize Services and Service Packs
 Configure Trunking Call Capacity
 Configure Session Admission Control Capacity
 Assign Office Zones
 Assign Route Point External Systems
This section provides information and procedures for adding and modifying group
resources by an enterprise. For information and procedures usually performed by the
group administrator, see the BroadWorks Application Server Group Web Interface
Administration Guide (Parts 1 and 2).

11.3.1 Access Group Resources Menu

Use the Group – Resources menu page to configure group resources for a specific group.
The Group – Resources menu page displays menu items for configuring and assigning
resources to a specific group.

Figure 236 Group – Resources Menu

1) From the Group – Profile menu page, in the Options list click Resources.
2) The Group – Resources menu page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 282 OF 350
 11.3.2 Assign Domains
Use the Group – Assign Domains page to assign domains for a specific group to use.
The Group – Assign Domains page allows you to assign domains available for use by this
group.

Figure 237 Group – Assign Domains

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Assign Domains. The Group – Assign
Domains page appears.
2) In the Group Available Domains column, select the domains to be assigned to the
group. You can select some or all of the items in a column. Item names are listed in
alphabetical order.
3) To select several items in sequential order, click the first name, hold down the SHIFT
key on the keyboard, and click the last name. To select several items, but not in a
particular order, click the names while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard.
To move only selected domains from one box to the other, click Add >.
To move all the domains from one box to the other, click Add All >>.
Assigned domains appear in the Group Assigned Domains box.
4) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

11.3.3 Assign Group Paging Targets Capacity

Use the Group – Group Paging Targets Capacity page to assign group paging targets
capacity to a group. This setting applies to the Group Paging service and determines the
maximum number of target users a paging group can have. Target users are members of
a paging group that are paged simultaneously when a call is made to the paging group.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 283 OF 350
 Figure 238 Group – Group Paging Targets Capacity

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Group Paging Targets Capacity. The
Group – Group Paging Targets Capacity page appears.
2) In the Maximum Number of Target Users per Paging Group for this Group text box,
enter the maximum number of paging group targets you want to allow for this group.

NOTE: The read-only field Maximum Number of Target Users per Paging Group From Service
Provider, displays the upper limit allowed for this setting and is the same as the maximum group
paging targets capacity assigned to your enterprise.

3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

11.3.4 Allocate Meet-Me Conference Ports

Use the Group – Meet-Me Conference Ports page to assign Meet-Me conference ports to
a selected group.

Figure 239 Group – Meet-Me Conference Ports

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Meet-Me Conference Ports. The
Group – Meet-Me Conference Ports page appears.
2) Allocate ports to the group.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 284 OF 350
 − Check Limited To and enter the number of ports.
− Or to allow unlimited use of ports, check Unlimited.

NOTE: The Unlimited option is not available if the system administrator restricted the number of
Meet-Me ports available to your enterprise.

3) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel.

11.3.5 Assign Network Classes of Service

Use the Group – Assign Network Classes of Service page to assign network classes of
service to a specific group.
The Group – Assign Network Classes of Service page allows you to assign the network
classes of service for use by this group.

Figure 240 Group – Assign Network Classes of Service

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Assign Network Classes of Service.
The Group – Assign Network Classes of Service page appears.
2) To assign specific classes of service:
− In the Available Network Classes of Service box, click the classes of service to
add.
You can select some or all of the items in a column. Items are listed in numerical
order. To select several items in sequential order, click the first number, hold
down the SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last number. To select
several items, but not in a particular order, click the names while holding down the
CTRL key on the keyboard.
− Click Add >. The selected classes of service appear in the Assigned Classes of
Service box.
3) To assign all available classes of service, click Add All >>.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 285 OF 350
 4) To unassign specific classes of service:
− In the Assigned Network Classes of Service box, click the classes of service to
unassign.
You can select some or all of the items in a column. Items are listed in numerical
order. To select several items in sequential order, click the first number, hold
down the SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last number. To select
several items, but not in a particular order, click the names while holding down the
CTRL key on the keyboard.
− Click Remove >. The selected classes of service appear in the Available
Classes of Service box.
5) To unassign all classes of service, click Remove All >>.
6) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel.

11.3.6 Assign Numbers

Use the Group – Assign Numbers page to add a new phone numbers and manage
existing phone numbers assigned to a specific group. Phone numbers assigned to users
or group services cannot be removed.

[Link] List Assigned Numbers

Use the Group – Assign Numbers page to list the telephone numbers assigned to the
group.

Figure 241 Group – Assign Numbers

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Assign Numbers. The Group – Assign
Numbers page appears displaying the phone numbers assigned to the group.
2) To search for specific numbers, enter your search criteria and click Find. If a number
that satisfies the search criteria is part of a range of numbers, the range is returned.
3) Click OK to return to the previous page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 286 OF 350
 [Link] Add Numbers
Use the Group – Assign Numbers Add page to add numbers assigned to a specific group.
The Group – Assign Numbers Add page allows you to add numbers available for use by
this group. Phone numbers assigned to users or group services cannot be removed
unless they have already been removed from the user or group service.

Figure 242 Group – Assign Numbers Add

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Assign Numbers. The Group – Assign
Numbers page appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – Assign Numbers Add page appears.
3) Click the range to add in the Available Range(s) box and then click Add >. The
number or range appears in the Available Phone Number(s) box.
4) Click the phone number or several numbers to assign in the Available Phone
Number(s) box and click Add >. You can select some or all of the items in a column.
Items are listed in numerical order. To select several items in sequential order, click
the first number, hold down the SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last number.
To select several items, but not in a particular order, click the names while holding
down the CTRL key on the keyboard.
To move all the phone numbers from one box to the other, click Add All >>.
Assigned phone numbers appear in the Assign to Group box.
5) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 287 OF 350
 [Link] Unassign Numbers
Use the Group – Assign Numbers Modify page to unassign the numbers assigned to a
specific group.
The Group – Assign Numbers Modify page allows you to modify the numbers available for
use by this group. Phone numbers assigned to users or group services cannot be
removed, unless they have already been removed from the user or group service.

Figure 243 Group – Assign Numbers Modify

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Assign Numbers. The Group – Assign
Numbers page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row of the phone number or range of phone numbers to
modify. The Group – Assign Numbers Modify page appears.
3) Click the phone number or several numbers to assign in the Assigned Phone
Number(s) box and click Remove <.
To move all the assigned phone numbers from one box to the other, click
Remove All <<.
The number or range appears in the Unassigned Phone Number(s) box .
Unassigned phone numbers appear in the Unassigned Phone Number box.
4) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 288 OF 350
 [Link] Delete Numbers
Use the Group – Assign Numbers page to delete numbers assigned to a specific group.
The Group – Assign Numbers page allows you to delete numbers available for use by this
group. Phone numbers assigned to users or group services cannot be removed unless
they have already been removed from the user or group service.

Figure 244 Group – Assign Numbers (Delete)

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Assign Numbers. The Group – Assign
Numbers page appears.
2) Check the entries for the phone number you want to delete.
The Delete function has the same effect as unassigning the corresponding numbers,
but does not offer the same granularity for a range of contiguous numbers. To
unassign a specific number within a range, use the modify procedure described in
section [Link] Unassign Numbers.
3) Click Apply or OK to delete the numbers. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

11.3.7 Authorize Services and Service Packs

Use the Group – Services page to authorize services and service packs for a specific
group to use.
The Group – Services page allows you to authorize the services and service packs
available for this group.
Note that the following figure shows only the top part of the page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 289 OF 350
 Figure 245 Group – Services

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Services. The Group – Services page
appears.
2) Click Select All or check individual service packs and services to permit the use of
service packs and services by the enterprise.
Authorized Service Packs and Services are indicated by a check mark. Checked
service packs and services are available for authorization to a group or user.
3) Check the Limited To: box to the right of the service pack or service name, and type
the number of service packs and services to limit within this group (if required).
Based on the number of licenses purchased, this field can be used to track and limit
the number of instances of a service pack and service used.
4) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

11.3.8 Configure Trunking Call Capacity

Use the Group – Trunking Call Capacity page to allocate the maximum capacity of any
trunk group and bursting number of simultaneous trunking calls.
The maximum call capacity of any trunk group limits the number of simultaneous calls the
group can have over any of its trunk groups, but it does not guarantee that that many calls
can be established. The maximum number of simultaneous calls over all trunk groups in
the enterprise is determined by the number of business trunking license units allocated to
your enterprise. One trunk call uses one license unit. When the call is release, the license
unit becomes available for another call.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 290 OF 350
 Figure 246 Group – Trunking Call Capacity

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Trunking Call Capacity. The Trunking
Call Capacity page appears.
2) For Maximum Call Capacity for Any Trunk Group, enter the number of calls in the text
box.
3) For Allocated Bursting Calls to this Group select from:
− Unlimited (if this option is available).
− Limited to and enter the number of calls in the text box.

NOTE: This page displays the number of business trunking license units allocated to your
enterprise and the bursting maximum number of trunking simultaneous calls available to assign
to this group. The maximum call capacity of a trunk group and the bursting call capacity
allocated to this group cannot exceed the available maximums.

4) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

NOTE: The Number of Business Trunking License Units for this Enterprise and Bursting
Maximum Number of Trunking Simultaneous Calls for this Group are read-only. They are the
maximums assigned to your enterprise by your system provider administrator.

11.3.9 Configure Session Admission Control Capacity

The Session Admission Control feature provides a mechanism to control the number of
simultaneous sessions at the subscriber and logical link level for a group. The logical link
capacity is controlled by creating sets of access devices logically grouped together, called
session admission control (SAC) groups, and imposing restrictions on the number of
concurrent sessions for a given set of devices (SAC group).
Use the Group – Session Admission Control Capacity page to configure the session
capacity settings for the group.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 291 OF 350
 Figure 247 Group – Session Admission Control Capacity

1) On the Group – Resources menu page, click Session Admission Control Capacity.
The Group – Session Admission Control Capacity page appears.
2) To restrict the number of subscriber sessions for the group, select Control aggregate
sessions as well as SAC groups. To leave the number of subscriber sessions
unrestricted, select Control by SAC group only.

NOTE: Control by SAC group only allows to you restrict the number of sessions at the logical
link level by creating SAC groups (sets of access devices logically grouped together) and
imposing limits on them.

3) If you selected Control aggregate sessions as well as SAC groups, you must enter the
maximum allowed number of sessions in the Maximum number of concurrent
sessions box.

NOTE: This parameter is effective only when the Control aggregate sessions as well as SAC
groups option is selected. In addition, it has the following two meanings. First, it is the upper
limit of the SAC capacity maximum that can be assigned at the SAC group level. Second, it
controls the number of aggregate sessions throughout the group.

4) To restrict the number of originating sessions, enter the number in the Maximum
number of concurrent user originating sessions.
5) To restrict the number of terminating sessions, enter the number in the Maximum
number of concurrent user terminating sessions.
6) To include the internal service provider/enterprise calls in the total count, check Count
intra Service Provider sessions.
7) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 292 OF 350
 11.3.10 Assign Office Zones
Use the Group – Assign Office Zones page to assign office zones to the selected group.
You must have full Office Zone administration privileges to assign office zones.

NOTE: A default office zone must be configured at the group level before any users can be
assigned Location-based Calling Restrictions.

Figure 248 Group – Assign Office Zones

1) On the Group – Resources menu, select Assign Office Zones. The Group – Assign
Office Zones page appears.
2) To assign office zones to the group, in the Available Office Zones column, select the
office zones you want to assign and click Add >. Or, to assign all the available office
zones, click Add All >>.
− To select a range of contiguous items, click the first name, hold down the SHIFT
key, and click the last name.
− To select several items, but not in a particular order, click the names while holding
down the CTRL. Item are listed by name in alphabetical order.
The assigned office zones appear in the Assigned Office Zones column.
3) To unassign office zones from the group, in the Assigned Office Zones column, select
the office zones unassign and click Remove <. Or, to unassign all office zones, click
Remove All <<.
The unassigned office zones appear in the Available Office Zones column.
4) Select the default zone for the group. In the Assigned Office Zones column, select the
zone you want and click Select. The selected zone appears in the Default column.

NOTE: When a user is added, they are assigned the default group office zone if one has been
chosen.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 293 OF 350
 5) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To cancel your changes click Cancel.

11.3.11 Assign Route Point External Systems

Use the Group – Assign Route Point External Systems to assign route point external
systems to the group.

Figure 249 Group – Assign Route Point External Systems

1) On the Group – Resources menu, select Assign Route Point External Systems.
The Group – Assign Route Point External Systems page appears.
2) To assign route point external systems to the group, move the target external systems
from the Available Route Point External Systems to the Assigned Route Point
External Systems column.
− To assign all available external systems, click Add All>>.
− To assign one or more external systems, in the Available Route Point External
Systems column, select the external systems you want and click Add>.
To select one item, click the item. To select several items in sequential order,
click the first item, hold down the SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last
item. To select several items, but not in a particular order, click the names while
holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard.
3) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 294 OF 350
 11.4 Services Menu
Use this menu to:
 Configure Warning Tone for Group Voice Messaging
 Configure Home Zone for Group Voice Portal
 Configure Call Capacity Groups
 Configure Route Point Settings
 Configure Emergency Zones
 Configure MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint
 Configure Preferred Carrier Group
 Identify Third-Party Voice Mail Support Server
This guide provides information and procedures for adding and modifying group services
performed by an enterprise. For information and procedures performed by a group
administrator, see the BroadWorks Application Server Group Web Interface Administration
Guide (Parts 1 and 2).

11.4.1 Access Group Services Menu

Use the Group – Services menu page to configure group services for a specific group.

NOTE: The exception is the Call Center related settings, which although set at the group level
apply to all groups in the enterprise.

The Group – Services menu page displays menu items for configuring and assigning
resources to a specific group.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 295 OF 350
 Figure 250 Group – Services Menu

From the Group – Profile menu page, in the Options List, click Services. The Group –
Services menu appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 296 OF 350
 11.4.2 Configure Warning Tone for Group Voice Messaging
Use the Group – Voice Messaging page to configure the system to play a warning before
transferring callers to this group’s Voice Messaging service. Callers who hang up before
the completion of this warning message avoid incurring any tolls applicable to the call.
The format of the warning message complies with Mexican regulations concerning the
recording of voice communications.

Figure 251 Group – Voice Messaging

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Voice Messaging. The Group – Voice
Messaging page appears.
2) Check or uncheck the Play a Warning announcement before starting to record a
Voice Message box.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 297 OF 350
 11.4.3 Configure Home Zone for Group Voice Portal
Use the Group – Voice Portal page to configure the home zone for the voice portal.
Users (both regular and virtual) can be assigned a home zone when the Zone Calling
Restrictions service is assigned to a user, with the exception of the voice portal. Since the
voice portal cannot be assigned services, the Voice Portal page allows an enterprise
administrator to configure the voice portal’s home zone whenever the Zone Calling
Restrictions service is authorized to the group. The home zone is only visible to system
and service provider/enterprise administrators. It is not accessible or visible to the group
administrator or user.
Your system provider defines the list of home zones.

Figure 252 Group – Voice Portal

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Voice Portal. The Group – Voice Portal
page appears.
2) Select a home zone for the voice portal from the drop-down menu. The default is
“None”.

NOTE: Your system provider defines the list of home zones.

3) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 298 OF 350
 11.4.4 Configure Call Capacity Groups
The Group – Call Capacity page allows you to display or delete call capacity groups for a
specific group. This service allows a limit of active incoming and outgoing phone calls to
be set for a group. Once the maximum number of calls has been reached, no more calls
can be received. The caller hears a network busy tone. This limitation does not include
calls made within the same business group.
Use the Group – Call Capacity page to manage call capacity groups for a specific group.
Group Names and the Maximum Active Calls appear along with the maximum number of
active calls allowed for each group.

Figure 253 Group – Call Capacity

[Link] List Call Capacity Groups

Use the Group – Call Capacity page to list call capacity groups for a specific group.
1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Call Capacity. The Group – Call Capacity
page appears.
2) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

[Link] Add Call Capacity Groups

Use the Group – Call Capacity Add page to define call capacity groups for a specific
business group.
The Group – Call Capacity Add page allows you to define call capacity groups for a
specific business group.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 299 OF 350
 Figure 254 Group – Call Capacity Add

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Call Capacity. The Group – Call Capacity
page appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – Call Capacity Add page appears.
3) Type the group name.
4) Type the maximum active number of calls.
5) Type the maximum number of incoming active calls. This number cannot exceed the
value present in the Maximum Active Calls Allowed input box.
6) Type the maximum number of outgoing active calls. This number cannot exceed the
value present in the Maximum Active Calls Allowed input box.
7) Check the Default Group, new users will be added to this group check box to include
new users in this call capacity group.
8) Enter the Search Criteria or click Search to add users to the list of Available Users.
9) Click the user’s name to add in the Available User(s) box and then click Add >. The
name appears in the Assigned User(s) box. You can select some or all of the items in
a column. Item names are listed in alphabetical order. To select several items in
sequential order, click the first number, hold down the SHIFT key on the keyboard,
and click the last number. To select several items, but not in a particular order, click
the names while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard.
To move all the users’ names from one box to the other, click Add All >>.
Assigned users appear in the Assigned Users box.

NOTE: A user is not allowed to be in more than one call capacity group.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 300 OF 350
 10) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel.

[Link] Modify Call Capacity Groups

Use the Group – Call Capacity Modify page to modify or delete a call capacity group for a
specific business group.
The Group – Call Capacity Modify page allows you to modify the assigned users or the
maximum number of incoming and outgoing calls allowed within a call capacity group.

Figure 255 Group – Call Capacity Modify

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Call Capacity. The Group – Call Capacity
page appears.
2) Click Edit or any item in the row of the call capacity group to modify. The Group –
Call Capacity Modify page appears.
3) Type over any existing information you want to change.
4) Enter the search criteria or click Search to add users to the list of Available Users.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started
Web Interface Guide.
5) To assign additional users, click the user’s name to add in the Available User(s) box
and then click Add >. The user’s name appears in the Assigned User(s) box.
6) To remove assigned user(s) and return them to the Available Users box, click the
Assigned User(s) and click Remove <. You can select some or all of the items in a
column. Item names are listed in alphabetical order. To select several items in
sequential order, click the first name, hold down the SHIFT key on the keyboard, and
click the last name. To select several items, but not in a particular order, click the
names while holding down the CTRL key on the keyboard.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 301 OF 350
 To move all the available users from one box to the other, click Add All >>. To move
all the assigned users from one box to the other, click Remove All <<.
7) Click Delete to delete this call capacity group. The Group – Call Capacity page
appears.

NOTE: The Delete function cannot be undone. Once you click Delete, your deletion is final.
You can press Cancel before you click Delete to avoid a deletion.

8) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel.

[Link] Delete Call Capacity Groups

Use the Group – Call Capacity page to delete call capacity groups within a specific group.
The Group – Call Capacity page allows you to delete call capacity groups for a specific
group. The group name, default states, maximum active calls, and incoming and outgoing
limits appear for each group.

Figure 256 Group – Call Capacity

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Call Capacity. The Group – Call Capacity
page appears.
2) Check the Group Name of the call capacity group to delete.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK delete the call capacity. Apply saves your
changes. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

NOTE: The Delete function cannot be undone. Once you click Delete, your deletion is final.
You can click Cancel before you click Delete to avoid a deletion.

11.4.5 Configure Route Point Settings

This section describes the settings that can be configured for the Route Point service at
the enterprise level.
These settings are shared with the Call Center service. For information on configuring
these settings, see section 7 Call Center Menu.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 302 OF 350
 The settings that can be configured for the Route Point service at the enterprise level are
as follows:
 Agent Default Settings (All Services)
 Agent Unavailable Codes (Call Center – Standard, Call Center – Premium, and Route
Point)
 Call Disposition Codes (Call Center – Premium and Route Point)
You can use the links on the Group – Route Point page for any group in your enterprise
that has the Route Point service assigned to access the configuration pages for those
settings.

WARNING: These pages are shared with the Call Center service and apply to the whole
enterprise. Therefore, any changes you make to the Route Point default settings also affect
those settings for your enterprise Call Center service and apply to all groups in your enterprise,
independently of how the pages were accessed.

Figure 257 Group – Route Point

NOTE: Group administrators do not have access to these enterprise-level settings.

11.4.6 Configure Emergency Zones

Use the Group – Emergency Zones page to activate emergency zones within a specific
group.

[Link] Create Emergency Zones

Use the Group – Emergency Zones page to activate emergency zones within a group.
The Group – Emergency Zones page allows you to activate emergency zones within a
specific group. Emergency Zones reject all calls or emergency calls for mobile SIP users
when they are outside of their home zone.

WARNING: Ensure that a home zone is defined with the Emergency Zones feature turned on.
Otherwise, no calls are accepted within the group.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 303 OF 350
 Figure 258 Group – Emergency Zones

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Emergency Zones. The Group –
Emergency Zones page appears.
2) Click Emergency Zones “On”.

NOTE: Ensure that a home zone is defined with the Emergency Zones feature turned on.
Otherwise, no calls are accepted within the group.

3) Click Reject all registrations and outgoing call originations from outside of the home
zone to prohibit all calls from outside of the home zone.
-or-
Click Reject emergency call originations from outside of the home zone to prohibit
emergency calls from outside the home zone.
4) Check When an emergency call is made, send e-mail to: check box and type an
e-mail address to send an e-mail upon arrival of an emergency call to the home zone.
The e-mail address must be from 3 through 80 characters in user@domain format. It
can contain only one @ sign and the following characters: letters, digits, !, #, $, %, &,
*, +, -, /, =, _, {,}, |, ~, `, ., ?, ^, or single quotes.
5) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

[Link] Define Home Zone for Emergency Zones

Use the Group – Emergency Zones Add page to define a home zone to be used in
conjunction within emergency zones for a specific group.

WARNING: Ensure that a home zone is defined with the Emergency Zones feature turned on.
Otherwise, no calls will be accepted within the group.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 304 OF 350
 Figure 259 Group – Emergency Zones Add

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Emergency Zones. The Group –
Emergency Zones page appears.
2) Click Add. The Group – Emergency Zones Add page appears.
3) Enter an IP address or address range.
− To enter an IP address, check the IP Address option and type the address to add
to the home zone.
− To enter a range of IP addresses, check the IP Address Range option and type
the IP address range to add to the home zone.
Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses and address ranges are allowed.
For IPv4 addresses, ranges are limited to the fourth octet and wildcard characters
are not permitted in ranges. Wildcard characters (*) are only permitted for fourth
octet of an IP address. An asterisk (*) can be used to represent all numbers
within the 0 to 255 range. A question mark (?) can be used to represent any
single digit in the 0 to 9 range.
For IPv6 addresses, wildcard characters are not supported, but ranges can span
over the entire address.
4) Click IP Address Range and type the IP address range to add to the home zone.
5) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel.

[Link] Modify or Delete Home Zone Within Emergency Zone

Use the Group – Emergency Zones Modify page to modify a home zone within an
emergency zone for a specific group.

Figure 260 Group – Emergency Zones Modify

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 305 OF 350
 1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Emergency Zones. The Group –
Emergency Zones page appears.
2) Click Edit in the row for the home zone to edit or click on any item in the row. The
Group – Emergency Zones Modify page appears.
3) Type over the IP address (or range) to modify. For information about the allowed
format of an IP address or address range, see section [Link] Define Home Zone for
Emergency Zones.
4) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel.
To Delete a Home Zone:
1) Check the Home Zone box to delete.
2) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

NOTE: The Delete function cannot be undone. Once you click Delete, your deletion is final.
You can click Cancel before you click Delete to avoid a deletion.

11.4.7 Configure MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint

Use the Group – MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint page to specify whether group or
enterprise SMS message templates should be used for that group to send message
waiting indicator (MWI) information to the user's mobile phone.

Figure 261 Group – MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint. The
Group – MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint page appears.
2) For Use Template Settings, select Service Provider to have the system use enterprise
templates for the group, or select Group to have the system use group custom
templates for the group.
When you select Group, the group is allowed to create their own SMS templates.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 306 OF 350
 3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK to delete the numbers. Apply saves your
changes. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

11.4.8 Configure Preferred Carrier Group

Use the Group – Preferred Carrier Group page to assign preferred intra-LATA, inter-LATA,
and international carriers to the group.

Figure 262 Group – Preferred Carrier Group

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Preferred Carriers Group. The Group –
Preferred Carriers Group page appears.
2) Edit the fields provided.
For each type of carrier (intra-LATA, inter-LATA and international), choose whether to
use the preferred carrier for the enterprise, or a different carrier you select from the list
box provided.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK to delete the numbers. Apply saves your
changes. OK saves your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 307 OF 350
 11.4.9 Identify Third-Party Voice Mail Support Server
Use the Group – Third-Party Voice Mail Support page to identify a third-party voice mail
platform for a specific group.

Figure 263 Group – Third-Party Voice Mail Support

1) On the Group – Services menu page, click Third-Party Voice Mail Support. The
Group – Third-Party Voice Mail Support page appears.
2) Click Third-Party Voice Mail “On” (to enable the service).
3) Type the phone number or URL of the external voice mail platform. The maximum
numbers of characters for a URL is 161. Phone numbers must be from 2 through 30
digits.
4) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

11.5 Communication Barring Menu

Use this menu to:
 Select or View Group Communication Barring Profile
 Select Communication Barring Profile Assignable to Users
This guide provides information and procedures for managing communication barring
settings for a group performed by an enterprise administrator. For information and
procedures performed by a group administrator, see the BroadWorks Application Server
Group Web Interface Administration Guide (Part 1 and 2).

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 308 OF 350
 11.5.1 Access Communication Barring Menu
Use the Group – Communication Barring menu page to manage communication barring
settings for the group.

Figure 264 Group – Communication Barring Menu

From the Group – Profile menu page, in Options List, click Communication Barring. The
Group – Communication Barring menu page appears.

11.5.2 Select or View Group Communication Barring Profile

Use the Group – Communication Barring Profiles page to view or assign a communication
barring profile to a group.

Figure 265 Group – Communication Barring Profiles

Figure 266 Group – Communication Barring Profiles (Read-only)

1) On the Group – Communication Barring menu page, click Profiles. The Group –
Communication Barring Profiles page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 309 OF 350
 NOTE: This page is read-only for administrators with read-only access to Communication
Barring settings.

2) Select the profile to assign to the group:

− To use your enterprise’s default profile, check Use the default Service Provider
Communication Barring profile.
− To use another profile, check Use this Service Provider Communication Barring
profile and select the profile from the drop-down list.
3) Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

11.5.3 Select Communication Barring Profile Assignable to Users

Use the Group – Communication Barring Profiles page to view or assign to a selected
group communication barring profiles that can be assigned to users in the group.

Figure 267 Group – User Assignable Communication Barring Profiles

1) On the Group – Communication Barring menu page, click User Assignable Profiles.
The Group – Communication Barring Profiles page appears.
2) Select profiles that can be assigned to users in the group:
− In the Available Profiles column, select profiles to add and click Add. Or to assign
all available profiles, click Add All.
You can select some or all of the items in a column. To select several items in
sequential order, click the first number, hold down the SHIFT key on the
keyboard, and click the last number. To select several items, but not in a
particular order, click the names while holding down the CTRL key on the
keyboard.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 310 OF 350
 − To deselect some profiles, click the profiles in the User Assignable Profiles
column and then click Remove. Or to deselect all profiles, click Remove All.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel or select another page.

11.6 Call Center Menu

The Group – Call Centers page, accessible from the Group – Call Center menu page for
any group with a Call Center service assigned, includes links to pages that allow you to
configure enterprise-level settings for the Call Center service. These pages are also
accessible from the Enterprise – Call Center menu page. For information on configuring
the Call Center service for your enterprise, see section 7 Call Center Menu.

Figure 268 Group – Call Center Menu

Figure 269 Group – Call Centers (Call Center – Premium)

NOTE 1: Group administrators do not have access to these enterprise level settings.

NOTE 2: Some agent settings can be overridden by group administrators at the user level. For
more information, see the BroadWorks Application Server Group Web Interface Administration
Guide Part 2.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 311 OF 350
 11.7 Utilities Menu
Use this menu to:
 Access Utilities Menu
 Intercept Group
This guide provides information and procedures for adding and modifying group utilities
performed by an enterprise. For information and procedures performed by a group
administrator, see the BroadWorks Application Server Group Web Interface Administration
Guide (Parts 1 and 2).

11.7.1 Access Utilities Menu

Use the Group – Utilities menu page to configure group utilities for a specific group.
The Group – Utilities menu page displays menu items for configuring utilities for a specific
group.

Figure 270 Group – Utilities Menu

From the Group – Profile menu page, in Options List, click Utilities. The Group – Utilities
Menu page appears.

11.7.2 Intercept Group

Use the Group – Intercept Group page to temporarily take a group out of service.
The Group – Intercept Group page allows you take a group out of service while providing
callers with informative announcements and alternate routing options.

NOTE 1: Options configured on this page apply to all users in the group.

NOTE 2: The default announcement is the same for inbound and outbound calls.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 312 OF 350
 Figure 271 Group – Intercept Group

1) On the Group – Utilities menu page, click Intercept Group. The Group – Intercept
Group page appears.
2) For Intercept Group, select On to enable the service. Calls are only intercepted when
the service is turned on.
3) If you selected On, configure the remaining parameters as needed.
Inbound Announcements
− To play the default announcement message, select Default Announcement.
When callers access this message, they hear, “The number you are trying to
reach is out of service”.
− To play a custom announcement, select Personal Announcement and type the
path and file name of a .WAV file with your greeting in the Load Personal Audio
Announcement text box, or click Browse to select a file on your computer. If your
Intercept Group service has video support enabled, you can also type the path
and file name of a .MOV file with your greeting in the Load Personal Video
Announcement text box, or click Browse to select a file on your computer.
Inbound Call Options
− To intercept all incoming calls, select Intercept All Inbound Calls.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 313 OF 350
 − To allow incoming calls from specific, system-defined phone numbers, select
Allow Inbound Calls from System-Defined Phone Numbers. This allows certain
types of inbound calls to be routed to intercepted users (for example, Public
Safety Answering Point (PSAP) call back and customer care), as defined by the
carrier. When this option is enabled, incoming calls from phone numbers that
match the system-defined numbers are delivered to the users’ phones. The
remaining calls are intercepted and given treatment.
− To allow users to receive calls, select Allow Inbound Calls (Partial Intercept).
When this option is selected, the Route to Voice Mail, Play new Phone Number,
and Transfer on “0” to Phone Number options are disabled.
In addition, to play an alternate announcement to users trying to make calls,
check Use Alternate Outbound Blocking Announcement. When users in this
group try to make calls, they hear the following message: “This line has been
temporarily placed out of service. You can receive calls but you cannot make
calls. Please contact your operator.”
− To route intercepted calls to users’ voice mail instead of playing an
announcement, check Route to Voice Mail.
When this option is checked, the Play new Phone Number and Transfer on “0” to
Phone Number options are disabled.
− To play a new number to callers of intercepted incoming calls, check Play new
Phone Number.
− To transfer intercepted incoming calls to a specified number when callers press
“0”, select the Transfer on “0” to Phone Number box and type the phone number
to forward the call to. This, for example, can be the number to reach a
receptionist.
Outbound Call Options
− To block all outgoing calls, select Block All Outbound Calls.
− To transfer outgoing calls to another phone number, select Route to Phone
Number, and then enter the number where you want to route the intercepted
user.
− To allow intercepted users to make local calls, select Allow Outbound Local Calls.
4) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 314 OF 350
 12 Configure User Services and Settings

This section provides information and procedures for the following user-level configuration
tasks that are accessible only to an enterprise administrator:
 Select User
 Assign Home Zone
 Configure External Custom Ringback
 Configure Classmark
 Configure Charge Number Service
 Configure Outgoing Message Waiting Indicator
 Configure Third-Party Voice Mail
 Configure Preferred Carrier User
 Configure Call Processing Policies

12.1 Select User

Use the Enterprise – Users page to select a user to configure.
The Enterprise – Users page allows you to select a user to configure. The Enterprise –
Users page is a list page that allows you to search several different ways. You can click
the headings of a column to change the sort order of items in the column, use the input
boxes below the data to specify search criteria, or click the page links (for example, Next
or Previous). For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks
Getting Started Web Interface Administration Guide.

Figure 272 Group – Users

1) On your Home page, in the Options list, click Profile. The Enterprise – Profile menu
page appears.
2) Select Users. The Enterprise – Users page appears. This is a list page. For
information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web
Interface Administration Guide.
3) Click Edit or any item in the row of the user to configure. The User – Profile menu
page appears.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 315 OF 350
 12.2 Assign Home Zone
When a user has been assigned the Zone Calling Restrictions service, the administrator
can configure a home zone for the user.
Use the User – Zone Calling Restrictions page to configure the home zone for the user.

Figure 273 User – Zone Calling Restrictions

1) On the User – Call Control page, click Zone Calling Restrictions. The User – Zone
Calling Restrictions page appears.
2) From the Home Zone drop down list, select the home zone you want to assign to the
user.
3) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

12.3 Configure External Custom Ringback

Use the User – External Custom Ringback page to enable or disable the service for an
individual user, and also configure user-level settings to override the service provider-level
settings.

Figure 274 User – External Custom Ringback

1) From the User – Incoming Calls menu page, select External Custom Ringback.
The User – External Custom Ringback page appears.
2) For External Custom Ringback, select “On” to enable the service and select “Off” to
disable the service.
3) For the External Custom Ringback URI, select “Service Provider” to select the service
provider level. Select “User” to select the user level.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 316 OF 350
 4) In the Contact sip text box, enter the SIP URI.
5) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes and displays
the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

12.4 Configure Classmark

Enterprise administrators are responsible for associating a classmark with a user.
Users have to have the Classmark service assigned before a classmark can be
associated with their accounts.
Use the User – Classmark page to assign a classmark to the user.

Figure 275 User – Classmark

1) From the User – Outgoing Calls menu page, select Classmark. The User –
Classmark page appears.
2) From the Classmark drop-down list, select the classmark to assign to the user.
3) To save your changes, click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves
your changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

12.5 Configure Charge Number Service

Enterprise administrators are responsible for configuring the Charge Number service for
users. When assigned to a user, the Charge Number service allows the enterprise
administrator to assign a charge number to users.
When assigned, the charge number is included in the Call Detail Records (CDRs)
generated for the user’s originating calls and included in the SIP INVITEs of the calls
originated by the user.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 317 OF 350
 Figure 276 User – Call Control Menu

1) From the User – Call Control page, select Charge Number.

The User – Charge Number page appears.

Figure 277 User – Charge Number

2) Select the number from the Charge Number drop-down list.

3) Check Use Charge Number For Enhanced Translations if you want the charge
number to be used for enhanced translations.
4) Check Include Charge Number for Network Calls if you want the Application Server to
add a Charge or P-Charge info header to the SIP INVITE sent to the network for the
outgoing calls.
5) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 318 OF 350
 To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

12.6 Configure Outgoing Message Waiting Indicator

Use the User – Outgoing Message Waiting Indicator page to configure the outgoing
message waiting indicator on a user’s telephone. This function allows devices that are
external to BroadWorks to send message waiting indicators that flash when calls from the
BroadWorks network are received in the Voice Messaging service of the external device.
The User – Outgoing Message Waiting Indicator page allows you to configure the system
to send a message to other devices to allow the user’s message waiting indicator (MWI) to
work on their phone when placing messages on external voice mail systems.

Figure 278 User – Outgoing Message Waiting Indicator

1) On the User – Profile menu page, in the Options list, click Messaging to access the
User – Messaging menu page.
2) Click Outgoing MWI. The User – Outgoing Message Waiting Indicator page
appears.
3) For Outgoing SMDI Message Waiting Indicator, select On to enable this functionality.
Select Off to disable it.

NOTE: MWI messages cannot be sent over the SMDI interface unless this functionality is
enabled for the user. At least one number must be specified for the user.

4) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 319 OF 350
 12.6.1 Add Number
1) On the User – Outgoing Message Waiting Indicator page, type the phone number to
add. Type a number of 10 digits. Numbers are not displayed to users.
2) Click Add. The phone number appears in the list of phone numbers at the bottom of
the page.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

12.6.2 Delete Number

1) On the User – Outgoing Message Waiting Indicator page, select the phone number to
delete.
2) Click Delete. The list of phone numbers appears at the bottom of the page with the
phone number removed.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

NOTE: To delete the last phone number, turn off the Outgoing SMDI Message Waiting Indicator
and then delete the phone number.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 320 OF 350
 12.7 Configure Third-Party Voice Mail
The User – Third Party Voice Mail page allows you to configure BroadWorks users to
properly access the external voice mail platform on deposit and retrieval. This includes
specifying the address of the external voice platform (phone number or SIP URI) and the
custom mailbox ID for each user using the external voice mail service.

Figure 279 User – Third-Party Voice Mail Support

1) On the User – Messaging menu page, click Third-Party Voice Mail Support. The
User – Third-Party Voice Mail Support page appears.
2) To activate the service, select On; to deactivate it, select Off.
3) To send all calls to voice mail, check Send All Calls to Voice Mail.
4) To send busy calls to voice mail, check Send Busy Calls to Voice Mail.
5) To send unanswered calls to voice mail, check Send Unanswered Calls to Voice Mail.
6) To send mobile calls to voice mail when the user is outside of the primary zone, check
Send Calls while out of Primary Zone to Voice Mail.

NOTE: This setting only applies to users who have an office zone and primary zone assigned.

7) To select the mail server, select Group Mail Server or User Specific Mail Server. If
you select a user specific mail server, type the phone number or SIP URI of the
external voice mail platform. The maximum number of characters for a URI is 161.
Phone numbers can be from 2 through 30 digits.

NOTE: If you select a user specific mail server, it takes precedence over a group mail server.

8) Set the user’s Mailbox ID on the third-party voice mail platform. Select the user’s (or
group’s) phone number or specify a SIP URI.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 321 OF 350
 9) Select the number of rings before the voice mail greeting is played.

NOTE: This setting does not apply to virtual users.

10) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

NOTE: Third-party voice mail supports the Direct Voice Mail Transfer and Service Control
services.

12.8 Configure Preferred Carrier User

The User – Preferred Carrier User page allows you to specify the preferred intra-LATA,
inter-LATA, and international carriers assigned to an individual user.

Figure 280 User – Preferred Carrier User

1) On the User – Outgoing Calls menu page, click Preferred Carrier User. The User –
Preferred Carrier User page appears.
2) For each type of carrier (intra-LATA, inter-LATA, and international), choose whether to
use the preferred carrier specified at the group level, or a different carrier you select
from the list box provided.
3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 322 OF 350
 12.9 Configure Call Processing Policies
Use the User – Call Processing Policies page to configure BroadWorks call processing
behavior for a user.
On a per call basis, the system selects the policy to use based on the level at which the
policies are configured. If the user policies are not configured, the system uses the
policies defined at the group level.

Figure 281 User – Call Processing Policies

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 323 OF 350
 1) On the User – Profile menu page, click Call Processing Policies under the
Advanced menu. The User – Call Processing Policies page appears.
2) Select or enter information as described in the following table.
Field Description

Calling Line ID

 Use User Calling Line Id Policy This option allows you to specify whether group or user level
 Use Group Calling Line Id Calling Line ID policy should be used.
Policy  Select Use User Calling Line ID Policy to use the policy
configured on this page.
 Select Use Group Calling Line ID Policy to use the group policy.
External Calls: This policy allows you to override the Calling Line ID policy
 Use user phone number for settings for external calls at the user level.
Calling Line Identity  Check Use user phone number for Calling Line Identity to send
 Use configurable CLID for the user’s phone number as calling line ID for outgoing external
Calling Line Identity calls.
 Use group/department phone  Check Use configurable CLID for Calling Line Identity to send
number for Calling Line the user’s custom calling line ID phone number for outgoing
Identity external calls.
 Check Use group/department phone number for Calling Line
Identity to send the group or department phone number as
calling line ID for outgoing external calls. The department
phone number is used if the user belongs to a department that
has a phone number assigned; otherwise the group phone
number is used. This option is enabled only if there is a group
phone number configured (at the Group – Profile level). The
group number, if available, appears at the bottom of the screen.
Emergency Calls: This policy allows you to override the Calling Line ID policy
 Use user phone number for settings for emergency calls at the user level.
Calling Line Identity  Check Use user phone number for Calling Line Identity to send
 Use configurable CLID for the user’s phone number as calling line ID for outgoing
Calling Line Identity emergency calls.
 Use group/department phone  Check Use configurable CLID for Calling Line Identity to send
number for Calling Line the user’s custom calling line ID phone number for outgoing
Identity. emergency calls.
 Check Use group/department phone number for Calling Line
Identity to send the group or department phone number as
calling line ID for outgoing emergency calls. The department
phone number is used if the user belongs to a department that
has a phone number assigned; otherwise the group phone
number is used. This option is enabled only if there is a group
phone number configured (at the Group – Profile level). The
group number, if available, appears at the bottom of the screen.
Use group name for Calling Line Check this option to use the group name for the user’s calling
Identity line identity.

Allow Department Name Override Check this option to allow the use of the department name
instead of the group calling line ID name for the user’s calling
line identity. Note that this option is only available when the Use
group name for Calling Line Identity option is checked.

Allow Alternate Numbers for Select this option to allow an alternate number to be used as a
Redirecting Identity redirecting identity in the redirection header.

Allow Configurable CLID for Select this option to allow a configurable CLID to be used as a
Redirecting Identity redirecting identity in the redirection header.

Block Calling Name for External Select this option to block the user’s calling name when the user
Calls makes a call to an external destination.

Calling Line ID Group Number This is a read-only field. It displays, if available, the calling line
identity number of the user’s group. If the group phone number
is not configured, this field is empty and the settings that require
group phone number are disabled.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 324 OF 350
 Field Description

Calling Line ID Group Name This is a read-only field. Depending on the configuration, it can
display the group name or the group calling line identity name,
or it can be empty. When this field is empty, the settings that
require the group name are disabled. If the group calling line ID
name is not configured, this field is empty and the settings that
require group name are disabled.

Media

Use User Media Policy This option allows you to specify the Media policy to use.
Use Group Media Policy  Select Use User Media Policy to use the policy defined on this
page.
 Select Use Group Media Policy to use the policy defined for the
user’s group.
Media Policy:  Select Force Use of Uncompressed Codec media to force a
user’s device to use an uncompressed codec. For example,
 Force Use of Uncompressed fax machines and modems require the use of a clear channel
Codec and an uncompressed codec. This setting does not apply to
 Use Supported Media virtual users.
 None  Select Use Supported Media to specify what media (codec) the
subscriber is permitted to use. This is done by building media
sets that are applied to subscribers. The policy does not apply
to virtual subscriber services such as Auto Attendant, voice
portal, hunt group, trunk group, call center, and so on.
 Select None to specify that no Media Policy is enforced.
Call Limits

Use User Call Limits Policy This option allows you to specify the Call Limits policy to use.
Use Group Call Limits Policy  Select Use User Call Limits Policy to use the policy defined on
this page.
 Select Use Group Call Limits Policy to use the policy defined for
the user’s group.
Enable Maximum Number of Select this option and enter the number in the text box to specify
Simultaneous Calls the maximum allowed number of simultaneous calls on a user
basis. If a user exceeds the maximum number of simultaneous
calls allowed on terminations, the calling party is provided busy
treatment. Busy treatment may include Voice Messaging, Call
Forwarding Busy, and any other active service assigned to the
subscriber, which is invoked on Busy. If the terminating
subscriber has no active services assigned which trigger on
Busy, a busy tone is provided to the calling party. Note that this
feature only counts originating and terminating calls for a
subscriber. Redirected calls are not counted as part of this
policy.
NOTE: This setting does not apply to virtual users.

Enable Maximum Number of Select this option and enter the number in the text box to specify
Simultaneous Video Calls the maximum allowed number of simultaneous video calls on a
user basis. If the user exceeds the maximum number of
simultaneous video calls allowed on terminations, the calling
party is provided busy treatment. Busy treatment may include
Voice Messaging, Call Forwarding Busy, and any other active
service assigned to the subscriber, which is invoked on Busy.
Note that this feature only counts originating and terminating
calls for a subscriber. Redirected calls are not counted as part
of this policy.
NOTE: This setting does not apply to virtual users.

Enable Maximum Call Times for Select this option and enter the number in the text box to specify
Answered Calls the maximum call time in minutes for answered calls on a user
basis. If a user exceeds the maximum time on a given call, the
call is torn down and an abnormal release is indicated within the
call detail record.
NOTE: This setting does not apply to virtual users.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 325 OF 350
 Field Description

Maximum Call Times for Select this option and enter the number in the text box to specify
Unanswered Calls the maximum call time in minutes for unanswered calls on a
service provider/enterprise, group, and/or user basis. If a user
exceeds the maximum time on a given call, the call is torn down
and the calling party is given reorder tone.

Enable Maximum Number of Select this option and enter the number in the text box to specify
Concurrent Redirected Calls the maximum number of simultaneous forwards. When the
maximum number of concurrent redirected calls specified by this
policy is exceeded, the call is short-circuited.

Enable Maximum Number of Find Select this option and enter the number in the text box to specify
Me/Follow Me Invocations the maximum number of simultaneous call processing
invocations (calls) for services with Follow Me redirection, for
example, Simultaneous Ringing, Sequential Ringing, and
Remote Office.

Enable Maximum Find Me/Follow Select this option and enter the number in the text box to specify
Me Depth the maximum depth of forking for Simultaneous Ringing,
Sequential Ringing, and Remote Office services. When
cascaded forking services are allowed, a small group of
subscribers can consume a disproportionate share of system
resources for each incoming call.

Maximum Redirection Depth Select this option and enter the number in the text box to specify
the maximum depth (call chaining) during the redirection
process. When the maximum redirection depth specified by this
policy is exceeded, the call is short-circuited. If a call is
redirected to a virtual subscriber (for example, Voice Mail) then
the system default settings are used for the redirection depth
limit.

Incoming Caller ID

Use User Dialable Caller ID This option allows you to specify the Dialable Caller ID policy to
Policy use.
Use Group Dialable Caller ID  Select Use Service Provider/Enterprise Dialable Caller ID Policy
Policy to use the policy defined on this page.
 Select Use System Caller ID Policy to use the policy defined for
the user’s group.
Dialable Caller ID: On/Off Check On to enable or check Off to disable the use of the
dialable caller ID.

3) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, click Cancel to display the previous page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 326 OF 350
 CUSTOMER ADMINISTRATOR

The customer administrator only has access to the Group, Users, and Change Password
pages. The customer administrator has no access to Call Capacity and has read-only
access to Intercept Group. This section provides details on the procedures available to
such administrators through the web interface.
To add a customer administrator, see section 4.7.2 Add Enterprise Administrator.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 327 OF 350
 13 Profile Menu (Customer Administrator)

The Customer Administrator – Profile menu page includes menu items that relate to all
profiles that the customer administrator can access. This chapter includes information
related to Customer Administrator – Profile menu items that can be performed by the
customer administrator. Links to the following menu pages from the Profile menu are
included in this chapter:
 Groups
 Users
 Change Password

13.1 Access Profile Menu

When you log in as a customer administrator, the Customer Administrator – Profile menu
page appears. Although the link on the top left displays “Enterprise”, the welcome banner
shows you are logged in as a customer administrator. This is your Home page. Click
Home to access this page from any other page in BroadWorks.

Figure 282 Customer Administrator – Home

13.2 Groups
Use the Groups menu item on the Customer Administrator – Profile menu page to:
 List Groups
 Add Group
 Add Group with Wizard

NOTE: It is the responsibility of the customer administrator to add the first group with the Group
Setup Wizard. Additional groups can be added by the group administrator. For reference and
procedural information to add, modify, and delete groups after the first group is created, see the
BroadWorks Application Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide (Parts 1 and 2).

13.2.1 List Groups

You use the Customer Administrator – Groups page to list the groups on the system as
shown in the following figure. On this page, you can search for a particular group. From
this page, you can add a group, add a group using the wizard, or select a group to be
modified or deleted.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 328 OF 350
 The Customer Administrator – Groups page is a list page that contains an advanced
search. The Group ID, Group Name, and User Limit appear for each group. Depending
on the number of pages of data in a list, list pages allow you to present the data several
different ways. You can click the headings of a column to change the sort order of items in
the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search criteria, or click the page
links, for example, Next or Previous. The advanced search lets you define specific
search criteria to narrow your search and display a manageable list. For more information
on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web Interface
Administration Guide.

Figure 283 Customer Administrator – Groups

1) On the Customer Administrator – Profile menu page, click Groups. The Customer
Administrator – Groups page appears.
2) To display the previous page, click OK or Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 329 OF 350
 13.2.2 Add Group
Use the Customer Administrator – Group Add page to add a group to the enterprise. To
add a group, use the Customer Administrator – Group Add page as follows:

Figure 284 Customer Administrator – Group Add

1) On the Customer Administrator – Profile menu page, click Groups. The Customer
Administrator – Groups page appears.
2) Click Add. The Customer Administrator – Group Add page appears.
3) Type information specific to the new group. To move between input boxes, use the
TAB key on the keyboard or click in the next text box.
Following is a table of the input boxes and a description for each. Required input
boxes are indicated with an asterisk (*).
Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Group ID * 1 through 30 The unique identification code for ABCcompany

characters. Must start this group, to be used when
with an underscore, adding group members, and
dash, letter, or digit, configuring group services. Do
and cannot contain not use spaces.
any of the following
characters: %, /, \, +,
double colon (::)
semicolon, single
quotes, double
quotes, or extended
Unicode characters.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 330 OF 350
 Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Default Domain The drop-down box The domain to be used by this [Link]
* lists the available group. The default domain is at m
domains. the beginning of the list. (Default)

Group Name 1 through 80 The true company name. Do not ABC Company,
characters. use backslashes or double Inc.
quotation marks.

Calling Line ID 1 through 80 The name displayed as the ABC Company,

Group Name characters. Cannot calling line ID. Inc.
contain %, +,
backslash, double
quotes, or extended
ASCII characters.

Location Dialing 1 through 30 The unique location code for the 12

Code characters. group (used for inter-site dialing).

Contact Name 1 through 30 The primary contact for the Joe Smith
characters. company, first, and last name.

Contact Phone 1 through 30 The complete phone number of 3015551000

characters. the above-named contact for the
group including, for example, a
“1” for a long-distance number.
Do not use spaces or dashes.

Contact E-mail 3 through 80 The e-mail address of the contact jo@abcompany

characters in for the group. .com
user@domain format.
Can contain only one
@ sign and the
following characters:
letters, digits, !, #, $,
%, &, *, +, -, /, =, _, {,},
|, ~, `, ., ?, ^, or single
quotes.

Time Zone * The drop-down box The group’s time zone. (GMT-05:00)
lists the time zones to (US) Eastern
select from. Standard Time

User Limits

Limited to * 1 through 999999. The limited number of users in 20

this group.

Additional Information

Address 2 lines, maximum 80 The street address of the group 123 Main Street
characters each. or company.

City 1 through 50 The city name of the group or Gaithersburg

characters. company.

State/Province The drop-down box The state or province selected MD

lists the values from from the drop-down list.
which to select.

Zip/Postal Code 1 through 50 The zip or postal code of the 20877

characters. group or company.

Country 1 through 50 The country of the group or United States

characters. company.

4) To save your changes and display the previous page, click OK. To exit without
saving, select another page or click Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 331 OF 350
 13.2.3 Add Group with Wizard
Use the Group Setup: Step 1 of 6 – Add a Group page to add a group to the system.
To add a group, display the Group Setup: Step 1 of 6 – Add a Group page. The Group
Setup Wizard includes six pages to fully configure a group, a group administrator, and
group resources.

Figure 285 Customer Administrator Group Setup: Step 1 of 6 – Add Group

1) On the Customer Administrator – Profile menu page, click Groups. The Customer
Administrator – Groups page appears.
2) Click Add Group Wizard. The Group Setup: Step 1 of 6 – Add a Group page
appears. This is the first page of the Group Setup Wizard.
3) Type information specific to the new group. To move between input boxes, use the
TAB key on the keyboard or click in the next text box.
Following is a table of the input boxes and a description for each. Required input
boxes are indicated with an asterisk (*).
Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Group ID * 1 through 30 The unique identification code for ABCcompany

characters. Must this group, to be used when adding
start with an group members, and configuring
underscore, dash, group services. Do not use spaces.
letter, or digit, and
cannot contain
any of the
following
characters: %, /,
\, +, double colon
(::) semicolon,
single quotes,
double quotes, or
extended Unicode
characters.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 332 OF 350
 Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Default Domain * The drop-down The domain to be used by this [Link]

box lists the group. The default domain is at the m
available domains. beginning of the list. (Default)

Group Name 1 through 80 The true company name. Do not ABC Company,
characters. use backslashes or double Inc.
quotation marks.

Calling Line ID 1 through 80 The name to be displayed as the ABC Company,

Group Name characters. group calling line ID Inc.
Cannot contain %,
+, backslash,
double quotes, or
extended ASCII
characters.

Location Dialing 1 through 30 The unique location code for the 12

Code characters. group (used for inter-site dialing).

Contact Name 1 through 30 The primary contact for the Joe Smith
characters. company, first and last name.

Contact Phone 1 through 30 The complete phone number of the 3015551000

characters. contact for the group including, for
example, a “1” for a long-distance
number. Do not use spaces or
dashes.

Contact E-mail 3 through 80 The e-mail address of the contact jo@abcompany

characters in for the group. .com
user@domain
format.
Can contain only
one @ sign and
the following
characters:
letters, digits, !, #,
$, %, &, *, +, -, /,
=, _, {, }, |, ~, `, .,
?, ^, or single
quotes.

Time Zone * The drop-down The group’s time zone. (GMT-05:00)

box lists the time (US) Eastern
zones from which Standard Time
to select.

User Limits

Limited to * 1 through 999999. The limited number of users in this 20

group.

Additional Information

Address 2 lines, maximum The street address of the group or 123 Main Street
80 characters company.
each.

City 1 through 50 The city name of the group or Gaithersburg

characters. company.

State/Province The drop-down The state or province selected from MD

box lists the the drop-down list.
values from which
to select.

Zip/Postal Code 1 through 50 The zip or postal code of the group 20877
characters. or company.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 333 OF 350
 Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Country 1 through 50 The country of the group or United States

characters. company.

4) To save this information and display the next setup page, click Next >. The Group
Setup: Step 2 of 6 – Assign Domains page appears. To save the information and
return to the Customer Administrator – Group page, click Finish. To cancel the
Group Setup Wizard and return to the Customer Administrator – Group page, click
Cancel.

Figure 286 Customer Administrator Group Setup: Step 2 of 6 – Assign Domains

5) In the Group Available Domains column, select the domains to be assigned to the
group. You can select some or all of the items from a column. Item names are listed
in numerical order. To select several items in sequential order, click the first number,
hold down the SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last number. To select
several items, but not in a particular order, click the items while holding down the
CTRL key on your keyboard.
− To move only selected domains from one box to the other, click Add >.
− To move all the domains from one box to the other, click Add All >>.
Assigned domains appear in the Group Assigned Domains box.
6) To save this information and display the next setup page, click Next >. The Group
Setup: Step 3 of 6 – Add a Group Administrator page appears. To save the
information and return to the Customer Administrator – Group page, click Finish. To
cancel the Group Setup Wizard and return to the Customer Administrator – Group
page, click Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 334 OF 350
 Figure 287 Customer Administrator Group Setup: Step 3 of 6 – Add Group Administrator

7) Type information specific to the new group. To move between text boxes, use the
TAB key on the keyboard, or click in the next text box.
Following is a table that describes the text boxes. Required information for text boxes
are indicated with an asterisk (*).
Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Administrator 6 through 80 The unique login ID for the group grpadmin1

ID * characters. Can administrator. Type this ID without
contain letters, digits, using spaces.
and the following
characters: !, #, $, %,
&, +, -, /, =, ?, ^, _, `, {,
|, }, periods (.), ~, and
single quotes (').

Domain The drop-down box The name of the domain. abcdistributing.

lists the available com
domains.

First Name 1 through 30 The first name of the group Joe

characters. administrator.

Last Name 1 through 30 The last name of the group Smith

characters. administrator.

Initial Must follow the The initial password for the group *******
Password * password rules for the administrator. Asterisks appear on
group. the page instead of the characters
typed.

Re-type Initial Same as for Initial The password for the group *******
Password * Password. administrator is typed a second time
for confirmation. Asterisks appear
on the page instead of the
characters typed.

Language * The drop-down box Displays all languages configured English

lists all languages for your system. English is the
configured for your default. Once you change your
system. language setting, you must log out
and log in for the settings to take
effect.

8) Click Add. The new administrator appears in the list at the bottom of the Group
Setup: Step 3 of 6 – Add a Group Administrator page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 335 OF 350
 9) To save this information and display the next setup page, click Next >. The Group
Setup: Step 4 of 6 – Authorize Services page appears. To save the information and
return to the Customer Administrator – Group page, click Finish. To cancel the
Group Setup Wizard and return to the Customer Administrator – Group page, click
Cancel.

Figure 288 Customer Administrator Group Setup: Step 4 of 6 – Authorize Services

Use this page to authorize the use of the service packs and services.
10) Click Select All or check individual services to permit the use of services by the
group.
Authorized Service Packs and Services are indicated by a check mark. Checked
services are available for authorization to a group.
11) Check the Limited To: box to the right of the service name (where available), and type
a number of services available for assignment for this group.
Based on the number of licenses purchased, this field can be used to track and limit
the number of services assigned.
12) To save this information and display the next setup page, click Next >. The Group
Setup: Step 5 of 6 – Add Phone Numbers page appears. To save the information and
return to the Customer Administrator – Group page, click Finish. To cancel the
Group Setup Wizard and return to the Customer Administrator – Group page, click
Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 336 OF 350
 Figure 289 Group Setup: Step 5 of 6 – Add Phone Numbers

13) Click the range to add in the Available Range(s) box and then click Add >. You can
select some or all of the items in a column. Items are listed in numerical order.
To select several items in sequential order, click the first number, hold down the
SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last number. To select several items,
but not in a particular order, click the items while holding down the CTRL key on
the keyboard. The number or range appears in the Available Phone Number(s) box.
14) Click the phone number or several numbers to assign in the Available Phone
Number(s) box and click Add >. You can select some or all of the items in a column.
Items are listed in numerical order. To select several items in sequential order, click
the first number, hold down the SHIFT key on the keyboard, and click the last number.
To select several items, but not in a particular order, click the items while holding
down the CTRL key on the keyboard.
To move all the phone numbers from one box to the other, click Add All >>.
Assigned phone numbers appear in the Assigned box.
15) To save this information and display the next setup page, click Next >. The Group
Setup: Step 6 of 6 – Add Identity/Device Profiles page appears. To save the
information and return to the Customer Administrator – Group page, click Finish. To
cancel the Group Setup Wizard and return to the Customer Administrator – Group
page, click Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 337 OF 350
 Figure 290 Customer Administrator Group Setup: Step 6 of 6 – Add Identity/Device Profiles

Figure 291 Customer Administrator Group Setup: Step 6 of 6 – Add Identity/Device Profiles (IMS Deployments)

16) Type information specific to the new group. To move between input boxes, use the
TAB key on the keyboard, or click in the next text box.
Following is a table that describes the input boxes. Required input boxes are
indicated with an asterisk (*).
Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Identity/Device 1 through 80 The identity/device profile name. CyberGroupIAD1

Profile Name * characters.

Identity/Device The drop-down box The device type. Cisco 2421-16

Profile Type lists available Device types in the list with the Cisco 2421-24
identity/device profile same name but different
types. capabilities are differentiated by
following the name with the
number of available ports.

Protocol The drop-down box The communication protocol used MGCPIETF 1.0
lists the available by the device.
values. Not available in IMS deployments.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 338 OF 350
 Setting Name Allowed Values Description Example

Host Name/ 1 through 80 The host name or IP address of [Link]

IP Address characters. Cannot the device. Optional for some m
contain spaces or @ devices, such as IP phones. [Link]
symbols. Not available in IMS deployments.

Transport The drop-down box Allows the acceptable transports UDP, TCP, Unspecified
lists the available to be indicated: UDP, TCP, and
values. all. All indicates that all transports
are acceptable; this currently
indicates both UDP and TCP The
transport will not appear for
MGCP devices.
Not available in IMS mode.

MAC Address 12 characters. Can The unique Media Access Control 21A1423f23d2
only contain letters (MAC) address of your device's
and digits. network hardware.
Not available in IMS mode.

Serial Number 1 through 80 The serial number of the device. 123AB-C-456

characters. Not available in IMS deployments.

Description 1 through 80 A brief text description of the Bldg. 3 Device

characters. device, such as an internal
reference, manufacturer name, or
other internal feature.

Outbound Proxy 1 through 80 The host name or IP address of [Link]

Server characters. Cannot the proxy server to be used by this [Link]
contain spaces or @ device.
symbols. Not available in IMS deployments.

STUN Server 1 through 80 The host name or IP address of [Link]

characters. Cannot the Simple Traversal of UDP [Link]
contain spaces or @ through NAT (STUN) server to be
symbols. used by this device.
Not available in IMS deployments.

Physical 1 through 1024 The physical location is a text 202 Main Street Nowhere,
Location characters. value representing the physical FR
location of the user. Should
contain the exact information that
needs to go into the P-Access-
Network-Info header of the SIP
message. The attribute can have
extra or less white space and is
not case sensitive.

17) Click Add. The new device appears in the list at the bottom of the Group Setup: Step
6 of 6 – Add Devices page. Add all of the devices this group requires.
18) To save the information and return to the Customer Administrator – Group page, click
Finish.
To cancel the Group Setup Wizard and return to the Customer Administrator – Group
page, click Cancel.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 339 OF 350
 13.3 Users
Use the Users menu item on the Customer Administrator – Profile menu page to display
all users in all groups and departments.
The Customer Administrator – Users page is a list page that contains an advanced
search. The Last Name, First Name, Phone Number, and E-Mail Address appear for
each user. Depending on the number of pages of data in a list, list pages allow you to
present the data several different ways. You can click the headings of a column to change
the sort order of items in the column, use the input boxes below the data to specify search
criteria, or click the page links, for example, Next or Previous. The advanced search lets
you define specific search criteria to narrow your search and display a manageable list.
For more information on defining search criteria, see the BroadWorks Getting Started Web
Interface Administration Guide.
You can open the profile for any user listed on the Customer Administrator – Users page
by clicking the name of the user or the Edit link. For procedures related to user
configuration and for enabling user services, refer to the document BroadWorks
Application Server Group Web Interface Administration Guide (Parts 1 and 2).

Figure 292 Customer Administrator – Users

13.4 Change Password

Use the Change Password page to change your password. All the fields are required.

Figure 293 Customer Administrator – Change Password

1) On the Customer Administrator – Profile page, select Change Password.

2) In the *Current Password text box, enter the password you use now.
3) In the *Reset Password text box, enter the new password.
4) In the *Re-type new password text box, confirm your new password by tying it again.
5) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page. To exit without saving, select another page
or click Cancel to display the previous page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 340 OF 350
 PASSWORD-ONLY
ADMINISTRATION

Enterprise administrators may be restricted to modifying users’ CommPilot web interface

passwords and voice portal passcodes. This section provides details on the procedures
available to such administrators through the web interface.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 341 OF 350
 14 Profile Menu (Password-only Administrator)

The Enterprise – Profile menu page includes menu items that relate to all profiles that the
enterprise administrator can access. This chapter includes documentation related to
Enterprise – Profile menu items that can be performed by the password-only enterprise
administrator.
Links to the following menu pages from the Profile menu are included in this chapter:
 Change Password
 Change User’s Web Password or Voice Portal Passcode

14.1 Access Profile Menu

When you log in as a password-only enterprise administrator, the Enterprise – Profile
menu page appears. This is your Home page. Click Home to access this page from any
other page in BroadWorks.

Figure 294 Password Administrator – Profile Menu

14.2 Change Password

Use the Change Password page to change your password. All the fields are required.

Figure 295 Passowrd Administrator – Change Password

1) On the Enterprise – Profile page, select Change Password.

2) In the *Current Password text box, enter the password you use now.
3) In the *Reset Password text box, enter the new password.
4) In the *Re-type new password text box, confirm your new password by tying it again.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 342 OF 350
 5) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

14.3 Change User’s Web Password or Voice Portal Passcode

The Enterprise – Modify User Password page allows you to modify the web password or
voice portal passcode for an individual user.

Figure 296 Password Administrator – Modify User Password

1) On the Enterprise – Profile menu page, click Change User Password. The
Enterprise – Modify User Password page appears.
2) Enter the ID of the user whose password you want to modify in the User ID box.
3) Specify whether to modify the user’s CommPilot web interface password or voice
portal passcode.
4) Enter and confirm the new password in the Reset Password area of the page.
5) Save your changes. Click Apply or OK. Apply saves your changes. OK saves your
changes and displays the previous page.
To exit without saving, select another page or click Cancel to display the previous
page.

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 343 OF 350
Index

Activating Adding, 174

Agent unavailable codes, 179 Listing, 173
Call disposition codes, 181 Modifying and deleting, 176
Emergency zones, group, 311 Unavailable codes, 177
Enterprise trunk number ranges, 126 Activating and deactivating, 179
Services, mid-call, 134 Adding, 180
Third-Party Voice Mail Support, user, 330 Defaults, 177
Adding Listing, 179
Administrators, 51 Modifying and deleting, 180
Agent threshold profiles, 174 Announcements
Agent unavailable codes, 180 Answer confirmation prompt, loading, 243
Call capacity groups, 306 BroadWorks Mobility, suppressing, 167
Call disposition codes, 182 Intercepted calls, configuring, 322, 323
Carriers, 90 Pre-alerting, configuring, 135
Common phone numbers, 220 Transfer to voice mail warning, enabling, 304
Communication barring Voice portal, 268
Digit pattern criteria, 204 Answer confirmation, configuring, 243
Profiles, 210 Assigning
Custom tags to identity/device profiles, 106 Group resources, 288
Departments, 60 Communication barring profile, 317
Dialable Caller ID selective criteria, 84 Domains, 289
Dialing Plan policy access code, 75 Meet-Me conference ports, 291
Enterprise trunks, 140 Network classes of service, 291
Ordered routing, 142 Numbers, 293
Users, 146 Office zones, 300
Weighted routing, 141 Paging group maximum size, 290
Events to schedules, 63 Route point external systems, 301
Groups, 36, 38 Session admission control capacity, 298
Identity/device profiles, 95 Trunking call capacity, 297
Numbers to common phone list, 220 Numbers to IMRN pool, 128
Outgoing MWI number, 329 Trunk groups to enterprise trunk, 144
Report templates, Call Center, 187 User resources
Schedules, 63 Charge number, 326
Service pack migration tasks, 249 Classmark, 326
Service packs, 118 Home zone, 325
Session admission control groups, 160 Authorizing group services, 296
Users to enterprise trunks, 146
Barring communication, 199, 316
Voice VPN policies, 79
Branding
Administrators
Call Center reports, 185
Adding, 51
Voice portal, 268
Customer, 338
Web portal, 269
Deleting, 58
Department, role, 32 BroadWorks Anywhere number lookup, 219
Enterprise, 50 BroadWorks Communicator, configuration server
Changing password, 49 URL, 132
Responsibilities, 30 BroadWorks Mobility, 167
Role, 30 Call capacity groups, 306
Tasks, 31 Adding, 306
Group, role, 32 Deleting, 309
Listing, 50 Listing, 306
Modifying, 52 Modifying, 308
Password-only, 353 Call Center
Policies, 53 Agents
Advice Of Charge, notifications frequency, 139 Default settings, 171
Agents Threshold profiles, 173
Availability settings, 171 Unavailable codes, 177
Guard timer, 171 Call disposition codes, 181
Threshold profiles, 173 External reporting, enabling, and disabling, 185

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 344 OF 350
 Overview, 170 Changing password, 350
Queues, prioritizing, 184 Groups, managing, 338
Reports Users, listing, 350
Branding, 185 Default communication barring profile, selecting, 215
Scheduling, 191 Delay between Advice Of Charge notifications, 139
Templates, 186
Deleting
Routing policies, 184
Administrators, 58
Call disposition codes Agent threshold profiles, 176
Activating and listing, 181 Agent unavailable codes, 180
Adding, 182 Call capacity groups, 309
Modifying and deleting, 182 Call Center
Overview, 181 Report templates, 190
Usage, 183 Scheduled reports, 197
Call logs, enhanced, 134 Call disposition codes, 182
Call Processing Policies Carriers, 92
Enterprise, 67 Common phone list numbers, 222
Group, 281 Communication barring
User, 332 Digit pattern criteria, 205
Carriers, 89 Profiles, 214
Adding, 90 Custom tags from identity/device profiles, 106
Deleting, 92 Departments, 61
Listing, 90 Dial Plan policy access code, 76
Modifying, 91 Dialable Caller ID, 86
Preferred Enterprise trunk, 150
Group, 315 Home zones, 313
User, 331 Identity/device profiles, 107
Changing administrator password Numbers
Customer, 350 Common phone list, 222
Enterprise, 49 Group, 296
Password-only, 353 Outgoing MWI number, 329
Schedules, 62
Charge number, assigning to user, 326
Service pack migration tasks, 260
Classmark, assigning to user, 326 Service packs, 120
Common phone list Session admission control group, 163
Adding numbers, 220 Users from enterprise trunk, 148
Deleting numbers, 222 Voice VPN policies, 80
Importing, 222 Departments, 59
Modifying, 221 Adding, 60
Viewing, 220 Administrator role, 32
Communication barring, 199, 316 Deleting, 61
Digit pattern criteria, 200 Listing, 59
Adding, 204 Modifying, 61
Modifying and deleting, 205 Device management
Usage, 201 Event queues, viewing, 244
Viewing, 200, 201 Identity/device profiles, 94
Profiles, 206 Profile authentication password rules, 223
Adding, 210
Dial Plan policy, 73
Assignable to users, selecting, 318
Adding access code, 75
Assigning to group, 317
Modifying or deleting access code, 76
Enterprise default, selecting, 215
Modifying or deleting, 214 Dialable Caller ID, 81
Usage, 207 Configuring, 83
Viewing, 206, 207 Deleting, 86
System-defined criteria Modifying, 86
Incoming, 124 Selective criteria
Outgoing, 122 Adding, 84
Prioritizing, 83
Copying, service pack migration tasks, 259
Viewing settings, 82
Creating. See Adding
Directories
Custom ringback, external, 133 Common phone list, 220
Custom tags, identity/device profile, 105 Enterprise, 225
Customer administrator, 338 LDAP, 246

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 345 OF 350
Disposition codes. See Call disposition codes In enterprise, 35
Domains Meet-Me conference ports, assigning, 291
Assigning to group, 289 MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint, 314
Groups, assigned, 109 Network classes of service
Listing, 109 Assigning, 291
Viewing assigned, 112
Downloading identity/device profile files, 103
Numbers
Emergency zones, 311 Assigning, 293
Enabling Call Center report templates, 190 Listing, 293
Enhanced call logs, viewing configuration, 134 Unassigning, 295, 296
Enterprise Office zones, assigning, 300
Home page, 33 Paging targets capacity, assigning, 290
Phone directory, 225 Preferred carrier, 315
Profile, viewing or modifying, 48 Profile, modifying, 275
Enterprise administrators. See Administrators Resources, assigning, 288
Enterprise trunks, 139 Route point external systems, assigning, 301
Adding, 140, 141, 142 Services
Deleting, 150 Authorizing, 296
Listing, 140 Configuring, 302
Modifying, 149 Session admission control capacity, 298
Number ranges Third-party voice mail, 316
Activating, 126 Trunking call capacity, 297
Listing, 113 Utilities, 321
Trunk groups Voice Messaging warning tone, 304
Assigning, 144 Voice portal home zone, 305
Prioritizing, 145 Web policies, 277
Users Home page, 33
Adding, 146 Home zones
Deleting, 148 Group
Viewing, 147, 148 Adding, 312
Events, in schedule Modifying and deleting, 313
Adding, 63 Voice portal, assigning, 305
Modifying, 66 User, assigning, 325
Extensions, Virtual On-Net, 77 Identity/device
External Custom Ringback Endpoints, listing, 93
Enterprise, 133 Profiles, 94
Adding, 95
User, 325
Custom tags, 105, 106
External reporting, Call Center, 185 Deleting, 107
Feature access codes, 228 External configuration, 100
Files, identity/device profile, 103 Files, 103, 104
Greetings. See Announcements General settings, 98
Groups Line/ports, reordering, 101
Adding, 36, 38 Listing, 94
Administrator role, 32 Modifying, 97
Call capacity Users, assigned, 101
Capacity groups, 306 Importing common phone list, 222
Session admission, 298 IMRNs
Trunking, 297 Assigning, 128
Call Center, 319 Listing, 127
Call Processing Policies, 281 Unassigning, 129
Communication barring profile In-Call Service Activation, configuring, 134
Assignable to users, 318 Intercepting, groups, 321
Assigning, 317
IP Multimedia Routing Numbers. See IMRNs
Configuring, 273
Domains, assigning, 289 LDAP directory, configuring, 246
Emergency zones, 311 Listing
Home zones, 312 Administrators, in enterprise, 50
Intercepting, 321 Agent threshold profiles, 173
Listing Agent unavailable codes, 179
Assigned specific domain, 109 Call capacity groups, 306

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 346 OF 350
 Call Center report templates, 187 Call Center
Call disposition codes, 181 Agent settings, 171, 176, 180
Carriers, 90 Report templates, 190
Common phone numbers, 220 Scheduled reports, 197
Departments, 59 Call disposition codes, 182
Device management events Carriers, 91
Completed, 245 Common phone list, 221
In queue, 244 Communication barring
Domains, 109 Digit pattern criteria, 205
Enterprise trunks, 140 Profiles, 214
Groups Departments, 61
Assigned specific domain, 109 Dial Plan policy access code, 76
In enterprise, 35 Dialable Caller ID, 86
Identity/device Emergency zones, 313
Endpoints, 93 Enterprise profile, 48
Profiles, 94 Enterprise trunk, 149
IMRNs, 127 Events in schedule, 66
Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers, 130 Groups
Network classes of service, 111 Profile, 275
Numbers, 113 Web policies, 277
Office zones, 114 Home zones, 313
Route point external systems, 110 Identity/device profiles, 97, 106
Schedules, 62 External settings, 100
Service instances, 47 General settings, 98
Service pack migration tasks, 248 Schedules, 66
Service packs, 117 Service pack migration tasks, 254
Services, 116 Service packs, 119
Session admission control groups, 160 Session admission control group, 162
Users Voice VPN policies, 80
Assigned to identity/device profile, 101 MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint
In enterprise, 46 Enterprise, viewing, 151
Meet-Me conference ports Group, configuring, 314
Enterprise, viewing, 217 SMS templates, 151
Group, assigning, 291 Network classes of service
Menus Assigning to group, 291
Customer administrator, Profile, 338 Groups, assigned, 112
Enterprise Listing, 111
Call Center, 170 Notifications frequency, Advice Of Charge, 139
Communication Barring, 199 Number Portability Query
Meet-Me Conferencing, 217 Configuring, 158
Profile, 34 Overview, 156
Resources, 88
Numbers
Services, 131
Enterprise, listing, 113
Utilities, 218
Group, assigning, 293
Group
Call Center, 319 Office zones
Communication Barring, 316 Enterprise
Profile, 274 Listing, 114
Resources, 288 Viewing usage, 115
Services, 302 Group, assigning, 300
Utilities, 321 On-Net Enterprise Extensions, 77
Password-only administrator, Profile, 353 Ordered routing, adding enterprise trunks with, 142
Message waiting indicator, 328 Outgoing message waiting indicator, user, 328
Migrating service packs, 247 Paging group maximum size
Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers, 130 Enterprise, viewing, 92
Modifying Group, assigning, 290
Administrators Passcode
Policies, 53 Rules, enterprise, 239
Profile, 52 User, changing, 354
Agent settings, Call Center, 171, 176, 180 Password
Call capacity groups, 308 Changing

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 347 OF 350
 Customer administrator, 350 Service packs, 117
Enterprise administrator, 49 Session admission control capacity, 121
Password-only administrator, 353 Trunking call capacity, 125
User, 353, 354 Group, 288
Rules Meet-Me conference ports, 291
Device profile authentication, 223 Network classes of service, 291
SIP authentication, 240 Numbers, 293
Users and administrators, 236 Office zones, 300
Password-only administrator, changing password Paging group maximum size, 290
Own, 353 Route point external systems, 301
User, 354 Session admission control capacity, 298
Phone lists. See Directories Trunking call capacity, 297
Policies Restricting calls, 199, 316
Administrators, 53 Ringback, external, 133
Call Processing Roaming restrictions, 168
Enterprise, 67 Route Point
Group, 281 Agent default settings, 171
User, 332 Agent unavailable codes, 177
Dial Plan, 73 Call disposition codes, 181
Roaming Restrictions, 168 External systems
Zone Calling Restrictions, 168 Assigning to group, 301
Pre-alerting Announcement, 135 Listing, 110
Preferred carriers Viewing usage, 111
Group, 315 Overview, 310
User, 331 Routing policies, Call Center, 184
Prioritizing Schedules, 62
Call Centers, 184 Adding, 63
Trunk groups in enterprise trunk, 145 Adding events, 63
Profiles Listing and deleting, 62
Communication barring, 206 Modifying, 66
Device, 94 Scheduling Call Center reports, 192
Enterprise, 48 Scope, voice portal, 137
Group, 275 Selective criteria, Dialable Caller ID, prioritizing, 83
Reports, Call Center Service instances, listing, 47
Branding, 185
Service pack migration tasks, 247
Scheduled, 191
Adding, 249
Adding, 192
Copying, 259
Modifying or deleting, 197
Deleting, 260
Viewing, 192
Listing, 248
Templates, 186
Modifying, 254
Adding, 187
Status, 262
Enabling and disabling, 190
Terminating, 265
Listing, 187
Modifying and deleting, 190 Service packs
Viewing usage, 191 Adding, 118
Deleting, 120
Resources
Listing, 117
Enterprise, 88
Modifying, 119
Carriers, 89
Viewing usage, 120
Communication barring criteria, 122, 124
Domains, 109 Services
Enterprise trunk number ranges, 113, 126 Authorized to enterprise, 116
Group paging targets capacity, 92 Authorizing to group, 296
Identity/device endpoints, 93 Enterprise-wide settings, 131
Identity/device profiles, 94 Advice Of Charge, 139
IMRNs, 127 BroadWorks Communicator, 132
Mobile Subscriber Directory Numbers, 130 BroadWorks Mobility, 167
Network classes of service, 111 Call Center, 170
Numbers, 113 Communication Barring, 199
Office zones, 114 Enhanced Call Logs, 134
Route point external systems, 110 Enterprise Trunk, 139
External Custom Ringback, 133

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 348 OF 350
 In-Call Service Activation, 134 Service packs, 120
Meet-Me Conferencing, viewing, 217 Users
MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint, 151 Call Processing Policies, 332
Number Portability Query, 156 Carrier, preferred, 331
Pre-alerting Announcement, 135 Charge number, assigning, 326
Voice Messaging, 138 Classmark, assigning, 326
Voice Portal, 137 External Custom Ringback, 325
Zone Calling Restrictions, 168 Home zone, assigning, 325
Group-specific settings, 302 Listing, 46
Call Capacity Management, 306 Outgoing message waiting indicator, 328
Communication Barring, 316 Password, changing, 353
Emergency Zones, 311 Role, 32
MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint, 314 Third-Party Voice Mail Support, 330
Preferred Carrier Group, 315 Utilities, 218
Route Point, 310
Verify Translation and Routing, 266
Third-Party Voice Mail Support, 316
Voice Messaging, 304 Viewing
Zone Calling Restrictions, 305 Call Center reports, scheduled, 192
User-specific settings Communication barring
Charge Number, 326 Digit pattern criteria, 200, 201
Classmark, 326 Profiles, 206
External Custom Ringback, 325 System-defined criteria, 122, 124
Preferred Carrier User, 331 Dialable Caller ID settings, 82
Third-Party Voice Mail Support, 330 Enhanced call logs configuration, 134
Zone Calling Restrictions, 325 Usage
Call Center report templates, 191
Session admission control
Call disposition codes, 183
Capacity
Communication barring resources, 122,
Assigning to group, 298
124, 201, 207
Enterprise, viewing, 121
Office zones, 115
Groups, 159
Route point external system, 111
Adding, 160
Service packs, 120
Deleting, 163
Users in enterprise trunk, 147
Listing, 160
Modifying, 162 Viewing, modifing, or deleting, enterprise trunk
White list, configuring, 164 users, 147
SIP authentication password rules, 240 Virtual On-Net Enterprise Extensions, 77
SMDI, message waiting indicator, 328 Virtual users. See Service instances
SMS templates for MWI Delivery to Mobile Endpoint Voice mail, third-party, 316
Adding, 152 Voice Messaging
Modifying, 155 Enterprise, 138
Viewing, 151 Group, 304
Terminating, service pack migration tasks, 265 Voice portal
Third-Party Voice Mail Support Branding, 268
Group, 316 Home zone, group, 305
User, 330 Scope configuring, 137
Trunking call capacity Voice VPN, 78
Assigning to group, 297 Policies
Enterprise, 125 Adding, 79
Unassigning numbers Modifying and deleting, 80
From IMRN pool, 129 Rules, configuring, 78
Group, 295 Warning tone, Voice Messaging, group, 304
Usage Web portal branding, 269
Call Center report templates, 191 Weighted routing, adding enterprise trunks, 141
Call disposition codes, 183 White list, configuring for Session Admission Control,
Communication barring 166
Enterprise-defined criteria, 201 Wizard, adding groups, 38
Profiles, 207
System-defined criteria, 122, 124 Zone Calling Restrictions
Office zones, 115 Enterprise, 168
Route point external systems, 111 Group, 305
User, 325

BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00

©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 349 OF 350
BROADWORKS APPLICATION SERVER ENTERPRISE WEB INTERFACE ADMINISTRATION GUIDE 10-BD5123-00
©
2015 BROADSOFT, INC. PAGE 350 OF 350